Ascent Premium (2023) - Car SUBARU - Free user manual and instructions

Type of Product	SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle)
Model Year	2023
Trim Level	Premium
Drivetrain	Symmetrical All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Engine Type	2.4L turbocharged 4-cylinder (FA24)
Horsepower	260 hp @ 5,600 rpm
Torque	277 lb-ft @ 2,000-4,800 rpm
Transmission	Lineartronic CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission)
Fuel Economy (city/highway)	21/27 mpg (EPA est.)
Seating Capacity	7-8 passengers (2nd row bench or captain's chairs)
Cargo Volume (behind 3rd row)	17.8 cu ft
Cargo Volume (max)	86.5 cu ft
Curb Weight	4,430 lbs (approx.)
Length	196.8 in
Width (without mirrors)	76.0 in
Height	71.6 in
Wheelbase	113.8 in
Ground Clearance	8.7 in
Fuel Tank Capacity	19.4 gallons
Infotainment System	11.6-inch touchscreen with Subaru Starlink
Sound System	6-speaker system (Premium trim)
Safety Features	Subaru EyeSight Driver Assist (Pre-collision braking, Lane Keep Assist, Adaptive Cruise Control)
Airbags	Front, side, curtain, and driver knee airbags
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 6,000 miles or 6 months
Warranty (Basic/Drivetrain)	3 years/36,000 miles / 5 years/60,000 miles

Frequently Asked Questions - Ascent Premium (2023) SUBARU

What type of oil does the 2023 Subaru Ascent Premium require?

The 2023 Subaru Ascent Premium requires 0W-20 synthetic oil meeting Subaru ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6 standards. Use only Subaru genuine oil or equivalent.

How often should I change the oil?

Subaru recommends an oil change every 6,000 miles or 6 months, whichever comes first for normal driving conditions. Severe conditions may require more frequent changes.

What is the towing capacity of the Ascent Premium?

The 2023 Subaru Ascent Premium can tow up to 5,000 lbs when properly equipped with the towing package. Always check your vehicle's specific rating.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

On the infotainment screen, go to Settings > Bluetooth, then set your phone to discoverable. Select 'Add New Device' and follow the prompts to pair.

What is the recommended tire pressure?

The recommended tire pressure for the 2023 Subaru Ascent Premium is 33 psi for both front and rear tires. Check the driver's door jamb label.

Does the Ascent Premium have a spare tire?

Yes, it comes with a temporary spare tire under the cargo floor. The full-size spare is not standard on Premium trim.

How do I reset the oil maintenance light?

After an oil change, turn the ignition on, press the INFO button to select the oil life screen, then hold the SET button until the oil life resets to 100%.

What type of fuel is required?

The 2023 Subaru Ascent Premium requires regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher. Premium fuel is not required but can be used.

How do I use the EyeSight cruise control?

Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel, then set your speed by pressing the SET/- button. Use RES/+ to resume. Adaptive cruise control adjusts speed automatically.

Where can I find the owner's manual?

The owner's manual is stored in the glove compartment. A digital copy is also available on Subaru's website via the Starlink system.

USER MANUAL Ascent Premium (2023) SUBARU

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner's Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its operation. For information not found in this Owner's Manual, such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold. This Owner's Manual applies to all models and covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need the information found herein.

"SUBARU" and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.

© Copyright 2022 SUBARU CORPORATION

Vehicle types

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

Line drawing of a modern SUV with front and rear panels, no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a car rear view showing front and side profiles (no text or symbols)

002151

Warranties

■ Warranties for U.S.A.

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru America, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come with the following warranties

• SUBARU Limited Warranties
- Federal Emission Control Systems Warranties
- California Emissions Control Systems Warranties

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the following warranties:

• SUBARU Limited Warranty
- Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applicability, details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Service Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

■ Warranties except for U.S.A and Canada

All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions, is in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner's Manual

■ Using your Owner's Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious injury and damage to your vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chapter contains the information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seatbelt and contains precautions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indicators and how to use the instruments and other switches.

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start an operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive y SUBARU in various conditions and explains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if have a problem, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep y SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service This chapter informs you when you need to take your SUBARU to the dealer for scheduled maintenance and informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimensions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards and Reporting safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that's this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

For EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

■ Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGS, CAUTIONs and NOTES in this manual. These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or suggestions about how to make better use of your vehicle.

■ Safety symbol

000013

You will find a circle with a slash through in this manual. This symbol means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen", depending upon the context.

■ Abbreviation list
You may find several abbreviations in t manual. The meanings of the abbreviations are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation	Meaning
ABS Anti-lock	brake system
A/C Air conditioner
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR	Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor
AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

hAWD All-wheel drive
s BSD/RCTA	Blind Spot Detection/Rear Cross Traffic Alert
CVT	Continuously variable trans-mission
DRL Daytime	running light
EBD	Electronic brake force distrib- bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW	Gross axle weight
GAWR	Gross axle weight rating
GPS	Global positioning system
GVW	Gross vehicle weight
GVWR	Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent

Abbreviation	Meaning
SLATCH	Lower anchors and tethers for children
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT	Methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
OBD	On-board diagnostics
RAB	Reverse Automatic Braking
RON	Research octane number
SRH	Steering Responsive Headlight
SRS	Supplemental restraint system
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS	Tire pressure monitoring system

Vehicle symbols

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to "Warning and indicator lights" P24.

Mark Name

	WARNING
	CAUTION
	Read these instructions carefully
	Wear eye protection
	Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid
	Keep children away
	Keep flames away
	Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when driving

■ Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

- All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

- To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbag does not replace the safety benefits of wearing a seatbelt. Used in combination with the seatbelts, the SRS airbag offers vehicle occupants the best possible protection in the event of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag.

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

• For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P52.
• For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)" P83.

■ Child safety

WARNING

• Never hold a child on your lap in your arms while the vehicle moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in collision, because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
• While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should always be seated in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
• Seat children in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint system or in a seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

or is

a

with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

• NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
• Always turn the child safety locks to the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out. Refer to "Child safety locks" P145.
• Always lock the passenger's windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window. Refer to "Windows" P145.
• Never leave unattended children, adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.

• When leaving the vehicle, close all windows and lock all doors.
• In models with power rear gate, when it operates, the rear gate moves with remarkable force. It is possible to be injured if anyone is caught in or hit by the rear gate is be sure to obey the following cautions.
• Check that there are no children around the rear gate before operating the power rear gate.
• Do not allow children to operate the power rear gate.

For instructions and precautions, carefully read the following sections.

• For the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P52.

• For the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

• For the SRS airbag system, refer to "SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)" P83.

• For the power rear gate, refer to "Power rear gate" P149.

■ Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
• Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
  • Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leave or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

• If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully ope
• Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

■ Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the bloodstream delays your reaction time and impairs your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if you drink a little – it will increase the risk being involved in a serious or fat

the accident, injuring or killing yourself your passengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident, alcohol may increase the

s severity of that injury.

Please don't drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. However if .you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up completely before getting behind the wheel.

■ Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may increase your, your passengers' and other persons' risk of being involved in a serious or fatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive p after taking any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take illegal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to those drugs.

■ Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction time will be delayed and your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers' and other persons' chances of being involved in a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but inste find a safe place to rest if you are tired sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you should share the driving w/others.

■ Modification of your vehicle

WARNING

Do not remove the genuine SUBAR navigation and/or audio system. Doing so could cause the following functions to be inoperable.

• Combination meter display (color LCD)
• Rear view image and help lines
• Vehicle settings
• Front and Rear Climate control
• Front seat heater and ventilation
• Clock
• Surround View Monitor

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified other than with genuine SUBARU parts and accessories. Other types of modifications could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting

from modification may not be covered under warranties.

■ Use of cell phones/texting and driving

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text while driving; it may distract your attention from driving and lead to an accident. If you use a cell phone to talk or text, first pull off the road and park in a safe place. In some States/Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on a phone while driving, but only if the phone is hands-free.

■ Driving vehicles equipped with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract your attention from driving. Also, do not operate the controls of the navigation system while driving. The loss of attention to driving could lead to an accident. If you wish to operate the controls of the naviga-

- CONTINUED -

tion system, first take the vehicle the road and stop it in a safe location.

■ Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your attention from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or cages can be throw around inside the vehicle and hurt you of your passengers. Besides, the pets can hurt under these situations. It is also for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harm which can be secured to the rear seat by a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be secured to the rear seat by routing a seatbelt through the carrier's handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger's seat. For further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection society or pet shop.

■ Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (if equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires offld. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. For detailed information, refer to "Tires and wheels" P495.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ On-road and off-road driving

This vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground clearance and higher center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over than ordinary passenger cars. It also handles and maneuvers differently from other passenger cars. For this reason, please read carefully the following section and follow the instructions and precautions in order to prevent serious injury or death due to loss of control, rollover and other accidents. Refer to "On-road and off-road driving" P420.

■ Attaching accessories

WARNING

• Do not attach any accessories, labels or stickers (other than properly placed inspection stickers) to the windshield. Such items may obstruct your view.
• If it is necessary to attach an accessory (such as an electronic toll collection (ETC) device or security pass) to the windshield, consult your SUBARU dealer for details on the proper location.
• Do not connect any unauthorized accessories or devices to the data link connector (OBDII port). This connector should be used only with compatible diagnostic devices for inspection and maintenance by an authorized service technician using authorized service tools. Connecting unauthorized devices, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, may

adversely affect vehicle systems, including safety systems, or allow others to access information stored in your vehicle. The use unauthorized devices may also cause unexpected malfunctions, such as a drained battery, or damage vehicle systems. The manufacturer's warranty will not cover any part that malfunctions fails, or is damaged due to the use of an unauthorized device with the data link connector.

General information

■ California Perchlorate Advisory

Certain vehicle components, such as air-hag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless entry transmitter batteries, may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.go hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

■ Noise from under the vehic NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours after the ignition switch is turned to "LOCK"/"OFF" position. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. This noise is caused by the operation of fuel evaporation leakage checking system and the operation is normal. The noise will stop after approximately 15 minutes.

■ Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
  • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  the • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could

- CONTINUED -

combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags	1
Keys and doors	2
Instruments and controls	3
Climate control	4
Audio	5
Interior equipment	6
Starting and operating	7
Driving tips	8
In case of emergency	9
Appearance care	10
Maintenance and service	11
Specifications	12
Consumer information and reporting safety defects	13
Index	14

Illustrated index

■ Exterior

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 002152

1 Engine hood (page 483)
2 Front wipers (page 243)
3 Headlights (page 231)
4 Replacing bulbs (page 511)
5 Moonroof (page 157)
6 Roof rails (page 428)
7 Outside mirrors (page 269)
8 Door locks (page 137)
9 Tire pressure (page 498)
10 Flat tires (page 452)
11 Snow tires (page 425)
12 Fog lights (page 239)
13 Towing hook (page 460)
14 Tie-down hooks (page 460)

1 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

002153

1 Rear window defogger (page 273)
2 Fuel filler lid and cap (page 338)
3 Child safety locks (page 145)
4 Tie-down hole (page 460)
5 Replacing bulbs (page 513)
6 Trailer hitch (page 432)
7 Rear gate (page 148)
8 Towing hook (page 460)
9 Rear window wiper (page 245)

Interior

▼ Passenger compartment area

▽ Second-row captain seat models

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels pointing to specific sections

1 Seatbelts (page 52)
2 Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 76)
3 Front seats (page 30)
4 Second-row seats (page 39)
5 Third-row seats (page 43)

▽ Second-row bench seat models

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels pointing to different sections

1 Seatbelts (page 52)
2 Lower anchorages for child restraint system (page 76)
3 Front seats (page 30)
4 Second-row seats (page 39)
5 Third-row seats (page 43)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8 002156

1 Power windows switches (page 145)
2 Door locks (page 138)
3 Remote control mirror switch (page 269)
4 Select lever (page 357)
5 View monitor switch (page 320)
6 12 V power outlet (page 310)
7 USB power supply (page 312)
8 Glove box (page 307)
9 Cup holder (page 308)
10 Center console (page 308)

1 2 3 1 5 4 8 9 10 11 7 6 002157

1 Map light switches (page 302)

2 Moonroof switch (page 158)

3 Sunshade switch (page 157)

4 Door interlock switch (page 302)

5 Button for SUBARU STARLINK

6 Center Information Display (CID) (page 201)/Climate control (page 280)/Audio*/Navigation system*

7 Electronic parking brake switch (page 374)

8 120 V power outlet (page 311)

9 Rear climate control panel (page 283)

10 USB power supply (page 312)

11 Cup holder (page 308)

*: For details about how to use the audio and navigation system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

NOTE

For models with SUBARU STARLINK: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK.

■ Instrument panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 9 8 002158

1 Seat position memory switch (page 35)
2 Power rear gate switch (page 149)
3 One-touch Interior Illumination switch (page 304)
4 Illumination brightness control dial (page 171)
5 Combination meter (page 168)
6 Hazard warning flasher switch (page 168)
7 Camera for Driver Monitoring System (page 402)
8 Tilt/Telescopic steering wheel (page 274)
9 Fuse box (page 510)
10 Hood release knob (page 483)

NOTE

About the EyeSight system: Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

Steering wheel

1 2 3 4 9 8 1 7 6 5 4 002180

1 Audio control switch* 1
2 Talk switch for voice command system*
3 Cruise control switches* 2
4 Shift paddles (page 359)
5 Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 275)
6 SRS airbag (page 83)
7 Horn (page 276)
8 Hands-free phone switch* 1
9 Control switches for combination meter display (color LCD) (page 195)
*1: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
*2: For details about how to use the switches, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

■ Light control and wiper control levers/switches

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 000761

1 Windshield wiper (page 241)
2 Mist (page 243)
3 Windshield washer (page 245)
4 Rear window wiper and washer switch (page 245)
5 Wiper intermittent time control switch (page 244)/Sensor sensitivity control (page 244)
6 Windshield wiper and washer switches (page 243)
7 Light control switch (page 231)
8 Fog light switch (page 239)
9 Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 231)
10 Headlight flasher High/Low beam change (page 234)
11 Turn signal lever (page 240)

■ Combination meter

▼ U.S.-spec. models

1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 ABS BRAKE CHECK ENGINE OFF OFF* VIN MPG AVG 0.8 MPG mi O MPH P 3.0 3 mi 300E

1 Tachometer (page 168)
2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page 191)
3 Combination meter display (page 194)
4 Trip meter and odometer (page 169)
5 Speedometer (page 168)
6 Fuel gauge (page 170)
7 Digital speed screen (page 198)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 170)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

▼ Except U.S.-spec. models

1 2 3 4 5 扣 AVG 99.9 km/h km O km/h P 3.4 km 8 7 6 002160

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1 Tachometer (page 168)
2 Select lever/gear position indicator (page 191)
3 Combination meter display (page 194)
4 Trip meter and odometer (page 169)
5 Speedometer (page 168)
6 Fuel gauge (page 170)
7 Digital speed screen (page 198)
8 Engine coolant temperature gauge (page 170)

■ Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page
(HW66)	Seatbelt warning light	173
PASSENGER	Front passenger's seatbelt warning light	173
(KTKW)	Rear seatbelt warning light	174
	SRS airbag system warning light	175
(85HD)	Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator	176
	Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator	176
(350W)	CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light	176
[(WAKK)]	Charge warning light	177
	Oil pressure warning light	177
(SHW7)	Engine low oil level warning light	177
AT OIL TEMP	AT OIL TEMP warning light	178

Mark Name Page
R.DIFF TEMP	Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)	178
ABS / (ABS)	ABS warning light 180
BRAKE / (!)	Brake system warning light	181
PARK / (P)	Electronic parking brake indicator light	181
	Door open warning light	183
	Engine hood open warning light	183
AWD	AWD warning light 183
	Power steering warning light	184
	Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light	183
	Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light	184

Mark Name Page
	Vehicle DynamicsControl OFF indicator light	185
	Turn signal indicator lights	191
	LED headlight warning light	191
	High beam indicator light	191
	High beam assist indicator light	191
	Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light	191
SRH OFF	Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light	191
SRH	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light	192
	Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)	192
	Access key warning indicator (if equipped)	186
	Security indicator light	190
DOE	Headlight indicator light	192
	X-MODE indicator 192
	Hill descent control indicator	192
	Low fuel warning light	183
	Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)	179
	Windshield washer fluid warning light	178
	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	192
	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	192
RAB	RAB warning indicator (if equipped)	193
RAB OFF	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	193

Mark Name Page
[805W]	Icy road surface warning indicator	193
	One-touch Interior Illumination indicator (if equipped)	194
	Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped)	193
	Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped)	193
	Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped)	193
	Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)	193

Function settings

■ Function settings and adjustments on the center information display

Setting adjustments can be manually changed within the center information display to meet your personal requirements. Refer to "Center information display (CID)" P201.

■ Individual settings and adjustments excluding center information display

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

Item Function Available settings	Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system	Operation/Non-operation Operation 144
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation		135

■ Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer

Item	Function	Available settings	Factory default setting
Alarm system	Monitoring start delay time (after closing doors)	0 seconds/30 seconds	30 seconds
	Map lights/Dome light/Cargo area light illumination	ON/OFF	OFF
Keyless access with push-button	Audible signal volume*2	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Remote keyless entry system	Audible signal volume*2	Level 1 to 7	Level 5
Remote power rear gate open function*1	Operation of power rear gate opening by remote transmitter/access key fob	Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing and holding	Pressing and holding
Key lock-in prevention	Key lock-in prevention	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Battery drainage prevention function	Battery drainage prevention function	Operation/Non-operation	Operation
Auto dimmer cancel	Sensitivity of the operation of the auto dimmer cancel	OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max	Mid
Item Function Available settings			Factory default setting
High beam assist function*	High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper*	Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper operation	Operation/Non-operation	U.S.-spec. models: Non-operationOther models: Operation

*1: If equipped
*2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1-1. Seats.... 30

Safety tips ....30

Manual seat (if equipped)....33

Power seat (if equipped) 34

Second-row seats 39

Third-row seats 43

Head restraints 47

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped).... 50

Front seat heater 51

Second-row seat heater ....51

1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped).... 52

1-4. Seatbelts.... 52

Seatbelt safety tips ....52

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) 54

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) 54

Seatbelt warning light and chime 55

Passengers seatbelt reminder....55

Fastening the seatbelt 55

Seatbelt maintenance....61

1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners 61

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt pretensioners 62

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner 63

System monitors 63

System servicing 63

Precautions against vehicle modification .....64

1-6. Rear Seat Reminder 65

1-7. Child restraint systems......

Safety precautions 65

Safety tips for installing child restraint systems 67

Where to place a child restraint system .....67

Choosing a child restraint system .....70

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt....70

Installing a booster seat or booster cushion ....75 Installation of child restraint systems by use of a lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH) ....76

Top tether anchorages 81

1-8. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system....83

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects ....85

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system and children....87

Components 90

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .....92

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag 103

SRS airbag system monitors 110

SRS airbag system servicing.... 111

Precautions against vehicle modification...... 112

How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system 113

1-1. Seats

■ Safety tips

▼ Safety tips for seat

WARNING

• Never adjust the seat while driving, as personal injury or loss of vehicle control may occur.
• Before adjusting the seat, ensure nothing is blocking the adjusting mechanism.
• After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to ensure the seat is securely locked. If it is not, it may move suddenly or the seat-belt may not operate properly.
• Do not put objects under the front seats. They may interfere with the front seat locking mechanism and cause an accident.
• Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should always be used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not in the

upright position and a collision occurs, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

- The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the sea

Illustration of two children sitting in a car seat, one using a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

100082

WARNING

as Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appro-

priate for the child's age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child restraint systems) in the REAR seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child restraint systems, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

Illustration of a person seated in a chair using a seatbelt device, with no visible text or symbols.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seat back. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap by sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

Diagram showing a hand holding a circular object with a diagonal line, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seatback and seat cushion. Doing so may interfere with the proper operation of the following systems and could result in serious injury.

Occupant detection system ing SRS side airbag

• Seat heater (if equipped)
  • Power seat (if equipped)
• Seat ventilation (if equipped)

Seats

Illustration of a person seated in a car seat with a diagonal bar, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not press your feet or legs in the instrument panel. Doing so may prevent the occupant detection function of the SRS airbag system and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag from functioning correctly. This may result in serious injury or death in the event of an accident.

Line drawing of a person seated in a chair with a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

to Seatbelts provide maximum re- ay restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. Do not pla cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. By doing so, the or risk of sliding under the lap belt a of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both ca result in serious injury or death.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor facing a stack of boxes, with a no-smoking symbol in the background (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback cas it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

and Safety tips for head restraint

WARNING

- Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed because they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear. Also, never install the head restraints the opposite

way round. Doing so will prevent■ Manual seat (if equipped)

the head restraints from functioning as intended. Therefore, when you remove the head restraints, you must reinstall all head restraints correctly to protect vehicle occupants.

- All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Forward and backward adjustment

the air the 102102

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat the desired position. Then release the lever and try to move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is securely lock into place.

▼ Reclining the seatback

Diagram of a car seat assembly with a highlighted seat and belt, showing no text or symbols.

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired position. Then to release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place. The seatback placed in a reclined position can spring back upward with force when the lever is pulled. While operating the lever to return the seatback, hold the seatback lightly so that it may be raised back gradually.

▼ Seat height adjustment (driver's seat)

1 2 1 102104

1 When the lever is pushed down, the seat is lowered.
2 When the lever is pulled up, the seat rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by moving the seat adjustment lever up and down.

■ Power seat (if equipped)
▼ Driver's seat

5 4 3 2 1 102921

1 Seat position forward/backward control switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward adjustment of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat cushion angle or seat cushion height.

2 Seat cushion angle control switch

To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up or push down the front end of the control switch.

3 Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push down the rear end of the control switch.

4 Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move the control switch.

5 Lumbar support control switch (if equipped)

To increase lower back support, push the front side of the switch.

To decrease lower back support, push the rear side of the switch.

To adjust the lumbar support height, push the upper or lower side of the switch.

▼ Thigh extension (driver's seat - if equipped)

CAUTION

When the thigh extension is pulled out to its fullest, do not put weigh the top of it. Doing so could break the part.

1 102466

The seat front length can be adjusted. Pull up the lever "1" to adjust the length and release the lever to lock it.

▼ Front passenger's seat

on 2 1 102270

1 Seat position forward/backward control switch To adjust the seat forward or backward, move the control switch forward or backward.

2 Seatback angle (reclining) control switch To adjust the angle of the seatback, mo the control switch.

▼ Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function (if equipped)

WARNING

• To avoid loss of vehicle control personal injury, never perform the following operations while

driving.

• Adjusting the seat
• Selecting a registered seat position
• Before adjusting the seat or selecting a registered seat position, make sure that cargo or the hands and feet of rear seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
• The memory adjustment of the seat position is finished. Be sure to confirm that the select lever is in the "P" position, and the packing brake is applied, when adjusting the seat position. Do not drive until the utilizing of the seat position is complete.

- When any unusual conditions or malfunctions occur during the memory adjustment of the seat position, stop the memory adjustment of the seat position by performing any of the following procedures.

• Operate any of the power seat switches.
• Press the "SET" button.
• Press button "1" or "2".
• Operate the outside mirror

- CONTINUED -

control switch.

Register the seat position with button "1" or each of the key fobs.

The following memory positions can be registered.

• Forward/backward position of the seat
• Angle of the seatback
• Angle of the seat cushion
• Height of the seat
• Angle of the outside mirrors
• Angle of the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side when the reverse tilt-down operates.

NOTE

The seat position can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P222.

▽ Registration of memory position with button "1" or "2"

1. Adjust the seat and outside mirror positions under the following conditions.

2. The parking brake is applied.

3. The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

- The select lever is in the "P" position.

or SET L1 L2 102271

1. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.

2. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sound within 5 seconds.

3. While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.

NOTE

If a new position is registered for the same button, the previously registered memory position is deleted.

▽ Registration of the reverse tilt-down mirror angle with button "1" or "2"

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will move to the reverse tilt-down position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle on the passenger's side. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" P270.
3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position.
4. Register the adjusted positions by either of the following procedures.
5. Press the "SET" button, then press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.
6. While pressing and holding the "SET" button, press either "1" or "2" until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seat position and outside mirror angle on the passenger's side will be registered.

NOTE

• The outside mirror angle will return to its original position approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position of than "R" position.
• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the front passenger's side mirror. The setting of the driver's side mirror operation can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

▽ Registration of memory position with an access key fob (if equipped)

1. Adjust the memory position under the following conditions.

2. The parking brake is applied.

3. The ignition switch is in the "LOCK "OFF" position.
4. The select lever is in the "P" position.

SET 102272

Hold the access key fob and press and hold the "SET" button. Then press the2. for "3" button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once, and the memory position is registered.

NOTE

When registering the seat position, 4. carry the access key that you want to register with you. If you are carrying5. or more access keys, registration may not be possible.

▽ Registration of the reverse tilt-down mirror angle with the key fob

Depress the brake pedal when registering the reverse tilt-down mirror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the "R" position, then the outside mirror angle will move to the reverse tilt-down and position.
2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. For details about the settings, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" P270.
3. Move the select lever to the "P" position, then the outside mirror angle will return to its original position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF"/to "LOCK" position.
   5.2 Hold the access key fob and press and y hold the "SET" button, then press the "3" button of the access key fob.
   A chirp will sound once, and the reverse tilt-down mirror angle will be registered.

NOTE

- The outside mirror angle will return to its original position approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position of than "R" position.

- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the fro passenger's side mirror. The setting of the driver's side mirror operation can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

- The system stores the adjusted mirror angle for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch turned to the "OFF" position. Refer the mirror angle while the memory function is available.

▼ Utilizing of memory position registered with button "1" or

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct button to retrieve your registered memory position. If the seat position is not optimum for you, it may adversely affect your driving and may reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt. That could result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

ther ent ing on eal- or SET L1 L2 102273

is1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" qis- position.

1. Put the select lever is in the "P" position and apply the parking brake. Then press button "1" or "2".

“ ^2 ” chirp will sound and the seat and angle of the outside mirrors moves to the registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the position, the outside mirror will move to the registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

- If the vehicle battery is removed, registered memory position data will not be deleted.

- When the button "1" or "2" is pressed within 45 seconds after the driver's door is opened, the registered memory position can be retrieved even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK" or "OFF" position.

- If buttons "1" and "2" are pressed at the same time, execution of seat position retrieval may not be possible.

- When the retrieved position is the same as the current seat position, a chirp will sound twice.

∇ Utilizing of the seat position registered with access key fob

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

101952

the

1. Unlock the driver's door by pressing the "☐" button or gripping the door

handle.

1. Open the driver's door.

A chirp sounds and the seat moves to registered position.

When the select lever is moved to the position, the outside mirror will move to registered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE

- If the registered seat position cannot be retrieved after performing the previous procedures, try the following procedures.

(1) Press the "SET" button on the driver's door.

(2) Press the 🔊” button on the access key fob or touch the door lock sensor to lock the doors.

(3) Perform the prior procedures again.

- If the keyless access function is disabled, the seat position cannot be retrieved by gripping the driver's door handle. However, the seat position can still be retrieved by pressing the "☐" button on the access key fob. For information about how to enable/disable the keyless access function, refer to "Disabling keyless access function" -P127.

- If a new position is registered for same access key fob, the previously registered seat position is deleted. - If you are carrying 2 or more access keys, seat position retrieval may not "R" be possible.

∇ Clearing the registered seat position with access key fob

1. Close the driver's door.

2. While holding the access key fob and pressing the "SET" button, press the "6" button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered position will be cleared.

NOTE

After deleting the seat position, wait a few moments before registering a new seat position.

■ Second-row seats

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. Do not place cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

- Never adjust the seat while driving. Doing so is dangerous as the seat could move rapidly and you could be injured.

• Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of the third-row seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
• After adjusting the seat, move it back and forth to make sure it securely locked. If the seat is not securely locked, it may move on the seatbelt may not operate properly.
• Do not put objects under the second-row seats. They may interfere with the seat locking and cause an accident.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on a bench with a large box and a diagonal no-smoking symbol in the background (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback as it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden sstop or accident.

▼ Forward and backward adjustment

Diagram of two car seats with seatbelt covers, showing a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Captain seat

Diagram of a car seat assembly with labeled components and directional arrow indicating movement or force

Bench seat

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position.

▼ Reclining the seatback

Illustration of a person seated in a chair using a vertical bench, with no visible text or symbols

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from sliding under the seatbelt in the event a collision, always put the seatback in the upright position while the vehicle is in motion. Also, do not place objects such as cushions between the passenger and the seat back. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

CAUTION

• Never allow the third-row seat passengers to adjust the seat-back of the second row. Doing is dangerous as the seatback v tilt rapidly and could injure the passengers.
• If the cargo area cover is equipped, be careful not to pinch your hand between the headrest and the cargo area cover when you recline the seatback.

of ing belt 102258

Captain seat

Diagram showing car seatbelting instructions with directional arrows and a magnified inset of the seatbelt switch.

Bench seat

Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback the desired position.

Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

▼ Folding down the seatback

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
• Secure skis and other long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, steering maneuver or acceleration.
• If passengers are sitting on the third-row seat, never drive while folding the second-row seat. It can be a serious interference at the time of braking and impact.
• If passengers are sitting on the third-row seat, never drive while the center seatback of the second-row seat is folded. Doing so may result in serious injury in the event of hard braking or an impact.
• When you return the seatback to its original position, shake it slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If it is not securely fixed in place, it may suddenly

fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area. Both could cause serious injury or death.

- After returning the seatback to its original position, be sure to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion above the seat cushion. Also, make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.

1. Store the armrest.
2. Store the seatbelt buckle.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism showing a key inserted into the seat (no text or labels present)

1 Holder
3. Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder to prevent it from being damaged. When using it, pull it out from

the holder.

Lower the headrest to the storage position. Refer to "Head restraints" P47.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion with directional arrows and a magnified inset highlighting the seatbelt component.

1. Pull the lever and tilt the seatback forward.

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion mechanism with directional arrows and a zoomed-in inset highlighting the component.

1. Pull the lever to unlock the seatback. The seatback will be folded down.
2. Slide the folded second seats backward until they lock.
3. To return the seatback to its original position, raise the seatback until it locks into place. Make sure it is securely locked.

Armrest

WARNING

Do not hook the seatbelt onto the armrest when the seatbelt is fastened. The seatbelt may be unable to fulfill its intended function in the event of an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury.

▼ Captain seat

Line drawing of a car seat with a belt shift indicator (no text or symbols)

Lower the armrest to use it.
To lower the armrest position:
First lift it all the way to the top position then lower it to the bottom position.
To raise the armrest position:
Lift the armrest from the bottom position the desired height.

∇ Bench seat

Diagram of a car seat with a highlighted panel showing a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest top edge.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers must never sit on the center arm while the vehicle is in motion.

■ Third-row seats

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits back and upright in the seat. Do not place cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. By doing so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious injury or death.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the floor next to stacked boxes, with a no-rope symbol in the background (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback as it could tumble forward and injus passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

▼ Third-row seats

Line drawing of a car seat with belt buckle adjustment, showing three seats and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

Pull the strap up and adjust the seatback the desired position. Then release the strap and make sure the seatback is securely locked into place.

Access to the third-row seats There are levers on both window sides of the second-row seat. Each lever is used to facilitate access to the third-row seat.

WARNING

In its slid-forward position with the seatback tipped forward, the second-row seat is not locked and is free to move. Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this state allow anyone to sit on the seat unless it is completely locked. Do

so may result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

When getting into or out of the third-row seat, make sure the second-row seat is in the completely slid-forward position and be sure to watch your step.

▼ To access the third-row seat

to to 102290

Captain seat

or

Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows and a magnified inset highlighting the switch mechanism.

Bench seat

Fold the seatback forward and slide the seat toward the front.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/ aft position of the second-row seat, raise the seatback, and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position.

▼ To get out from the third-row se

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a highlighted side panel showing a cable strap (no text or symbols)

Captain seat

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted seatbelt component and directional arrow, labeled with vehicle ID 102473

Bench seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat. The seatback of the second-row seat will tip forward and the seat will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/ aft position of the second-row seat, raise the seatback, and make sure the seatback is securely locked in position.

▼ Folding down the seatback

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to ride on the folded seatback or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
• Secure skis and other long items properly to prevent them from being thrown around inside the vehicle and causing serious injury during a sudden stop, steering maneuver or acceleration.
• When you return the seatback to its original position, shake it slightly to confirm that it is securely in place. If it is not securely fixed in place, it may suddenly fold down in the event of sudden braking, or objects may move out from the cargo area. Both could cause serious injury or death.
• After returning the seatback to its original position, be sure to place all of the seatbelts and the tab attached to the seat cushion

above the seat cushion. Also, make certain that the shoulder belts are fully visible.

1. Store the seatbelt buckle.

1 102268

1 Holder
2. Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder to prevent it from being damaged. When using it, pull it out from the holder.
3. Lower the headrest to the storage position. Refer to "Head restraints" P47.

102267

1. While pulling the straps, fold down seatbacks.

Line drawing of a car seat with two black arrows indicating forward and rear seats (no text or symbols)

From inside

Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with no text or symbols

From outside

1. When returning the seatbacks to their original positions, either press up on the seatbacks from inside the vehicle, or from outside the vehicle pull up on the strap located on the back of the seatback. Lift the seat up securely until it locks in place.

■ Head restraints

WARNING

Do not change the head restraint to the head restraint from a different seat. The head restraints were each designed specifically for the front seat, second-row seat, and third-row seat.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of front seat head restraints only. When installing the front seat head restraint make sure that the angle of the head restraints can be adjusted.

▼ Front seats

Both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat are equipped with head restraints. Both head restraints are adjustable in the following ways.

▽ Height adjustment

1 the 2 102169

1 Head restraint 2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up. To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pres ing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a dashed line indicating measurement or alignment (no text or symbols)

Each head restraint should be adjusted to that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be pulled out or installed due to insufficient clearance between the head restraint and the roof, tilt the seat and then perform the installation and removal tasks.

Angle adjustment

Diagram of a mechanical device with a curved arrow indicating rotation, no text or symbols present

The angle of the head restraint can be adjusted in several steps. While maintaining a suitable driving posture, adjust the head restraint to a position where the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the preferred position. A click will be audible when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forwa as it can go. The head restraint will automatically return to the fully upright position. Then, adjust the head restraint again to the preferred angle.

▼ Second-row seats

Head restraints are installed in all second row seats, and can be adjusted as following.

▽ Window side seating position

1 2 101587

1 Head restraint

2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

Side profile illustration of a human head and neck with a shaded anatomical region, no text or symbols present

Each head restraint should be adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of the occupant's ears.

After installing the head restraint, make sure it is securely locked.

▽ Applicable only for eight seaters

1 2 101588

1 When not used (retracted position)
2 When used (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended be used in the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position.

1 2 102300

1 Head restraint
2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the top of the seatback.

theTo remove:

"While pressing the release button, pull the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes are located on the top of the seatback the head restraint locks. Press and hold the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the second-row center seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the second-row center seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

▼ Third-row seats

Head restraints are installed in all third-flow seats, and can be adjusted as described below.

1 2 101588

1 When not used (retracted position)
2 When used (extended position)

that until

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to be used in the retracted position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the

- CONTINUED -

head restraint to the extended tion.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or force

1 Head restraint
2 Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while pressing the release button on the upper of the seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that are located on the top of the seatback until the head restraint locks. Press and hold

i-the release button to lower the head restraint.

When the third-row seating position is occupied, raise the head restraint to the extended position. When the third-row seating position is not occupied, lower the head restraint to improve rearward visibility.

1-2. Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• People with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the seat heater for a long period of time. When using the heater, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, or similar items. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
• When the seat is warmed enough or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTE

- Use of the seat heater for a long period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

- When using for a long period of time, we recommend setting the air ventilation to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for only quick heating at the start of the function usage.

■ Front seat heater

Adjust the front seat heater function on the center information display. Refer to "Front seat heater and ventilation" P291.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

■ Second-row seat heater

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the second-row seat heater switch. There is the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

time, ti- lick n the 2 3 1 102292

Second-row seat heater switch

1 Right side
2 Indicator lights
3 Left side

Press the second-row seat heater switch. Each time you press the switch, the mode will change as follows.

graph TD
    A["HIGH"] --> B["LOW"]
    B --> C["OFF"]
    C --> A

2 indicator lights are illuminated in HIGH mode, and 1 indicator light is illuminated in LOW mode. All indicator lights turn off when the heater is switched OFF.

NOTE

Only the front seat heater switches retain the previous switch position

even if the vehicle has restarted. The second-row seat switch will reset.

1-3. Seat ventilation (if equipped)

The seat ventilation are equipped in the front seats.

The seat ventilation operate when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

CAUTION

• Do not put hard or heavy objects or ones with protrusions on the seat, and do not stab the seat with sharp objects, such as pins or needles.
• When cleaning the seat, do not use organic solvents, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
• If water or liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it off with a dry cloth immediately.

NOTE

• Use of the seat ventilation for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
• The seat ventilation function cannot be used simultaneously with the front seat heater.

- When using for a long period of time we recommend setting the seat ventilation to the MID or LOW position. Use the HIGH position for on quick cooling at the start of the function usage.

Adjust the seat ventilation function on the center information display. Refer to "Front seat ventilation" P292.

time4. Seatbelts

Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

• All persons in the vehicle must fasten their seatbelts BEFORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of serious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
• All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
• Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never use a single belt for two or more persons – even children. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
• Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
• Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this car increase the risk or severity of injury.

- Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a collision, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.

- Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding under the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be always used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a collision, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.

- Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death

Illustration of two individuals seated in a car seat, holding steering sticks (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle that been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an occupant. Do touch such hot parts until they co

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which record the use of the seatbelt by the

passenger when any of the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags deploy.

▼ Infants or small children Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. Refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

▼ Children

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure on even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's height and weight.

will Secure ALL types of child restraint front devices (including forward facing

- CONTINUED -

child restraint systems) in the REA seats at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

This vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which will record whether the seat-belt is in use by the front passenger when an SRS frontal, side or curtain airbag deploys.

If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the rear and be restrained using the seatbelts. Never allow a child to stand up or knee on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the child closer to Rhe belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips and not on the chi waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be used. Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back.

▼ Expectant mothers

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, showing a gesturing or medical device on the abdomen (no text or symbols present)

Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should consult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the walls

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The driver's seatbelt has an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

■ Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)

Each passenger's seatbelt has an Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor normally functions as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ELR has an additional locking mode "Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode" intended to secure a child restraint system. When the seatbelt is once drawn put completely and is then retracted even slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in that position and the seatbelt cannot be extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the seatbelt retracts fully and the retractor returned to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode.

For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and restore the ELR mode, refer to "Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt" P70.

■ Seatbelt warning light and chime

Refer to "Seatbelt warning light and chime P173.

■ Passengers seatbelt reminder

Refer to "Rear passenger's seats" P174

■ Fastening the seatbelt

▼ Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according to the following procedure.

Driver's seat: Adjust the seatback the upright position. Move the seat It, far from the steering wheel as practical the while still maintaining full vehicle con- trol.

Front passenger's seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the seat as far back as possible.

1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twist

t to • If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
- If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the belt retract slightly after giving strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt with a tool, showing mechanical assembly (no text or symbols)

to as4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seatbelt, showing hands and a belt (no text or symbols)

let it a To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on the hips, not on the waist.

Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height

Diagram showing two mechanical components with directional arrows and dashed lines, no text or symbols present

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best suited for the driver/front passenger. Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor down. 1.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Line drawing of a medical procedure with hands and a tool, no text or symbols present

1 Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent that from getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Second-row and third-row seatbelts (except third-row center seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

3. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.

4. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt with a belt, no text or symbols present

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Illustration of a person adjusting a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating force (no text or symbols)

1. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible the hips, not on the waist.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Line drawing of a medical procedure with hands and a numbered label (102492), no readable text or symbols present.

1 Button
on
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to avoid seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that belts are retracted properly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.

▼ Third-row center seatbelt

1 2 3 4 102293

1 Center seatbelt tongue plate
2 Anchor tongue plate
3 Anchor buckle
4 Center seatbelt buckle

the 101735

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the webbing twisted can increase the risk of severity of injury in an accident. When fastening the belt after it is pulled out from the retractor, especially when inserting the anchor tongue plate into the mating buckle (on right-hand side), always check that the webbing is not twisted.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a bandage, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates to the respective buckles. If the seatbelt is used only as shoulder belt (with the anchor

or

tongue plate not fastened to the anchor buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properly restrain the wearer in position in an accident, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.

- The head restraint is not intended to be used at the lowest position. Before sitting on the seat, raise the head restraint to the extended position. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

Diagram of a mechanical component inside a housing, showing internal structure and no text or symbols

The center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of the ceiling. 3.

a1. Pull the anchor tongue plate out from the front side of the slot by pulling it rearward.

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool with a pen, against a background of a vehicle (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the overhead retractor.

Illustration of hands using a tool to press a device into a socket (no text or symbols visible)

1. After confirming that the webbing is not twisted, insert the anchor tongue plate attached at the webbing end into the buckle on the right-hand side until a

click sounds.

• If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it out more slowly.
• If the belt still cannot be unlocked, give it a strong pull and let it retract slightly, then pull it out slowly again.

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt and seated on a bed, with no visible text or symbols

1. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate into the center seatbelt buckle marked "CENTER" on the left-hand side until clicks.

Illustration of a person adjusting a seatbelt with an arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

1. To tighten the lap part, pull up on the shoulder belt.
2. Place the lap belt as low as possible the hips, not on the waist.
   Seatbelt comfort guide In order to adjust the position of the shoulder belt, use the seatbelt comfort guide.

.

it

it

it

it

it

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

[Non-Text]

Diagram of two identical chair-like structures with a central knob and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Pull the comfort guide from the shoulder pocket.

Mechanical diagram showing a belt buckle adjustment with a black arrow indicating the point of change (no text or symbols present)

1. Slide the seatbelt through the slot of the guide. The elastic cord must be placed behind the seatbelt.

Line drawing of a car backseat with a seatbelt and rear seats (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle and position the seatbelt comfortably.

∇ Unfastening the seatbelt

Medical illustration showing a surgical procedure with labeled parts (no text or symbols present)

1 Button

1. Push the release button of the center seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down, it necessary to disconnect the connector.

Illustration of hands using a tool to adjust or install a component, with no visible text or symbols

1. Insert a tongue plate or another hard pointed object into the slot in the anchor buckle on the right-hand side and push it in. The anchor tongue plate will then disconnect from the buckle.

is 102386

1. With the belt held by hand, allow the retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You should hold the webbing end and guide it back into the retractor while it is rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess on the ceiling and then insert the tongue plate and anchor tongue plate into the slot as shown in the illustration.

Diagram of a car interior with a hand holding the steering wheel, showing no text or symbols.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the retractor to roll up the seatbelt too quickly. Otherwise, the metal tongue plates may hit against the trim, resulting in damaged trim.
• Have the seatbelt fully rolled up so that the tongue plates are neatly stored. A hanging tongue plate can swing and hit against the trim during driving, causing damage to the trim.

■ Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tear damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is found.

CAUTION

• Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly battery acid.
• Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will prevent the seatbelt from operating properly.

1-5. Seatbelt pretensioners

and The following seatbelts have a seatbelt pretensioner.

• Driver's seatbelt
• Front passenger's seatbelt
• Second-row seatbelts (window-sides)

The pretensioners are also activated by the following sensors.

• Front impact sensors
• Side impact sensors
• Rollover sensor

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed to activate in an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal or side collision, or a rollover accident.

WARNING

• To obtain maximum protection, the occupants should sit in an upright position with their seatbelts properly fastened. Refer to "Seatbelts" P52.
• Do not modify, remove or strike the seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or surrounding area. This could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inoperative, possibly resulting in serious injury. Seatbelt pretensioners have no user-serviceable parts. For required servicing of seatbelt retractors equipped with seatbelt pretensioners, consult your SUBARU dealer.

- When discarding seatbelt retractor assemblies equipped with seatbelt pretensioners or scrapping the entire vehicle due to collision damage or for other reasons, consult your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

• Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in minor impact or in rear impacts.

• Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, the driver's, front passenger's and second-row (window-side) seatbelt retractor assemblies should be replaced only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When replacing seatbelt retractor assemblies, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

• If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• If the seatbelt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
• When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with seatbelt pretensioners. Also, notify the buyer of the contents in this section.

■ Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt pretensioners

NOTE

This section is applicable to the following components.
theDriver's seatbelt
- Front passenger's seatbelt

1 2 e l- r 100666

Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder belt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter)

2 Lap belt pretensioner

When the seatbelt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise will sound and a small amount of smoke will be released.

diverse occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt pretensioner remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

▼ Shoulder belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of force is detected during

frontal, side or rollover accidents. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.

The front shoulder belt pretensioner includes a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the event of collision.

The adaptive force limiter will reduce the load to suit the body size of the occupant as detected by the occupant detection sensor (front passenger's seatbelt).

▼ Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner, which located at the base of the center pillar. The lap belt pretensioner instantaneously pulls the belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of frontal collision force is detected. As a result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant more effectively.

■ Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner

NOTE

This section is applicable to the fo ing components.

●second-row (window-side) seatbelt

it is the el 101784

If the sensor detects a certain predetermined amount of force during frontal or side collisions or rollover accidents, any seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner quickly drawn back in by the retractor to take up the slack so that the belt more effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The second-row seatbelt (window-side) pretensioners include a tension reducing device which limits the peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the occupant in the

event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, an operating noise will be heard and a small amount of smoke will be released. These occurrences are normal and not harmful. This smoke does not indicate fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been activated, the seatbelt retractor remains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not be pulled out and retracted and therefore must be replaced.

■ System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The seatbelt pretensioners share the control module with the SRS airbag system. Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. For details, refer to "SRS airbag system monitors" P110.

■ System servicing

- When discarding a seatbelt retractor assembly or scrapping

- CONTINUED -

the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer. ●Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental activation of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the seatbelt pretensioner and SRS airbag systems. For required servicing of the seatbelt pretensioner, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.	NOTE If the front or side part of the vehicle is damaged in an accident to the extent that the seatbelt pretensioner does not operate, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. ■Precautions against vehicle modification Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory parts to your vehicle.	dual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
For the locations of the sensors control modules, refer to "Components" P90. If you need service or repair in areas or near the front seatbelt retractors, have the work performed by your authorized SUBARU dealer.	Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the seatbelt pretensioners. ●Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to those the front end. ●Modification of the suspension system or front end structure. ●Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for indivi-

1-6. Rear Seat Reminder

This function prompts the driver to confirm the presence of passengers and cargo in the rear.

This function will be activated when the rear doors are opened and closed.

It alerts the driver by warning messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps when the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "OFF" position.

Reminder, Look In Rear Seat 102605

NOTE

• This function does not directly detect passengers and cargo in the rear seat.
• This function detects the opening and closing of the rear doors. In this
  this

situation, there is the possibility that the following phenomenon may occur.

• It may alert the driver even if are no passengers or cargo in rear seat.
• It may not alert the driver ever there are passengers and cargo in the rear seat.

This function can be set to on or by the "Car settings". For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

• The ON/OFF setting will not be changed even if the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• The ON/OFF setting will be returned to the default setting if the battery removed.

7. Child restraint systems

■ Safety precautions there the if off 101656

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Infants and small children should always be seated in an infant or child restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compatible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the child's age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt (except those described in "Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and

- CONTINUED -

top tether anchorages (LATCH)" P76).

Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraint systems are not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint system, carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

• Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
• Do not leave children in the car unattended. High interior temperatures may cause heat stroke and dehydration that result in serious injury or death.

Illustration of a woman and child sitting in a car seat, viewed from behind (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Illustration of two children interacting near a vehicle, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child his or her lap or in his or her and while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child (or infant) from injury in a collision because the child will be caught between the passenger and objects inside the vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your lap or arms in the front seat expo that child to another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed children should be properly re- strained at all times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on any seat. Unrestrained children will be thrown forward during sudden stop or in an accident and can be injured seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or kneeling on or in front of the front seat are exposed another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even killed.

■ Safety tips for installing child restraint systems

WARNING

• Child restraint systems and seat-belts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a child in it.
• Do not use a seatbelt extender. If a seatbelt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seatbelt will not securely hold the child restraint system. Use of a seatbelt extender could cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking, swerving, or accidents.
• Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise it may cause death or serious injury to children or of passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

- Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehicle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around inside of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; they can strike and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not tight and secure, the danger of a child suffering personal injury in event of an accident may be increased.

■ Where to place a child restraint system

The following descriptions are SUBARU's or recommendations on where to place a child restraint system in your vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior showing a child inside the seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

m, held your the 102335

WARNING

- Several types of child restraint systems may conceal the buckle of the neighboring seat. If the occupant of the neighboring seat

- CONTINUED -

cannot correctly fasten the seat-belt, that person must move to a different seat. If the seatbelt cannot be correctly fastened, there is the risk of serious injury or death in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

- If the child restraint system cannot be correctly installed because it contacts the driver's seat, move the child restraint system to a different seat. If it cannot be installed in a different seat (other than the driver's seat adjust the front seat so that contact does not occur.

A: Front passenger's seat

You should not install a child restraint system (including a booster seat) due to the hazard to children posed by the passenger's airbag.

B: Second-row seat window-side seating position, third-row seat left-side seating position

Recommended positions for all types of child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipme is provided for installing a child restraint system.

● Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seatbelts
- Lower anchorages (bars)

- Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

When a child restraint system is installed using the third-row seat lower anchorages, do not sit in the third-row center seat.

C: Applicable only for eight seaters In this position, the following equipment is provided for installing a child restraint system.

• ALR/ELR seatbelts
• Lower anchorages (bars)
• Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

The second-row center seat includes lower anchorages, and the lower anchorages

on the center side of the second-row left. If the child restraint system is not correctly seat can be used to install a child restructured in place (for example, if a child system. restraint system can be moved more than

When a child restraint system is installed the second-row center seat using the lower anchorages, do not sit in the second-row left seat.

If a child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place (for example, if a child restraint system can be moved more than 1 in (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child restraint system should be moved to a window-side seat position of the second-row seat or to a left side seat of the third row seat.

D: Third-row center and right seat positions

In this position, the following equipment provided for installing a child restraint system.

• ALR/ELR seatbelts
• Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems might not be able to be secured firmly due to projection of the seat cushion. In this seating position, you should use only a child restraint system that has a bottom base that fits snugly against the contours of the seat cushion and can be securely retained using the seatbelt.

restraint system can be moved more than 11in (2.5 cm) from side to side), the child restraint system should be moved to a window-side seat position of the second-row seat or to a left side seat of the third-row seat.

WARNING

- Even with advanced airbags, children can be seriously injured by the airbag. Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint systems (including forward facing child restraint systems) in the REAR seats at all times. You should choose a restraint system which is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

• Do not use lower anchorages (bars) for a seat in the center seating position unless a child restraint system manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced as far apart as those in this vehicle.
• Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

Medical illustration of a patient undergoing a medical procedure in a car seat (no text or symbols present)

WARNING

• SINCE THIS VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER'S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
• Do not allow children to lean their heads or any other parts of their bodies against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails. The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags deploy even if children are seated in the child restraint system, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
• To secure the child restraint system, be sure to comply with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Not doing so could result in idea or serious injury to children in sudden stop or accident.

■ Choosing a child restraint system

Line drawings of three different car seats (no text or symbols)

Choose a child restraint system that is appropriate for the child's age and size (weight and height) in order to provide the child with proper protection. The child restraint system should meet all applicable requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for the United States or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards for Canada. It can be identified by looking for the label on the child restraint system or the manufacturer's statement of compliance in the document attached to the system.

Also it is important for you to make sure that the child restraint system is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.

NOTE

Some sizes of child restraint systems may not fit the vehicle seat. Before purchasing a child restraint system, check whether it fits on the vehicle seat.

■ Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

CAUTION

• When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with it. After installing the child restraint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in position. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be increased.
• When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seating position, set both seatbacks to the original position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained, which

may result in death or serious injuries in the event of sudden stop, sudden steering maneuver or an accident.

▼ Installing a rearward facing child restraint system

WARNING

• NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

• If the seat is equipped with a slide mechanism, set the seat as far back possible.

• Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.

NOTE

If the child restraint system cannot be installed because it contacts the head restraint, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head restraints" P47.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a cable, with magnified detail showing the switch mechanism (no text or symbols)

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Illustration of a person using a belt buckle to lift a seatbelt, showing the correct and incorrect states (no text or symbols present)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
2. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is recommended by the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the child restraint system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with directional arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction at the seatbelt path.

2. If the seatbelt has been set to the A mode in step 7, pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Illustration of a car seatbelt being lifted, showing the seatbelt being inserted (no text or symbols present)

1. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on the seat-if itbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is longer in use, remove it and restore ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

▼ Installing a forward facing child restraint system

WARNING

• NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

• Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

• If the seat is equipped with a slide mechanism, set the seat as far back as possible.

• Place the child restraint system in the rear seating position.
• If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.
• If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, raise

the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head restraints" P47.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. D not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child restraint system on the rear center seating position, if the child restraint system does not fit snugly against the contours of the rear center seat cushion, install the child restraint system on the window-side seating position to be safe. For details, refer to "Where to place a child restraint system" P67.

D

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly with magnified detail view

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the child restraint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.

- When a child restraint system is installed on the third-row center seating position, pass the third-row center seatbelt through the comfort guide properly. For details, refer to "Third-row center seatbelt" P57.

1. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Diagram of a car seatbelting mechanism with arrows indicating force direction (no text or symbols)

1. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
2. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the retractor to change the retractor over from the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the retractor functions as ALR.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then tightening the seatbelt. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in any direction at the seatbelt path.

2. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with a foot and a separate schematic symbol (no text or labels)

1. Latch the top tether hook onto the top tether anchorage that is located behind if itthe second-row and third-row seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top tether anchorages" P81.

- If the child restraint system is installed with the head restraint left in place, pass the top tether hook between the head restraint stays.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, with an inset showing the insertion step (no text or symbols present)

top2. To remove the child restraint system, and press the release button on the seat-belt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will return to the ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the seatbelt to retract fully.

■ Installing a booster seat or booster cushion

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Booster seat

Line drawing of a child sitting in a car seat, wearing a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Booster cushion

WARNING

Before installing a booster seat/cushion, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.

1. If the seat is equipped with a slide mechanism, set the seat as far back possible.
2. Adjust the head restraint as follows. For booster seat:

Diagram of a vehicle seat mounted on a track with two sensors, showing an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

Raise the head restraint to the extended position. If the booster seat still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head restraints" P47.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

as For booster cushion:

Raise the head restraint to the extended position. Do not remove the head restraint.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

1. Place the booster seat/cushion in the rear seating position and sit the child on it. The child should sit well back on the booster seat/cushion.
2. If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback,

- CONTINUED -

adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the booster seat/cushion and the child following the instructions provided by its manufacturer. For booster seat/cushion with a belt guide, use the seatbelt through the belt guide
2. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Take care not to twist the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible on the child's hips.

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

1. To remove the booster seat/cushion, press the release button on the seat-belt buckle and allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

• Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.
• Never place the shoulder belt under the child's arm or behind the child's back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of injury to the child.
• The seatbelt should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint. Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing injury.
• Place the lap belt as low as possible on the child's hips. A high-positioned lap belt will increase the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen, and both can result in serious injury or death.
• Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of child's shoulder. Placing the shoulder belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or in a collision.

■ Installation of child restraint systems by use of lower and top tether anchorages (LATCH)

▼ Lower and top tether anchorages

Diagram illustrating car seat assembly steps with magnified views of component placement

WARNING

d Attach the child restraint system to the anchors properly. When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached. Otherwise, it may cause death or serious injury to children or other passengers in sudden braking,

swerving, or accidents.

- When installing a child restraint system using LATCH anchors with the rear seatbelt fastened, ensure that the rear seatbelt does not become caught in the child restraint system or the lower LATCH anchorages.

NOTE

The seatbelt warning system of the rear seats detects if any of the seats are occupied by a passenger. Installing a child restraint system in the rear seating area, using the LATCH anchors, may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seatbelt prior to installing the child restraint system will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. For details, refer to "Rear passenger's seats" P174.

Some types of child restraint systems can be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such child restraint systems are secured to the dedicated anchorages provided on the seat. The lower and top tether anchorages are sometimes referred to as the LATCH

system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Anchor, Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

101210

▼ Lower anchorages

Line drawing of two car seats with seatbelt covers, one highlighted with a sleeping figure icon (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (captain seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with passenger seat and passenger airplane icon (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Line drawing of a car seat with two seats and a circular inset showing a sleeping person (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lower hooks onto the same anchorage (bar).

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for installing a child restraint system and are located in the second-row and third-row left side seats.

There are 2 lower anchorages at each of the second-row captain seat. There are a total of 5 lower anchorages at the second-row bench seat. The second lower anchorage from the left side is used for both the left side seat and center seat. There are 2 lower anchorages at the third-row left side seat.

Each lower anchorage is located where the seat cushion meets the seatback.

▽ Top tether anchorages

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing rear seats and vented seating (no text or symbols)

102932

the Second-row seat (captain seat)

102279

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, rear seats, and internal compartments with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

The top tether anchorages are provided at the locations shown in the above illustration. Use the tether anchorage of each seat. For details, refer to "Top tether anchorages" P81.

To install a child restraint system using lower and top tether anchorages

To install a child restraint system using lower and top tether anchorages, perform the following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint system, be sure to confirm that the seatback is securely locked into place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. If the seat is equipped with a slide mechanism, set the seat as far back possible.

Line drawing of two car seats with seatbelt covers, one featuring a sleeping person icon (no text or symbols)

Second-row seat (captain seat)

as 102306

Second-row seat (bench seat)

Line drawing of a passenger seat with two seatbelt buttons and a circular icon showing a sleeping person (no text or symbols)

Third-row seat

1. Refer to the ⚙” marks to position the lower anchorages (bars). The location of the symbols may vary according to the vehicle model.

Second-row seat

You will find marks at the second-row seat cushion. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars). Each lower anchorage is located behind the cover of seatback bottom.

Third-row seat

You will find marks "at the bottom the third-row seat seatbacks. These marks indicate the positions of the lower anchorages (bars).

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle adjustment with magnified detail view

1. For second-row seat, peel off the anchorage cover completely from the selected side of the second-row seat-back to expose the anchorages (bars) to be used for installation of the child restraint system. If it is hard to install the child restraint

system because the anchorage cover returns to the original position, press the anchorage cover to the seat cushion until it is flat.

1. If the child restraint system makes contact with the head restraint of the rear seating position where the child restraint system is to be installed, ran the head restraint to the extended position. If the child restraint system still makes contact, remove the head restraint. For details, refer to "Head restraints" or P47.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that has been removed in the cargo area. Do not place the head restraint in the passenger compartment to prevent it from being thrown around in the passenger compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp turn.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with a magnified inset showing the bracket detail (no text or symbols)

1. While following the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer, connect the lower hooks onto the lower anchorages located at "③" marks on the bottom of the rear seatback. When the hooks are connected, make sure the adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
2. If there is a gap between the child restraint system and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a hand insertion step, showing no text or symbols

1. If your child restraint system is a flexible attachment type (which uses tether belts), push the child restraint system into the seat cushion and pull both left and right lower tether belts up to secure the child restraint system by taking up the slack in the belt.
2. Latch the top tether hook onto the top tether anchorage that is located behind the rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly. For additional instructions, refer to "Top tether anchorages" P81.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

1. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, try to move it back and forth and right and left to check is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint system can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion. It should not be possible to move the child restraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm).
2. To remove the child restraint system, follow the reverse procedures of installation.

SUBARU recommends that you check with a certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For more information, and to locate the closest inspection location in the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

■ Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with five or six to tether anchorages so that a child restraint system having a top tether can be installed in the rear seat. When installing a child restraint system using top tether, proceed as follows, while observing the instructions by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional stability by offering another connection between a child restraint system and the vehicle, we recommend that you use a tether whenever one is required or available.

▼ Anchorage location

st e top ed s 1 2 top 102927

Second-row seat (captain seat)
1 For left seat
2 For right seat

1 2 3 102282

Second-row seat (bench seat)

1 For left seat
2 For center seat
3 For right seat

1 2 3 102283

Third-row seat

1 For left seat
2 For center seat
3 For right seat

Three top tether anchorages are installed on the back side of the rear seatback.

▼ To hook the top tether

CAUTION

Always raise the head restraint when mounting a child restraint system with a top tether. Failure to do so may prevent the top tether from being fastened tightly.

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with a foot and guide mechanism, no visible text or symbols

1. Attach the top tether hook to the appropriate top tether anchorage.
2. Tighten the top tether securely.

SUBARU recommends that you check with a certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to ensure the proper installation of your child restraint system. For more information, and to locate the closest

inspection location in the U.S., refer to National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website. In Canada, check with Transport Canada.

^h -8. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicle's seatbelts.

This vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system which consists of seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

• Driver's and front passenger's frontal airbags
• Driver's and front passenger's side airbags
• Curtain airbags (for driver, front passenger, and window-side rear passengers)
• Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls seatbelt pretensioners. For operation instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt pretensioners" P61.

General precautions regarding SRS airbag system

WARNING

- To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and all passengers must always wear seatbelts when in the vehicle. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seatbelt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. In combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best protection in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag system.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system, refer to "Seatbelts" P52.

- The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain airbags are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat-belt. They do not eliminate the need to fasten seatbelts. It is also

- CONTINUED -

important to wear a seatbelt to help avoid injuries that can resu when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car, wearing a steering wheel and belt (no text or symbols)

WARNING

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are not seated in the proper upright position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer serious injury. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and back in the as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control, and the front pas-

senger should move the seat as alt back as possible and sit upright well back in the seat.

Illustration of a person sitting on a car seat with a belt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Do not sit or lean close to either front door. The SRS side airbags are stored in both front seat seatbacks next to the door, and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact collision. However, the force of SRS side airbag deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

far • Since your vehicle is equipped and with SRS curtain airbags, do not sit or lean close to the front or rear door on either side. Do not put body parts out of the window. The SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the cabin are stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), and they provide protection by deploying rapidly in the event of a side impact, rollover or an offset frontal collision. However, the force of its deployment can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag.

- Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to an SRS airbag. It is also important to wear seatbelts to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in their proper position.

Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor injury, such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms, because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt, seated in a car (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Keep arms away from either front door or its internal trim. They could be injured in the event of SRS side airbag deployment.
• Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, these objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

CAUTION

• When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.
• A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

- When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to inform the buyer that the vehicle is equipped with SRS airbags. Also, notify the buyer of the applicable section in this Owner's Manual.

• If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel supply will be cut off to reduce the risk of fire caused by leaking fuel. For details about restarting of the engine, refer to "If your vehicle is involved in an accident" P468.
  ■ General precautions regarding SRS airbag system for accessories and any objects

Top-down technical illustration of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

102928

102218

WARNING

• Do not put any objects (including straps or cords) over the steering wheel pad, column cover, or dashboard.
• These objects could be entangled with the steering wheel, preventing the SRS frontal airbag, etc. from operating properly.
• If the SRS frontal airbag deploys, these objects could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.
• Do not put any objects under the driver's side of the instrument panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle, causing injury.

- The key must not be attached to heavy, sharp or hard accessories, or another key. If the SI knee airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and no-drawn diagram (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the windshield or fit an extra-wide mirror over the inside rear view mirror.

the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could become projectiles that could seriously injure vehicle occupants.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Do not attach accessories to the door trim or near either SRS side airbags and do not place objects near the SRS side airbags. In the event of SRS side airbag deployment, they could be propelled dangerously toward the vehicle's occupants and cause injuries.
• Do not attach a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to If a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A hands-free microphone or other accessory in such a location could be propelled through the cabin with great force by the curtain airbag, or it could prevent correct deployment of the curtain airbag. In either case, the result could be serious injuries.

ment of the SRS curtain airbags, they could cause serious injuries by coming off the coat hooks and being thrown through the cabin or by preventing deployment of the curtain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no sharp objects in the pockets. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.

face on or near the SRS side airbag. They could prevent proper deployment of the SRS side's airbag, reducing protection available to the front seat's occupant.

- Do not install a seat cover unless it is a genuine SUBARU seat cover exclusively designed for use with the SRS airbag. Even when using a genuine SUBARU seat cover, the SRS side airbag system may not function normally if the seat cover is not installed correctly.

Line drawing of a hanger with handle and clasp, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. If such items were hanging on the coat hooks during deploy-

Medical illustration of a car interior with visible mechanical components and a highlighted area (no text or labels)

WARNING

- Do not put any kind of clothes or other objects over either front seatback and do not attach labels or stickers to the front seat sur-

■ General precautions regarding SRS airbag system and children

Illustration of two children seated in a car seat, one wearing a seatbelt and the other with a belt (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SR: airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including those in child restraint systems and those that have outgrown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child restraint systems) in the REAR seats at all times.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.

For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint system, refer to "Child restraint systems" P65.

Illustration of a person lying in a car seat with a helmet and seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD'S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Illustration of two children playing soccer on the ground, one running and the other kneeling (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front passenger's seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a child sitting on a chair with an adult, viewed from behind (no text or symbols)

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

Illustration of a child sitting in a car seat with a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Illustration of a person in a seatbelt, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Never allow a child to do the following.

• Kneel on any passenger's seat facing the side window.
• Wrap his/her arms around the front seat seatback.
• Put his/her head, arms or other parts of the body out of the window.

In the event of an accident, the force of SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag deployment could injure the child seriously because his/her head, arms or other parts of the body are too close to the SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag.

- Since your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, children should be placed in the rear seat anyway and should be properly restrained at all times.

■ Components

1 2 3 4 5 3 102284

1 Driver's SRS frontal airbag
2 Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
3 SRS side airbag
4 SRS curtain airbag
5 SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the following locations.

Driver's SRS frontal airbag: In the center portion of the steering wheel which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark.

Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag: Under the top of the dashboard. An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the right corner of the dashboard.

SRS side airbag: In the door side of each front seat seatback which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" tag.

SRS curtain airbag: In the roof side (between the front pillar and a point behind the rear quarter glass), "SRS AIRBAG" marks are located at the top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: Under the steering column which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" mark.

27 16 8 6 15 24 2 18 7 3 5 16 22 21 1 4 14 10 28 13 17 9 26 32 20 29 31 11 23 30 19 12 19 19 20 25 102285

1 Airbag control module (including impact sensor and rollover sensor)

2 Frontal airbag module (driver's side)

3 Frontal airbag module (front passenger's side)

4 Front impact sensor (left-hand side)

5 Front impact sensor (right-hand side)

6 Side airbag module (driver's side)

7 Side airbag module (front passenger's side)

8 Side impact sensor (center pillar left-hand side)

9 Side impact sensor (center pillar right-hand side)

10 Airbag wiring

11 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (driver's side)

12 Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force limiter (front passenger's side)

13 Side impact sensor (forward of rear wheel house right-hand side)

14 Side impact sensor (forward of rear wheel house left-hand side)

15 Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16 Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17 Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger's side)

18 Knee airbag module (driver's side)

19 Front passenger's occupant detection sensors

20 Front passenger's occupant detection control module

21 Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator

22 SRS airbag system warning light

23 Side impact sensor (under the second-row center seat)

24 Side impact sensor (front door left-hand side)
25 Side impact sensor (front door right-hand side)
26 Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger's side)
27 Lap belt pretensioner (driver's side)
28 Side impact sensor (backward of rear wheel house right-hand side)
29 Side impact sensor (backward of rear wheel house left-hand side)
30 Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
31 Second-row seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
32 Front passenger's seat position sensor

■ SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system

This vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the driver's SRS front airbag at the time of deployment as well whether or not to activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. This vehicle has warning labels on the driver's and front passenger's sun visors beginning with the phrase "EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS" and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase "Even with Advanced Air Bags". Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels are tag.

WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS • Donnel can be killed or unsatified injured by the air bag • The back was in the oldest place for children • Power put a remaining child and in the front • Always care and hands and clean hands • See owner's menu for more information about air bags AVERTISSEMENT MÈME AVEC DES COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELIENTS • Use parents passed fire falls on blemble (grouded) out is completely • Use parents sent out a fireball in a bus air pour me, etc. • Use parents inside a fireball on a bus air for a fireball • Puters allow des sointens de sointels et des dispositifs de renise pour infant • Put me to ensure that they may use an arrangement as your own source of life 102286

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBAR advanced frontal airbag system is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combination with a seatbelt. Occupants should wear a seatbelt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, re to "Components" P90.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy.

• SRS frontal airbag for driver
- Front passenger's SRS frontal airbag
• SRS knee airbag for driver
- SRS curtain airbag ^®

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seatbelts by reducing the impact to the occupant's head, chest and knees.

NOTE

Only the driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are controlled by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

▼ Driver's SRS frontal airbag

^d The driver's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

All Front passenger's SRS frontal air- bag

The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator and an actuator. The inflator and the actuator operate in different ways depending on the severity of impact.

Line drawing of a car seat with a triangular load diagram and labeled seat number 102171 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1 Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not inflate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even when the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passenger's seatbelt pretensioner operates with the driver's seatbelt pretensioner. For details about the seatbelt pretensioner, refer to "Seatbelt pretensioners" P61.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

• Do not apply any strong impact the front passenger's seat such as by kicking.
• Do not let rear passengers rest their feet between the front seat-back and seat cushion.
• Do not spill liquid on the front passenger's seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately
• Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger's seat.
• Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) oth than a genuine SUBARU accessory under the front passenger's seat.
• Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passenger's seat.

• Do not place any objects (books, etc.) around the front passenger's seat.

• Do not use the front passenger's seat with the head restraint removed.

• Do not leave any articles on the front passenger's seat or the seatbelt tongue and buckle engaged when you leave your vehicle.
  to • Do not put sharp object(s) on t seat or pierce the seat upholstery.
• Do not place a magnet near the seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
• Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual seat" P33.

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front passenger's occupant detection system have failed, the SRS airbag system warning light will illuminate. If the SRS airbag system warning light illuminates, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and consult a SUBARU dealer.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front passenger's seat while driving the vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.

▼ Passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators

PASSenger AIR BAG OFF ON 102929

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator

: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

Refer to "Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights" P176.

▼ Occupant detection system

Line drawing of a car seat with a triangular load diagram and seat number 102171 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1 Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection sensors are installed between the seat and seat rails, and monitor the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant detection system determines whether the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS airbag system warning light may illuminate to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant detection system. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle

in a safe place, and consult a SUBARU dealer.

PASSSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 102929

ON: Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators do not work properly do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger's seat and have the occupant detection system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 102929

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator

26: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

Also, if luggage is placed on the front passenger's seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. This may prevent the front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passenger's frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage from the front passenger's seat.

▼ Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is not activated

The front passenger's SRS frontal airba will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat:

• The seat is empty.
• The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an infant or a child is restrained in it. (see WARNING that follows.)
• The front passenger's occupant detection system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SRS FRON-TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any child restraint system (including any booster seat) be installed in the REAR seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passenger's seat may be

- CONTINUED -

killed or severely injured should the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant detection system, activating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occupied by an infant in the child restraint system.

• Do not place any article (including electronic devices) on the seat other than the infant in the child restraint system.
• Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system.
• Do not install any accessories such as a table or TV onto the seatback.
• Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to pu

the seatback.

If the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off, even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)

t by PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 102929

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" OFF" position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint manufacturer's recommendations as

well as the child restraint system installation procedures in "Child restraint systems" P65, correctly install the child restraint system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and make sure that the front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator is turned off, take the following actions.

• Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint system and the child occupant.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of the front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger's seat, the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system may or may not activate the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupant's seating posture. Children should always wear seatbelt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), to the following action.

- Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns despite the fact that the actions note above have been taken, seat the chair the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child always take the rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

Conditions in which front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activa The front passenger's SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passenger's seat. When the seat is occupied by an adult When certain items (e.g. jug of water) are placed on the seat.

ke CAUTION
When the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult, observe the following precautions.
of failure to do so may lessen the front passenger's seat, dead activating the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat is occupied by an adult.
This may result in personal injury.
- Do not allow the rear seat occupant to lift the front passenger's seat cushion using his/her feet.
- Do not place any article under front passenger's seat, or squeeze any article from behind and under the seat. This may the seat cushion.

• Do not squeeze any article be-ted between the front passenger's seat and side trim/pillar, door or cen-ter console box. This may lift the seat cushion.
  If the passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult

passenger AIR BAG OFF ON 102929

ON Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator
e: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passenger's seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

- CONTINUED -

1. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, extra seat cushion, seat cover, extra seat heater or massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger's seat, or should sit in a rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

▼ Operation

A 1 B 2 101586

The SRS airbags can function only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag det-pending on the characteristic of item(s) and person on the front passenger's seat monitored by the front passenger's occu-pant detection sensors. For this reason, only the driver's SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the system.

If the following sensors detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only driver's module or both driver's and front passenger's modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

• The front impact sensors
- The impact sensors in the airbag control module

On the driver's side, the SRS knee airbag also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

A Driver's side
B Passenger's side
1 SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2 After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver's vision is not obstructed.

The driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the driver's SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of item(s) or person on the seat in the of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag.

▼ After deployment

After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the driver vision is not obstructed and the driver's ability to maintain control of the vehicle not impaired. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver's SRS frontal airbag deploys and the driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags deploy, the driver's and front passenger's seatbelt pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

▼ Example of the type of accident

The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are de-signed as follows.

• To deploy in the event of an accident is involving a moderate to severe frontal collision

- To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver's SRS frontal airbag and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag are not designed as follows.

• To deploy in most lesser frontal impacts ^1
• To deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most rollover accidents

^*1 : Because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both the driver's an front passenger's SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of accident in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

Line drawing of a car approaching a surface with a broken edge and impact effect (no text or symbols)

101394

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Two cartoon illustrations showing a car collision with an explosion and a broken off vehicle (no text or symbols)

Only the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1

4

Top-down line drawing of two cars with arrows indicating collision or damage (no text or symbols)

2

Diagram of a car being struck by a truck, showing impact and collision (no text or symbols)

5

Top-down line drawing of a car accident scene with two cars and a collision, no text or symbols present

3

101418

1 The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.
2 The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.
3 The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.
4 The vehicle sustains an offset frontal collision.
5 The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the driver's/driver's and front passenger's SR3 If the vehicle is struck from the side or not be activated on the second impact.

ver's and front passenger's frontal airbag(s) are not designed to deploy in most c

3 If the vehicle is struck from the side from behind

- If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

■ SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

Line drawing of a car collision with an arrow indicating impact (no text or symbols)

Top-down line drawing of two cars with arrows indicating collision or movement (no text or symbols)

Two cartoon-style car heads with visible front and side views, standing on ground with starburst lines (no text or symbols)

- If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed frontal collision

1 2 101395

1 First impact

2 Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the driver's and/or front passenger's SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy only once.

Example: In the case of a double collision first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, once either or both of the driver's and

Line drawing of a car interior showing two individuals, one seated and one standing, with no visible text or symbols.

▼ SRS side airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an "SRS AIRBAG" tag.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only front seat occupants.

The driver's and front passenger's SRS

▼ SRS curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBAR SRS curtain airbag system that complies with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An "SRS AIRBAG" mark is located at the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the side window and supplements the seatbelt by reducing the impact on the occupant's head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on bo sides of the vehicle deploy between the occupant and the side window and supp ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact the occupant's head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain airbags on both sides of the vehicle dep between the occupant and the side window and supplement the seatbelt by reducing the impact to the occupant's head and chest.

▼ Operation

The following SRS airbags are active or when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

• Driver's SRS side airbag
  theFront passenger's SRS side airbag
  • SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
  • SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

When the following sensors detect a certain amount of impact to the side of the vehicle or detect that the vehicle is leaning, airbag control units send signals to the airbag control modules to deploy airbags.

• The side impact sensors
- The impact sensor in the airbag cont h module
● The rollover sensor in the airbag con e- module

SRS airbags are controlled by their airbag control units and deploy as necessary to effectively protect passengers depending on the accident type. Therefore, these airbags may deploy simultaneously.

For the locations of the sensors and control modules, refer to "Components" P90.

▼ After deployment

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated for a while following deployment then slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

After deployment, do not touch a part of the SRS curtain airbag stem (from the front pillar to the of the roof side over the rear s. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot result of deployment.

any SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ys-deployment depend on the level of force part experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That se level differs from one type of collision to as another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag will most likely deploy

▼ Example of the type of accident The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are designed as follows:

• To deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact collision
• To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in the following cases:

• In most lesser side impacts
- In most frontal or most rear impacts (because the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag deployment would not protect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser inclined state.

1 the SRS 101369

1 A severe side impact near the front seat.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy

1

Top-down line drawing of a car collision with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2

Two cartoon-style car heads with front and side views, no text or symbols present

3

Cartoon illustration of a car with a crack on the ground (no text or symbols)

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a battery and lightning bolts above it (no text or symbols)

101789

1 The vehicle is involved in a severe side impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3 The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or the skidding vehicle's tires hit a curbstone laterally.
4 An offset frontal collision that is severe enough to deploy the front airbag.

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy

Line drawing of a car emitting exhaust smoke from a surface, with no text or symbols present.

Simple line drawing of a car on a surface with motion lines indicating speed or impact (no text or symbols)

Diagram showing two cars on a track with impact and collision, no text or symbols present

1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain airbags will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy

Simple line drawing of a car collision with an explosion (no text or symbols)

Top-down line drawing of two cars with cracks and a traffic sign, no text or symbols present

4

Simple line drawing of a car with a collision or explosion effect (no text or symbols)

Two hand-drawn car illustrations showing front and side views with no text or symbols

101319

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.
5 The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy

1

Line drawing of a car collision with impact on the side (no text or symbols)

2

Line drawing of two cars in a collision, showing impact with no text or symbols

3

Simple line drawing of a car with a collision or explosion symbol (no text or labels)

4

Line drawing of a person riding a motorcyclist driving a car (no text or symbols)

101480

1 The vehicle is involved in an oblique sid on impact.
2 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity the passenger compartment.
3 The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.
4 The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS curta airbag deployment. In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS curtain airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases

1 2 3 102056

1 The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2 The vehicle is struck from behind.
3 The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases.

A B 1 2 101410

1 First impact
2 Second impact
A SRS curtain airbag
B SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag depil only once.

Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

■ SRS airbag system monitors

102451

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including seatbelt pretensioners) with the ignition switch in the "ON" position. The SRS airbag system warning light will show normal system operation by illuminating for approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

The diagnostic system monitors the components to ensure normal operation. For information on the components the system

monitors, refer to "Components" or P90. Note that the diagnostic system does not monitor the SRS airbag system warning light itself.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and consult a SUBARU dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as needed, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may result in injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warning light
• No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position
• Continuous illumination of the warning light
• Illumination of the warning light while driving

SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

- When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire vehicle damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.

The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the system's wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag or could make the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in an indicated in the following list, have the work performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer. The SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules are stored in these areas.

• Under the center of the instrument panel
• On both the right and left side the front of the vehicle
  • Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
• Bottom of the steering column and nearby areas
• Top of the dashboard on front passenger's side and nearby areas
  • Each front seat and nearby area
• Inside each center pillar
• Inside each front door
• In each roof side (from the fro pillar to a point over the rear
• Between the rear seat cushion and rear wheel house on each side
• Under the second-row center seat

are as the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the system should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use only genuine SUBARU parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

• The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which the driver's SRS frontal airbag or both driver's and front passenger's SRS frontal airbags did not deploy.
• The pad of the steering wheel, the cover over the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag, or either roof side (from the front pillar to a point over the rear seat) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
• The center pillar, front door, rear wheel house or rear sub frame, or an area near these parts, was involved in an accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not deploy.
• The fabric or leather of either front seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise damaged.
• The rear part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in which SRS airbag was deployed.

■ Precautions against vehicle modification

WARNING

only

To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifications should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes following modifications.

• Installation of custom steering wheels
• Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
• Installation of custom seats
• Replacement of seat fabric or leather
• Installation of additional fabric or leather on the front seat

• Attachment of a hands-free microphone or any other accessory to a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear pillar, the windshield, a side window, an assist grip, or any other cabin surface that would be near a deploying SRS curtain airbag.

• Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

• Modifications on or inside the front door panels for the purpose of a speaker replacement or sound insulation.

- The impact sensors, which detect the pressure of an impact, are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trims, such as the addition of door speakers for example. Any modifications to the doors will cause the airbag system to become inoperative or result in unintended airbag deployment.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifications can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.

• Attachment of any equipment (bush bar, winches, snow plow, skid plate, etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the front end.
• Modification of the suspension system or front end structure.
• Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the tires specified on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's door pillar or specified for individual vehicle models in this Owner's Manual.
• Attachment of any equipment (side steps or side sill protectors etc.) other than genuine SUBARU accessory parts to the side body

■ How to contact the vehicle manufacturer concerning modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag system

Changing or moving any parts of the fro seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, front side frame, radiator panel, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering column, tire, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you have any questions, you may contact the following SUBARU distributors.

Subaru of America, Inc. Customer Advocacy Department One Subaru Drive

P.O. Box 9103 Camden, NJ 08101-9877 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii 2850-A Pukoloa St., Honolulu, HI 96819

877-215-0338

Shen's Corporation dba Prestige Automobiles
af-491 East Marine Corps Drive, Dededo, Guam 96929
671-633-2698
Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distributors in any other U.S. territories. If you are in such an area, please contact the SUBARU distributor or dealer from which you bought your vehicle.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if want to install any accessory parts on vehicle.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Keys and doors

2-1. Keys.... 116

Key number plate 116

2-2. Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped) 117

Safety precautions.... 118

Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob 120

Unlock using PIN Code Access.... 124

Power saving function 126

Power saving function of access key fob ......

Disabling keyless access function 127

Selecting audible signal operation 130

Selecting hazard warning flasher operation...... 130

Warning chimes and warning indicator 130

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 130

Replacing battery of access key fob....130

Replacing access key fob 130

Certification for keyless access with push-button start system 130

2-3. Immobilizer.... 132

Security indicator light.... 132

Key replacement.... 132

Certification for immobilizer system 132

2-4. Remote keyless entry system 133

Locking the doors 135

Unlocking the doors 135

Unlocking the rear gate.... 135

Selecting hazard warning flasher operation...... 135

Vehicle finder function 135

Sounding a panic alarm 135

Setting audible signal operation 135

Replacing the battery 136

Replacing lost transmitters.... 136

Certification for remote keyless entry system ....

2-5. Door locks....137

Locking and unlocking from the outside.... 137

Locking and unlocking from the inside.... 138

Automatic door locking/unlocking 139

Key lock-in prevention function.... 140.

Battery drainage prevention function.... 140g

2-6. Alarm system....142

Alarm system operation 142

Arming the system.... 142

Disarming the system 143

Alarm system setting 144

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system.... 144

Valet mode.... 144

2-7. Child safety locks....145

2-8. Windows....145

Power window operation 146

Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function) ....

2-9. Rear gate....148

Manual rear gate 148

Power rear gate (if equipped) 149

2-10. Moonroof (if equipped) 157

Sunshade switch.... 157

Moonroof switch 158

2-11. Rear door window sunshades (if equipped) 159

2-1. Keys

NOTE

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", refer to "Keyless access with push-button status system" P117.

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

1 1 2 3 203953

1 Master keys
2 Valet key
3 Key number plate

These keys can be used in the following locations.

• Ignition switch
• Driver's door
• Glove box (except the valet key)

The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and valet key at a parking facility.

NOTE

locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the key details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P133.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or key case to either key. If it bangs against your knees while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine.

■ Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key number plate attached to the key set. Write down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the vehicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your key or lock it inside the vehicle. Refer to "Key replacement" P132.

2-2. Keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped)

The following access key fobs are provided with the vehicle.

1 2 3 202499

1 Access key fob (main)
2 Access key fob (sub)
3 Key number plate

The "keyless access with push-button start system" allows you to perform the following functions when you are carrying the access key fob.

- Locking and unlocking of the doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid. For details, refer to "Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob" P120.

• Starting and stopping the engine. For details, refer to "Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)" P346.
• Arming and disarming the alarm system. For details, refer to "Alarm system P142.

NOTE

• Locking/unlocking using the remote keyless entry system can also be controlled with the buttons on the access key fob. For details, refer "Remote keyless entry system" P133.
• Carefully store the key number plate supplied with the access key fob is necessary for vehicle repair and additional registration of access key fobs. For details, refer to "Key replacement" P132.

An emergency key is attached to each access key fob.

1" 2 202500

1 Release button
2 Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency key.

The emergency key is used for the following operations.

• Locking and unlocking the driver's door
• Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked whe you leave your vehicle and the access key fob (with the emergency key removed) at a parking facility.

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

• If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, stay at least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the transmitting antennas installed on the vehicle.
  The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of implanted pacemakers and implanted defibrillators.
  If you wear electronic medical equipment other than an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, before using the keyless access with push-button start system, refer to "Radio waves used for the keyless access with push-button start system" mentioned later, and contact the electronic medical equipment manufacturer for more information. The radio waves from the transmitting antennas on the vehicle could adversely affect the operation of the electronic medical equipment.
  "Radio waves used for the key-less access with push-button

start system"

- The keyless access with push-button start system uses radio waves of the following frequency* in addition to the radio waves used for the remote keyless entry system. The radio waves are periodically output from the antennas installed on the vehicle as shown in the following illustrations.

* Radio frequency: 134 kHz

Technical diagram showing cross-sectional views of a car with labeled components and structural details

1 Antennas

CAUTION

• Never leave or store the access key fob inside the vehicle or within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle, or the battery may discharge rapidly. Note that the push-button ignition switch may not turn on in some cases depending on the location of the access key fob.

• The access key fob contains electronic components. Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunctions.

• It is recommended to have the access key battery replaced at an authorized SUBARU dealer to avoid the risk of damage.

• Do not get the access key wet. If the access key fob wet, wipe it off immediately and let it dry completely.
• Do not apply strong impacts the access key fob.
• Never leave the access key fob in direct sunlight or anywhere that may become hot, such as on the dashboard. It
  the at er. fok get

may damage the battery or cause circuit malfunctions.

• Do not wash the access key fob in an ultrasonic washer.
• Do not leave the access key fob in humid or dusty locations. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
• Keep the access key fob away from magnetic sources.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a personal computer or home electrical appliance.
• Do not leave the access key fob near a battery charger or any electrical accessories.
• Do not apply metallic window tint or attach metallic objects to the windows.
• Do not fit non genuine accessories or parts.

- If the access key fob is dropped, the integrated emergency key inside may become loose. Be careful not to lose the emergency ke

- When traveling in an airplane, do not press the button of the access key fob. If any button of the access key fob is pressed, radio waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane. In a bag, take measures to prevent the buttons from being pressed accidentally.

NOTE

• The operational/non-operational setting for the keyless access function can be changed. For the setting procedure, refer to "Disabling keyless access function" P127.
• For detailed information about the operation method for the push-button ignition switch while the keyless access function is switched to the non-operational mode, refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob do not operate properly" P464.
• The keyless access with push-button start system uses weak radio waves. The status of the access key fob and environmental conditions may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle under the following conditions, and it may not be possible to lock or unlock the doors or start the engine.

- When operating near a facility where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a broadcast

station and power transmission lines
- When products that transmit radio waves are used, such as an access key fob or a remote transmitter key of another vehicle
- When carrying the access key of your vehicle together with access key fob or the remote transmitter of another vehicle
- When the access key fob is placed near wireless communication equipment such as a cell phone
- When the access key fob is placed near a metallic object
- When metallic accessories are attached to the access key fob
- When carrying the access key with an electronic appliances such as a laptop computer
- When the battery of the access key fob is discharged
- The access key fob is always communicating with the vehicle and is continuously using the battery. Although the life of the battery was depending on the operating conditions, it is approximately 1 to 2 y. If the battery becomes fully discharged, replace it with a new one

• If an access key fob is lost, it is recommended that all of the remaining access key fobs be reregistered. For reregistration of an access key fob, contact a SUBARU dealer.
• For a spare access key fob, contact SUBARU dealer.
  To pp to 7 access key fobs can be registered for one vehicle.
• Do not leave the access key fob in the storage spaces inside the vehicle, such as the door pocket, dash board or inside the corner of the cargo area. Vibrations may damage the key fob or turn on the switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.

• After the vehicle battery is discharged or replaced, initialization of the steering lock system may require to start the engine. In the case, perform the following procedure to initialize the steering lock
  (1) Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position. For details, refer to "Switching power status" P167.
  (2) Open and close the driver's door.
  (3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
  When the steering is locked, the initialization is completed.

• Do not leave the access key fob in gain- the following places.

• On the instrument panel
• On the floor
• Inside the glove box
  a_ Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat
• In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations may occur.

- The access key fob is mistakenly locked inside the vehicle.

- A false warning issues although no malfunction actually occurs.

- No warning issues even when a malfunction occurs.

be ■ Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob

- When the access key fob is carried within the operating range, the doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lid can be locked/unlocked just by touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle can also be locked/unlocked with the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P133.

▼ Operating ranges

1 2 2 1 2 203356

1 Antennas
2 Operating range (approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm))

1 202501

1 LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either the operating ranges of the front doors, the LED indicator on the access key fob flashes. When the keyless access functions are disabled, the LED indicator does not flash unless a button on the access key fob is pressed.

NOTE

• If the access key fob is placed too close to the vehicle body, the key-less access functions may not operate properly. If it does not operate properly, repeat the operation from farther away.
• If the access key fob is placed near the ground or in an elevated location from the ground, even if it is in that indicated operating range, the key-less access function may not operate properly.
• When the access key fob is within the operating range, it is possible anyone, even someone who is not carrying the access key fob, to operate the keyless access function. Note that the keyless access function can be operated only by the door handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener button or rear lock button in the operating range in which the access key fob is detected.

redt is not possible to lock the doors,

the rear gate and fuel filler lid using the keyless access function when the access key fob is inside the vehicle. However, depending on the status of the keyless access key fob and the environmental conditions, the access key fob may be locked inside the vehicle. Before locking the vehicle, make sure that you have the access key fob.

When the battery of the access key fob is discharged, or when operating it in a location with strong radio waves or noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power plant, broadcast stationion or an area where wireless equipment is used), or while talking on a cell phone, the operating ranges may be reduced, or the keyless access function may not operate. In such a case, perform the procedure described in "Locking and unlocking" P464.

- The doors may lock or unlock when n. the car is being washed or exposed to a significant amount of water that contacts the door handle while the car key fob is still in the operating rang

▼ How to lock and unlock

It is possible to perform the following operations when you are carrying the

- CONTINUED -

access key fob.

• Lock and unlock the doors.
• Lock and unlock the rear gate.
• Lock and unlock the fuel filler lid.

NOTE

• It is not possible to lock the door rear gate and fuel filler lid using keyless access function when the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON" position. Refer to "Switching power status" P167.
• If the door handle is gripped with gloved hand, the door lock may be released.
• If the door lock sensor is touched three times or more repeatedly, the system will ignore the sensor option.
• When performing the locking procedure too quickly, locking may not complete. After performing the locking procedure, it is recommended to pull the REAR door handle to confirm that the doors have been locked.

• If any of the doors (or the rear gate) ^S are not fully closed, the following will occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not properly closed.

• An electronic chirp sounds five times.

• The hazard warning flashers flash five times.
• It is possible to lock the doors ever when one of the doors is open. After performing the locking procedure, the close the opened door or rear gate lock it.
  the Within 3 seconds after locking the doors and the rear gate using the keyless access function, it is not a possible to unlock doors and/or the not rear gate using the keyless access function.
• When locking, be sure to carry the access key fob to prevent locking re- the access key fob in the vehicle.
• The setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed operating the center information of play. For details, refer to "Car settings" -P215. Also, the setting of the hazard warning flasher operation can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

▼ Locking with the door lock sensor

ven After to the s 1 204304

1 Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doors including the rear gate and fuel filler lid, and touch the door lock sensor on the door handle. All doors including the rear gate and fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound once and the of hazard warning flashers will flash once.

▼ Locking with the rear lock button ▼ Unlocking

1 204305

1 Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all door including the rear gate and fuel filler lid and press the rear lock button. The rear gate, all doors and fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will soon once and the hazard warning flashers w flash once.

Line drawing of a car being cleaned with a tool, showing the worker and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

Carry the access key fob, and grip the following door handle.

- The driver's door handle: Either only the driver's door and the fuel filler lid will unlock, or all doors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lid will unlock.

The front passenger's door handle: All doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid will unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▼ Locking with the power rear gate lock button

1 203646

1 Power rear gate lock button

Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. It will close automatically, and the rear gate, all doors and the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, the hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

▼ Unlocking rear gate

Diagram showing a person using a car to adjust or repair a vehicle, with an inset highlighting the component '1' and date '204307'.

1 Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the rear gate opener button. Either only the rear gate will unlock, or all doors and fuel filler lid will unlock. Also, an electronic chir will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

▼ Door unlock selection function

When the door is unlocked using the keyless access function, only the doors that were set can be unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the following methods.

- The setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

• The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

■ Unlock using PIN Code Access

When all doors including the rear gate are locked, you can unlock the driver's door without a key by pressing the rear lock button.

Diagram illustrating car damage detection with a worker inspecting a car, showing impact zones and component details.

1 Rear lock button

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the key fob is accidentally left in the vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) be registered.

▼ Registration for a PIN code

Steps Operation		Time from the previous step
1 Turn off the		ignition switch. —
2 Close all doors (including rear gate). —
3		Press and hold the" button on the access key fob, and press and hold the rear lock button until a chirp sounds intermittently.	—
4 Press the "		" button on the access key fob. Within 30 seconds
5		The PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds after the chirp sound of step 4.For example, to register "32468" as the PIN code, perform the following procedure.	Within 30 seconds
		(1) Press the	button three times.
		(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.
		(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.
		(4) After a chirp sounds once, press the button six times.
		(5) After a chirp sounds once, press the button eight times.
6		Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp starts sounding intermittently.	—
7 All doors will		be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered.	—

NOTE

Press the “☐” button within 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparation mode and move on to the registration stage. Unless the “☐” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.

NOTE

• Press the rear lock button ten tim to enter "0".
• Change the PIN code frequently to protect your vehicle from theft.
• If you have lent your vehicle to another person, confirm that the PIN code has not been changed deleted. If the PIN code has been changed or deleted, reregister a pin code.
• If you make an error during the registration procedure, press the "☐" or "→" button on the access key fob. Then, start over from the procedure described in "Preparation for registering a PIN code".
• To protect your vehicle from theft, you cannot register a string of the same five numbers together, such "00000", nor "12345" as a PIN co
• Do not register your vehicle license plate number or simple numbers such as "11122" or "12121" as a PIN code. Doing so will increase risk of vehicle theft.

• When you try to register "22222", registered PIN code will be delete. You cannot unlock the doors by Code Access until a new code is registered.

• After registering a new PIN code, makes sure that you can unlock doors using the PIN code.

• The PIN code cannot be deleted while the keyless access function is disabled by operating the acce key fob.
  of Reregister the PIN code in the following cases.
  new - When you forget the PIN code
• When you want to change the code.

▼ Unlocking

Perform steps (1) to (5) of step 5 desc in "Registration for a PIN code".

NOTE

You cannot unlock by PIN Code as Access in the following cases.

- When the access key fob is v the operating ranges.

- When the ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON" position.

thef you make an operation error du ing the unlocking procedure, start the over with the unlocking procedure d, after waiting for 5 seconds or lo

PINTo protect your vehicle from theft, electrical chirp will sound if incorrect PIN codes are entered five t continuously. If this occurs, you

cannot unlock the doors by PIN the Code Access for 5 minutes.

■ Power saving function

sTo protect the access key fob battery and the vehicle battery, the keyless access function will be disabled as follows.

• When the keyless access function and the remote keyless entry system have PIN not been used for 2 weeks or longer while all doors are locked.
• When the access key fob has been left in the operating range for 10 minutes or bedonger while all doors are locked.

▼ Recovery from power saving mode

When one of the following operations is performed, the keyless access function will be recovered.

- Unlock by gripping the door handle (only when the sensors on the front passenger's door are not disabled) or pressing the rear gate opener button on the rear gate.

- Lock or unlock by the remote keyless entry system.

Open a door and then close it. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.

■ Power saving function of cess key fob

This function stops the access key fob from receiving signals and helps minimize the battery consumption of the access key fob.

1. Press the 🔒 button twice while holding the 🔒 button.

1 202501

1 LED indicator

1. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks times to notify that the setting is complete.

When the access key fob is in the pow save mode, the keyless access function and push-button start system will not be available.

To cancel the power save mode, press of the buttons on the access key fob.

c■ Disabling keyless access function

If you wear an implanted pacemaker or an implanted defibrillator, perform the procedure described in "By operating the driver's door" P129 to disable the keyless access function. If you perform the procedure described in "By operating the access key fob" P127, the operation of an implanted pacemaker or implanted defibrillator may be affected by the radio waves from the transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used for a long time or when you choose not use the keyless access function, the keyless access function can be disabled.

NOTE

• The locking and unlocking function by the remote keyless entry system is not disabled.
• To start the engine while the functions are disabled, perform the procedure described in "Starting engine" P465.

▼ Disabling functions

By operating the access key fob To disable the keyless access function by operating the access key fob, register as PIN code for PIN Code Access. For details about registering a PIN code, refer to "Unlock using PIN Code Access" P128. 1. Open the driver's door.

Diagram of a car interior with a monitor and directional arrow, no readable text or symbols

1. Rotate the lock lever forward.

Keyless access with push-button start system

Line drawing of a car key with control buttons and navigation icons (no text or symbols)

1. Press and hold the " " button and " " button on the access key fob simultaneously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the function will be disabled.

∇ By operating the driver's door

Diagram of a car intake manifold with a close-up inset showing the internal components (no text or symbols)

To disable the keyless access function operating the driver's door, perform the following procedures.

Steps	Operation Time Status
1 Sit	in the driver's seat, and close the door. — Close
2 Push “ [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch. — Close
3	Open the driver's door.	Within 5 sec.	Close→Open
4	Push [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch twice.	Within 5 sec.	Open
5	Close and open the driver's door twice.	Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open→Close→Open
6	Push “ [IMAGE] on the power door locking switch twice while the door is open.	Within 10 sec.	Open
7	Close and open the driver's door once.	Within 10 sec.	Open→Close→Open
8 Close the door.		Within 5 sec.	Open→Close

byA chirp will sound and the functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door locking switch firmly. If the switch pressed firmly, the functions may not be disabled.

▼ Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the functions is performed again, a chirp will sound, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

- The keyless access function will be enabled only if you perform the procedure in the same manner us to disable the function (for example when disabling by operating the driver's door, the function will not be enabled even if you operate the access key fob).

- Press the push-button ignition switch if you do not know the procedure in which the keyless access function was disabled.

• When disabling by operating the driver's door: A chirp will not sound.
• When disabling by operating the access key fob: A chirp will sound.

■ Selecting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the do are locked or unlocked. If desired, you turn the audible signal off by operating center information display. For details,

refer to "Car settings" P215.

Furthermore, the volume setting of the audible signal can also be changed by SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Selecting hazard warning flasher operation

Using the hazard warning flasher, the system will give you a visible signal who the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Warning chimes and warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button sta system sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning indicator on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to "Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system" P186.

■ When access key fob does not operate properly Refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P464.
■ Replacing battery of access key fob Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P517.
■ Replacing access key fob Access key fobs can be replaced by a SUBARU dealer. For more details, contact a SUBARU dealer.
■ Certification for keyless access with push-button start system • U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AKB

FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Canada-spec. models

- Type 1

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

The immobilizer system is designed to prevent an unauthorized person from starting the engine. Only keys registered with your vehicle's immobilizer system can be used to operate your vehicle. If engine start is attempted with an unregistered access key fob or key, the engine will not start. Even if the engine does start, it will stop after a few seconds. This system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft guarantee.

CAUTION

• Do not place the key under dir sunlight or anywhere it may be come hot.
• Do not get the key wet. If the gets wet, wipe it dry with a immediately.
• Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

• To protect your vehicle from theft, please pay close attention to the following security precautions:
• Never leave your vehicle unattended with its keys inside.
• Before leaving your vehicle, close all windows and the mo roof, and lock the doors and gate.
• Do not leave spare keys or a record of your key number in vehicle.
• The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.

rect be- ■ Security indicator light

Refer to "Security indicator light" P190

key clot ■ Key replacement

Your key number plate will be required if you ever need a replacement key made. Any new key must be registered for use with your vehicle's immobilizer system before it can be used. The maximum number of keys that can be registered for use with one vehicle is as follows.

• Four (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")
• Seven (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

One key that has already been registered is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key's ID code still remains in the memory of the vehicle's immobilizer system. For security reasons, the lost key's ID code should be erased from the memory. To erase the lost key's ID code, all keys that will be used are required.

ther details about new key registration and erasing the lost key's ID code, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Certification for immobilizer system

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system": Refer to "Certification for keyless access with push-button start system" P130.
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system": - U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

- Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

2-4. Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

• Do not expose the remote trans mitter to severe shocks, such those experienced as a result dropping or throwing.
• Do not take the remote transmitter apart except when replacing the battery.
• Do not get the remote transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immediately.
• When you carry the remote transmitter on an airplane, do not press the button of the remote transmitter while in the airplane. When any button of the remote transmitter is pressed, radio waves are sent and may affect the operation of the airplane. When you carry the remote transmitter in a bag on an airplane, take measures to prevent the buttons of the remote transmitter from being pressed.

1 2 3 4 202502

Access key fob

1 Lock/arm button
2 Unlock/disarm button
3 Rear gate unlock button
4 PANIC button

1 2 6 3 4 PANIC 202238

Transmitter

1 Lock/arm button
2 Unlock/disarm button
3 Rear gate unlock button
4 PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the following functions.

• Locking and unlocking the doors, rear gate and fuel filler lid
• Unlocking the rear gate
• Sounding a panic alarm
• Arming and disarming the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm system" P142.

The operable distance of the remote key less entry system is approximately 30 feet (10 meters). However, this distance will vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system's operable distance will be shorter in areas near a facility or electronic equipment emitting strong radio waves such as a power plant, broadcast station, TV tower, or remote controller of home electronic appliances.

NOTE

• For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the push-button ignition switch is in any position other than the "OFF" position.
• For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", the remote keyless entry system will not be activated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.

• The hazard warning flashers will flash once or twice when the access key fob/transmitter button is pressed in the following cases.

• When locking the doors

• When unlocking the doors
• When unlocking the rear gate

If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU

dealer for details.

■ Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all do the rear gate and fuel filler lid. An electric chirp will sound once and the hazard warning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are fully closed, the following will occur to also you that the doors (or the rear gate) are properly closed.

• An electronic chirp sounds five times.
• The hazard warning flashers flash five times.

When you close the door, it will automatically lock and then the following will occur

• An electronic chirp sounds once.
• The hazard warning flashers flash once.

■ Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler lid. A electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. unlock all doors, the rear gate, briefly pr the unlock/disarm button a second time within 5 seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and second presses of the unlock/disarm button (for unlocking of all of the rear gate) is extremely short, the system may not respond.

■ Unlocking the rear gate

Press the rear gate unlock button to unethotrear gate.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

■ Selecting hazard warning flasher operation

Using the hazard warning flasher, the system will give you a visible signal when the doors are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can turn the hazard warning flashers off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215. The setting can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Vehicle finder function

Use this function to find your vehicle parked among many vehicles in a large parking lot. Provided you are within 30 (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the

lock/arm button three times in a 5-second period will cause your vehicle's horn to sound once and its hazard warning flashers to flash three times.

^t NOTE

If the interval between presses is too short when you press the lock/arm button three times, the system may not respond to the signals from the remote transmitter.

the

■ Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the "PANIC" button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any button on the remote transmitter. Unless a button on the remote transmitter is pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after approximately 30 seconds.

■ Setting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the system will give you an audible signal when the doors lock and unlock.

feet

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

If desired, you can turn the audible signal-off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings"-P215. Furthermore, the volume setting of the audible signal can also be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

Perform the following steps to deactivate the audible signal. Take the same steps restore the function.

Diagram of a car interior showing a handle panel with a zoomed-in inset (no text or symbols)

Steps		Operation Time
1 Sit		in the driver's seat. —
2		Close all doors and the rear gate.	—
3	(1)	Press and hold on the power locking switch.	Within 10 sec. it
	(2)	Insert the key into the ignition switch and pull out at least 6 times.
4		Open and close the driver's door.	Within 10 sec.

to The hazard warning flashers flash 3 times to indicate completion of the setting. Your SUBARU dealer can perform the above procedure for you.

■ Replacing the battery

Refer to "Replacing key battery" P516

■ Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to purchase additional transmitters (up to four can be programmed), your transmitters should be reprogrammed for security reasons. For details, contact your SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters programmed into the remote keyless entry system.

■ Certification for remote key-less entry system

▼ U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G077

FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

■ Locking and unlocking from the outside

NOTE

If you unlock the driver's door with key (including an emergency key) and open the door while the alarm system armed, the alarm system is triggered and the vehicle's horn sounds. In this case, perform any of the following operations:

- Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Press any button on the access key fob (except when the access key fob battery is discharged).

- Press the push-button ignition switch to "ACC".

- Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures.

- Grip the front door handle.

- Press the rear gate opener button.

- Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

- Press any button on the remo transmitter (except when the transmitter battery is dis-

charged). - Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to "ON".

For details about the alarm system, refer to "Alarm system" P142. d How to lock and unlock the vehicle is using the key

1 2 202957

1 Rotate the key toward the front to lock.
2 Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.
In this case, only the driver's side door is locked or unlocked.

NOTE

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The emergency key is directional. If the

- CONTINUED -

key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is fa and insert it again.

▼ How to lock the vehicle without using the key

To lock the door from outside without the key, the following methods are available.

▼ Locking using lock lever

Diagram of a car door with labeled parts and an inset showing a close-up of the door handle

1 Rotate the lock lever forward.
2 Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was open will be locked.

▼ Locking using power door lock cing ing switch

1 2 202959

1 Press the lock side of the power door locking switch.*
2 Close the door.
*: For details about the power door locking switch, refer to "How to operate the power door locking switches" P139.

In this case, all closed doors, the rear and fuel filler lid are locked at the same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the inside the vehicle when locking the doors from the outside without the

■ Locking and unlocking from the inside

▼ How to use the lock lever

1 2 202960

1 Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.
2 Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate are closed before starting to drive.

The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.

Pull the inside door handle to open an unlooked door.

When the door is locked, pulling the inside key door handle unlocks the door, allowing it to be opened (front door only).

WARNING

- Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small children are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seatbelts and child restraints, locking the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.

It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is accidentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors and entering your vehicle.

- Do not pull the front door handle from inside while driving. The door could open even if it is locked.

CAUTION

Do not pull the front inside door handle while operating the door lock. There is a risk that it will be possible to open or lock the doors.

▼ How to operate the power door locking switches

All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler lic be locked and unlocked using the power door locking switches located on the driver's side and the front passenger's side doors.

1 2 202961

Example

1 Press to lock.
2 Press to unlock.

NOTE

not make sure that you do not leave the fronside the vehicle before locking the doors from the outside using the po door locking switches.

■ Automatic door locking/un-locking

Aandoors, the rear gate and the fuel filler lic are automatically locked or unlocked under the following conditions.

- For automatic door locking

• When the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory default setting).
• When the select lever is shifted into a position other than the "P" position.

- For automatic door unlocking

• When the driver's door is open (factory default setting).
• When the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• When the select lever is shifted into the "P" position.

NOTE

• The automatic door lock and unlock setting can be changed with the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P215.
  When locking the door by operating the power door locking switches, automatic door locking will not operate.
• When unlocking the door by operating the power door locking switches,

automatic door unlocking will not operate.

• When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the K lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator "☐" will appear and the warning chime will also sound.
• If the system detects a strong enough impact to deploy the airbags, all doors will automatically unlocked.

For further details, refer to "Automatic door locking/unlocking operation when involved in an accident" P469.

■ Key lock-in prevention function

Under the following conditions, all the doors will not lock when the door lock switch is pushed with the front door op

• The key is still in the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or

"ON" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

m n o PTE

• When leaving the vehicle, make sure you are holding the key before losing the doors.
  The factory setting (default setting) key for this function is set as "operational". This function's operational/ed, non-operational setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU dealer for details.
• When getting out of the vehicle from a rear door, make sure to unlock the doors by pushing the unlock side of the power door locking switch. If a rear door is unlocked from the inside door lever then the door is opened and closed, the lock-in prevention function will be triggered. All doors will be unlocked the Key lock-in prevention warning indicator “” will appear and the warning chime will also sound.

▼ Non-operation of key lock-in prevention function

When the system is set so that it does operate, the doors are locked by the following operation.
- When the lock lever is turned to the

front ("LOCK") position with the driver's door open and the driver's door is then closed with the lock lever in that position, the driver's door will be locked.
When the spare key is used to lock the driver's door from the outside of the vehicle, the door will be locked.

■ Battery drainage prevention function

Illuminating lights under various conditions will automatically turn off to prevent the battery from discharging.
▼ Battery drainage prevention function while doors are open If a door or the rear gate is not completely closed, the interior lights will remain illuminated as a result. However, several lights are automatically turned off by the battery drainage prevention function to prevent the battery from discharging. The following interior lights are affected by this function.

Item	Switch position	Automatically turning off
notMap lights	DOOR	Approximately 20 minutes later
Reading light	—	Approximately 20 minutes later
Ignition switch light	—	Approximately 20 minutes later
Cargo area light	DOOR	Approximately 20 minutes later
Ambient lighting (if equipped)	—	Approximately 20 minutes later

NOTE

• The default setting for this function is set as “operational”. The operational/non-operational setting of this function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
• When leaving the vehicle, please make sure that all doors and the gate are completely closed.

• The battery drainage prevention function does not operate under the following conditions.

• The key is in the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

• The ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON" position (models with "key-less access with push-button start system").

▼ Battery drainage prevention function for other conditions

Illuminating lights will turn off automatic by the battery drainage prevention function when the following operation is not performed 20 minutes after the ignition switch is put in the "LOCK"/"OFF" position

Turning off lights

- Map light- Reading light- Ignition switch light- Cargo area light- Ambient lighting- Vanity mirror light*- Door courtesy light*

rearActions

- Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position.- Open or close the doors, including the rear gate.- Push the unlock button on the access key fob or transmitter.- Hold the front door handle and unlock it while holding the access key fob*- Insert the key into the keyhole the ignition switch*- Come close to the vehicle that the front door was locked while holding the access key fob (if OFF delay timer setting for period of time is not off)*- Push the panic button on the access key fob or transmitter.- Push the One-touch Interior Illumination switch*.

*1: Models with One-touch Interior Illumination

*2: Models with "keyless access with push-button start system"

*3: Models without "keyless access with push-button start system"

Take actions to illuminate the lights again when the battery drainage prevention function is active.

NOTE

The battery drainage prevention function cannot be turned off.
- If the battery drainage prevention function is in operation when a door is open, the target room light will not be illuminated.
- To protect the battery from battery drainage, make sure that all doors, including the rear gate, are completely closed when leaving the vehicle.
- For models with One-touch Interior Illumination, the map light and reading light will be turned off when the are pushed.
For models without One-touch Interior Illumination, the map light and reading light that is turned on by pushing the switch will not be turned off.

2-6. Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The ho sounds and the hazard warning flashers flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The system can be armed or disarmed with the keyless access function or acc key fob.

The system will not be activated when push-button ignition switch is in the "AC or "ON" position.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

The system can be armed or disarmed with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle's alarm system has been set for activation at the time of shipment from the factory. You can set the system for deactivation yourself or have it done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Alarm system operation

When the alarm system is armed, it is triggered by opening any of the doors, near gate or engine hood.

The alarm system will activate the following alarms when triggered.

• The vehicle's horn will sound for 30 seconds.
  ● The hazard warning flashers will flash for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or end hood remains open after the 30-second period, the horn will continue to sound maximum of 3 minutes. If the door, rear gate or engine hood is closed while the horn is sounding, the horn will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to tri the illumination of the following inte lights.

set Map lights (illuminates only when om the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position)

• Reading lights
• Cargo area light (illuminates only when the cargo area light switch the "DOOR" position)

The notifications regarding the map lights, reading lights and cargo area light are deactivated as the factory setting. A SUBARU dealer can activate the system. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Arming the system

The alarm system becomes armed when the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if equipped) and turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
   or a
2. Carry the key and get out of the vehicle.
3. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
4. Lock the doors using any of the following methods.

gger- Locking using the remote keyless entry system. For details, refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P133.
- Locking using the keyless access function (if equipped). For details, refer to "Locking with the door lock sensor" P122.
is in Locking using the power door locking switch. For details, refer to "Locking using power door locking switch" P138.

- Locking using the power rear gate lock button. For details, refer to "Locking with the power rear gate lock button" P123.

graph TD
    A["Circle 1"] --> B["Padlock Icon"]
    C["Circle 2"] --> B
    D["Circle 3"] --> B
    B --> E["End"]

Security indicator light

NOTE

All doors and the rear gate will lo electronic chirp will sound once, th hazard warning flashers will flash o and the security indicator light will flashing rapidly.

1. Approximately 30 seconds later, the system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state, the security indicator light will then flash slowly (twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the system has been armed for surveillance.

NOTE

• The system can be armed even if windows and/or moonroof are open. Always make sure that they are closed before arming the system.
• When arming the system, if any of the doors or the rear gate is not closed, an electronic chirp sounds five times and the hazard warning flashers flash five times to alert y that the doors (or the rear gate) a not properly closed. When you clo the door, doors will automatically lock and the system will automatically arm in 30 seconds.
• The 30-second standby time can be eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed by your SUBARU dealer.
• If any of the following actions is done during the standby period, the system will not switch to the surveillance state.

- Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the access key fob/remote transmitter.

- Doors (including the rear gate) are unlocked using the keyless access function (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

• Any door (including the rear gate) is opened.
• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push_ly button start system").
• Push-button ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position fully (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

Disarming the system

are Perform either of the following procedures.

• Briefly press a button (for less than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/remote transmitter.
• Carry the access key fob and perform either of the following procedures (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

he - Grip the front door handle.

veil- Press the rear gate opener button.
- Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light will then change slowly (once approximately every 3 seconds from twice approximately every 2 seconds), indicating that the alarm system has been disarmed.

▼ Emergency disarming

For models with "keyless access with the push-button start system": If you cannot disarm the system using the access key fob (i.e., the access key fob broken or the access key fob battery is to weak), refer to "Switching power status" P465.

For models without "keyless access with the push-button start system":

The system can be disarmed if you turn ignition switch from the "LOCK"/"OFF" position to the "ON" position with a registered key.

NOTE

If the access key fob or transmitter battery is too weak, replace the bat immediately. Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P517.

■ Alarm system setting

To change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system for activation or deactivation, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Disarming the system" P143.
2. Sit in the driver's seat and shut all doors, the rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

4. Hold down "â" of the driver's power door locking switch, open the driver's door within the following 1 second, a wait 10 seconds without releasing the switch. The setting will then be changed as follows.

Setting status	Combination meter display	Horn
Activate	AL ON	Once
Deactivate the	AL OFF	Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting ch done by your SUBARU dealer.

■ If you have accidentally triggered the alarm system

▼ To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

• Press any button on the access key remote transmitter.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").
• Turn the push-button ignition to the "ACC" position (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the alarm. If the key is not registered, the alarm will not stop.

■ Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the alarm system does not operate. In valet mode, the remote transmitter is used only for locking and unlocking the doors and rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to deactivation mode. Refer to "Alarm system setting" P144. The security indicator light will continue to flash once every 3 seconds, indicating that the system is in the valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of your vehicle's alarm system to activation mode. Refer to "Alarm system setting" P144.

2-7. Child safety locks

Lock 202476

Each rear door has a child safety lock. When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks the "LOCK" position when children sit in the rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally opens the door and falls out.

2-8. Windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception.

• When operating the power windows, be extremely careful to prevent anyone's body parts or any other objects from being caught in the window.
• Always lock the passengers' windows using the lock switch when children are riding in the vehicle.
• Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the power window.

NOTE

- If the power window system detects resistance, an impact or abnormality, the window operation may be automatically stopped to prevent

further jamming, entrapment or malfunction.

• The closing window slides down slightly and stops.
• The opening window stops slicking down.

- The power window system may detect resistance, an impact or abnormality in the following cases.

• A substantial sized object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• A foreign object is caught between the window and the window frame.
• The vehicle drives over a deep pothole.

- The window cannot be closed for a few seconds after the window is automatically stopped by the system.

■ Power window operation

▼ Power window switches

1 2 3 4 5 202962

Driver's side power window switches

1 For front left window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
2 For front right window (with one-touch auto up and down feature)
3 For rear left window
4 For rear right window
5 Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster on the driver's side door.

These switches illuminate when activated.

Line drawing of a vehicle's side profile with no text or symbols

Passenger's side power window switches

Each passenger's window can be controlled by the power window switch located on the door.

These switches illuminate when activated.

▼ Operating the window

1 2 3 4 202972

With one-touch auto up and down feature d1 Automatically close*

2 Close
3 Open
4 Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the switch to the opposite side.

1 2 202973

Without one-touch auto up and down feature
1 Close
2 Open

NOTE

Avoid the following.

• Continuously operating a switch in the same direction after the wind is fully closed or fully opened.
• Continuously operating three or more switches all at once in the same direction after the windows are fully closed or fully opened.

Either of the operations described above may cause the power window breaker to operate making it impossible to open or close the window. Be sure to initialize the power windows. Refer to

"Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function)" P14

▼ Anti-entrapment function (windows with off delay function)

While closing the window automatically, it the window senses a substantial enough object trapped between the window and the window frame, it automatically moves down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while window opening automatically, the window will stop.

CAUTION

• Never attempt to test the power window operation using body parts.
• If an object is caught just before the window fully closes, the system may not operate properly.

NOTE

• If a window detects an impact sin to that caused by trapping an ol (for example, when the vehicle en
  counters a deep pothole), the an entrapment function may operate.

• You cannot close the window for a 3. few seconds after the anti-entrapment function operates.
  ▼ Off delay function (if equipped) The windows can be operated for approximately 40 seconds even after the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "OFF" position. If a front door is opened within 40 seconds, the off delay function is canceled.
  ▼ Locking the passengers' windows

203438

Lock
Unlock

-The lock switch is in the lock position, the rear windows cannot be operated by the driver's side switches. The passenger's side switches and the rear seat side switches are not operational either.

- CONTINUED -

When the indicator on the window switches does not illuminate, the window switch cannot be operated.

■ Initialization of power window (windows with off delay function)

If the one-touch auto up and down fund or off delay function does not operate properly, operate each window according to the following procedure in order to initialize the power window system.

1. Close the door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.
3. Open the window completely and then press and hold down the power window switch for approximately 1 second.
4. Close the window completely and then pull and hold the power window switch for approximately 1 second.

2-9. Rear gate

CAUTION

When loading and unloading cargo, be careful not to come in contact with the hot engine exhaust gas or the exhaust pipe, because they could burn you.

■ Manual rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unloc using any of the following systems.

• Power door locking switch: Refer to "Locking and unlocking from the inside P138.
• Keyless access with the push-button start system (if equipped): Refer to "Keyless access with push-button star system" P117.
• Remote keyless entry system: Refer "Remote keyless entry system" P133.
• Automatic door locking/unlocking: Refer to "Automatic door locking/unlocking" P139.

To open:

Line drawing of a car rear view showing structural components and a close-up inset (no text or symbols)

Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.
   e2. Press and hold the rear gate opener button. The rear gate will open slightly.
2. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be opened due to a discharged vehicle battery, a malfunction in the door locking/unlocking system or other causes, the rear gate can be unlocked by manually operating the rear gate lock release lever. For the procedure, refer to "Rear gate - if the rear gate cannot be opened" P466.

To close:

Line drawing of a car intake tray with a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily with the handle.

WARNING

• To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, always keep the rear gate closed while the engine is running.
• Do not attempt to shut the rear gate while holding the handle.

- Do not close the rear gate by pulling the handle from inside the cargo space. There is a danger of your hand being caught and injured.

CAUTION

• Do not jam a plastic bag into or place cellophane tape on the rear gate stays or scratch the stays while loading or unloading cargo. Doing so could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.
• Be careful not to hit your head or face on the rear gate when opening or closing the rear gate and when loading or unloading cargo.

■ Power rear gate (if equipped)

WARNING

- When operating the power rear gate, observe the following precautions. Ignoring the precautions may result in an injury (e.g., anyone's body is hit against the rear gate or is caught in the

rear gate, etc.).

• Make sure there are no people around the rear gate.

• Never let anyone get close to the rear gate.

• When closing the rear gate, be sure to prevent anyone's body parts or other objects from being caught in the rear gate. Otherwise, serious personal injury may be caused by entrapment.

• After opening the rear gate on a slope using the power rear gate feature, the rear gate may close. Make sure that the rear gate has stopped completely after opening it.
• When leaving the vehicle, always carry the key for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Doing so could result in injury to the child operating the power rear gate.
• The driver should be aware of and pay careful attention to his/her responsibilities.
• Use the power rear gate only when the area around the rear gate is clearly visible and when you have checked that there is no

danger of people being caught the rear gate.

CAUTION

• When closing the rear gate after opening it, make sure to use the power rear gate. If the rear gate closed manually with extra force, the power rear gate may be damaged.
• Do not install any accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts on the rear gate. If the weight of rear gate increases excessively, the rear gate stays cannot support the rear gate sufficiently when opening the rear gate. Also, the power rear gate may not function properly may malfunction.
• Do not touch the driving rod. Doing so may result in injury damage.

The power rear gate operates only when all of the following conditions are satisfied.

• The vehicle is stopped completely.
• The outside temperature is within a range of -22^ to 140^ (from -30^ 60^ ).

The ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position. Or, the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is in the "P" position.

We recommend using the power rear gate function in most circumstances instead of manual operation.

is NOTE

• Do not press the power rear gate button repeatedly while the power rear gate is operating. Otherwise, the system may ignore the button operation in order to avoid being damaged.
• If the vehicle starts to move while the power rear gate is operating, the system sounds a buzzer and closes the rear gate automatically. At this time, if the system detects jamming, it will deactivate the power rear gate function and the rear gate will not be closed. If this occurs, close the rear gate manually. For details, refer to "Manual rear gate" P148.
• If you try to open the rear gate using the power rear gate function immediately after closing the rear gate using the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sound and to the rear gate will not open. Wait for a while before trying to open the rear

gate via the power rear gate function.

- If either of the operating conditions has not been satisfied while operating the power rear gate, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate will be deactivated. In this case, the rear gate may stop opening or closing suddenly.

▼ Operation NOTE

• The rear gate will remain unlocked even after closing it. Always lock the rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
  • the If you cannot open/close the rear gate by performing the operation described as follows, a short electronic chirp will sound three times (beep, beep, beep).

∇ By the power rear gate button (other than the buttons on the rear gate)

Diagram showing car interior with labeled switch and vehicle icon, including a zoomed-in view of the switch.

Power rear gate button on the instrument panel

203666

Power rear gate button on the access fob

t PANIC 203440

Power rear gate button on the transmi To open the rear gate: Press and hold the power rear gate but when the rear gate is closed. The rear

will open automatically. Then an electronic chirp and the hazard warning flashers will operate as follows:

• When operating the power rear gate button on the instrument panel: sounds and flashes twice.
• When operating the power rear gate button on the access key fob/transmitter: sounds and flashes four times.

NOTE

• If the rear gate cannot be opened by operating the power rear gate button
  key on the instrument panel, unlock it with the keyless access function or the remote keyless entry system. Then, it will be possible to open the power rear gate using the power rear gate button on the instrument panel.
• The factory setting (default setting) of the operation for the "button" on the access key fob is pressing and holding. This setting can be changed to non-operation or pressing twice at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact your SUBARU dealer.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press the power rear gate button while the rear gate is being opened. Then gate electronic chirp will sound twice and the

- CONTINUED -

hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close.

You can open the rear gate by pressing power rear gate button briefly while the rear gate is being closed.

Pure technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no text or symbols

NOTE

The rear gate cannot be paused when is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) ran from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open

To close the rear gate:

Press and hold the power rear gate button. Then an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice. If you briefly press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

NOTE

The factory setting (default setting) of the operation for the “” button on the access key fob is pressing and holding. This setting can be changed non-operation or pressing twice at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact your SUBARU dealer.

∇ By the buttons on the rear gate

NOTE

After performing the following procedures, an electronic chirp will sound twice and the hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

on it range on open. 204308

Rear gate opener button

to 2 1 203647

Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

1 Power rear gate button
2 Power rear gate lock button

To open the rear gate:

1. For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", carry the access key fob. For models without "keyless access with push-button start system", unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener button when the rear gate is closed.

The rear gate will open automatically.

To pause the opening rear gate: Briefly press either of the following but to while the rear gate is being opened.

• Rear gate opener button
• Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will close. You can open the rear gate by pressing the pow rear gate button briefly while the rear g is being closed.

Pure mechanical diagram showing a curved component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

NOTE

The rear gate cannot be paused when it is in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) range from the fully closed position. The system will ignore any button operation and the rear gate will continue to open.

To close the rear gate:

Briefly press either of the following buttons.

• Rear gate opener button
  ● Power rear gate button on the inside edge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate button again, the rear gate will open.

To Lock the doors using the power gate lock button:

Carry the access key fob, and press the power rear gate lock button. All doors, rear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked and the rear gate will be closed. Also, hazard warning flashers will flash once, and an electronic chirp will sound once.

NOTE

• By pushing the power rear gate lock button for more than 2 seconds, doors are locked, however, the a door closing function of the rear gate will be canceled.
• If any of the doors is not fully closed, the outside warning chime sounds en five times to alert you that the doors range not properly closed.

∇ By manual operation

To open the rear gate:

Lift up the rear gate when the rear gate is midway position. The rear gate will open automatically.

To close the rear gate:

Pull down the rear gate when the rear gate is opened. The rear gate will close automatically.

rear NO

If the rear gate is moved slowly, it may not operate automatically open or close.

ne

▼ Manual operation

NOTE

Using the power rear gate operation is recommended. Manual operation will require physical effort.

The power rear gate can be closed manually. Refer to "Manual rear gate" P148.

▼ Memory function

The preferred rear gate height can be registered.

▽ Registration of the rear gate height

To register the rear gate height, perform the following procedures.

1. Open the rear gate and stop it at the preferable height.

203649

1 Power rear gate button
2. Press and hold the power rear gate button to register the height. An electronic chirp sounds and the hazard warning flashes for confirmation.

The rear gate will stop at the registered position when the memory function is on

NOTE

• Register the rear gate height to turn on the "Power Rear Gate Memory automatically. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.
• To change the registered height, perform the registering procedure again.
• It is possible to register the height from approximately 2 in (5 cm) of more from the completely closed position.

∇ Deactivation of the memory function

Deactivate the memory function to open the rear gate fully. Perform either of the following operation to deactivate the memory function.

• Deactivate the "Power Rear Gate Memory" function on the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P215.
• Register the position of the rear gate at the fully open position.

∇ Utilizing the memorized rear gate height

To open the rear gate and stop it at the registered height, perform the following procedure.

1. Check that "Power Rear Gate Memory" is on. Refer to "Car settings" P215.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear gate button.

NOTE

The rear gate will open to the position that is stored in the memory function even if the rear gate is opened by the reverse function.

▼ Reverse function

WARNING

• Do not let parts of your body get caught when operating the reverse function. If the reverse function does not operate for some reason, this may lead to serious injury or accidents.
• The reverse function may not operate if foreign objects are caught in the rear gate just before it closes completely. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other body parts.
• The reverse function may not operate depending on the object shape and the manner in which it was caught. Be careful not to catch your fingers and other

body parts.

CAUTION

• If the reverse function is operated 3 times consecutively, automatic opening and closing of the power rear gate function will be canceled and the rear gate will stop opening or closing suddenly. However, the rear gate may open or close depending on the rear gate height when automatic operation is ceased. Be careful that the rear gate does not hit anyone's head or face, etc. and that fingers and baggage, etc. are not caught in it.
  • Take care not to damage the touch sensors. Otherwise, the reverse function may cease to operate.

If, while opening or closing using power rear gate, the rear gate catches persons baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate will operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The rear gate will automatically open.

Line drawing of a car showing the rear open trunk and internal compartments (no text or symbols)

1 Touch sensors

not Touch sensors are attached on the left a right edges of the rear gate. If the touch sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc. while closing by the power rear gate function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3 times and the rear gate will open automatically.

NOTE

When the rear gate is opened using reverse function, it will be opened for to the height registered in the memory function.

▼ Rear gate auto closure function If, while fully opened via the power rear gate function, the rear gate is lowered by the weight of snow and such, an electronic chirp will sound and the rear gate auto closure function will apply braking to this rear gate so that it prevents a rapid closure of the rear gate.

NOTE

• If there is snow on the rear gate on use the power rear gate function after removing the snow.
• If you close the rear gate manually just after the rear gate is fully open using the power rear gate function, and the rear gate drop prevention function will detect a rapid closure of the rear gate and apply braking to the rear gate. In this case, this is not a malfunction.

▼ Selecting audible signal operation

Using an electronic chirp, the power rear gate will give you an audible signal before starting its operation. If desired, the audible signal can be turned off by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system", you can turn the audible signal off by operating the

- CONTINUED -

center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal also works as the audible signal settings for the "remote keyless entry system" and the "keyless access with push-button start system". However, for the warning chime such as that caused by "Reverse function P154 or "Rear gate auto closure function" P155, it cannot be set as non-operational.

▼ Initialization of power rear gate

If the power rear gate detects some abnormality while operating, an electronic chirp will sound and the power rear gate 1 operation will be automatically stopped in either opening or closing position. In this case, the system needs to be initialized in the following order to restart the function 2 properly.

If the power rear gate is closed

Line drawing of a car rear view with a close-up inset showing the side profile of the engine compartment (no text or symbols)

1. Keep pressing the rear gate opener switch until it unlocked (for approximately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate.
2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed.
3. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

If the power rear gate is opened

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts to close automatically. The system will be initialized once the gate is fully closed. If the rear gate will not close completely, keep pressing the rear gate opener button for approximately 5 seconds

and pull down the rear gate.

1. Operate the power rear gate and check that the function operates properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function does not operate properly, have your vehicle checked by SUBARU dealer.

2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone's hands, arms, head or any objects protrude from the moonroof. A person could be seriously injured if any of the following conditions occur.

• The vehicle stops suddenly.
  • The vehicle turns sharply.
• The vehicle is involved in an accident.
• Body parts protruding from the vehicle are struck by outside objects.

To avoid serious personal injury caused by entrapment, always conform to the following instructions without exception.

• Before closing the moonroof, make sure that no one's hands, arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the moonroof.
  ● Always carry the key when you leave the vehicle for safety reasons and never allow an unattended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating the moon-roof.

- Never try to check the anti-en-trapment function by deliberately placing part of your body in the moonroof.

CAUTION

• Do not sit on the edge of the moonroof.
• Do not operate the moonroof if falling snow or extremely cold conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
• The anti-entrapment function does not operate when the moonroof is being tilted down. Be to confirm that it is safe to before tilting the moonroof do
• If the moonroof does not close, have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding functions.

The moonroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

■ Sunshade switch

Diagram showing car air intake control panel with labeled buttons and directional arrows

204309

1 Open 2 Close

To open or close the sunshade using the automatic function, slide and hold the switch toward the open/close side and release.

re to stop the sunshade halfway, slide the so sunshade switch either way.

■ Moonroof switch

▼ Tilting moonroof

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

To raise or lower the moonroof, press t moonroof switch. If the shade is closed past the half-open position when the switch is pressed, it v open up to the half-open position.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof has been raised or has been lowered completely. Pressing the switch continuously may cause damage to the moonroof.

▼ Sliding moonroof

1 2 204311

1 Open 2 Close

To open the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held to the open side, the moonroof will open, then stop slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Slide the moonroof switch again to fully open the moonroof.

To close the moonroof:

When the moonroof switch is slid and held to the close side, the moonroof will close, then stop at the tilt-up position.

Slide and hold the moonroof switch again to fully close the moonroof.

To stop the moonroof halfway, slide the moonroof switch either way.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it rains, wipe away water on the roof prior to opening the moonroof to prevent drops of water from falling into the passenger compartment.

. For the sake of safety, it is recommended that you avoid driving with the moonroof fully opened.

▼ Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial enough object trapped between its glass and the vehicle's roof during closure, it automatically moves back to the fully open position and stops there. The anti-entrapment function may also be activated by a strong shock on the moonroof even when there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function using fingers, hands or other parts of your body.

2-11. Rear door window sur shades (if equipped)

Diagram illustrating car seatbelting and steering wheel assembly, showing front and side views with numbered instructions.

1 Hook

The rear door window sunshades are built in the rear door trim.

To use the sunshade, pull it up and hang it on the hooks.

To retract the sunshade, release it from the hooks slowly and allow it to roll into the door trim.

CAUTION

• Do not use the rear door window sunshade when the window is opened. There is a risk that the rear door window sunshade will come off of the hook.

• To ensure normal operation of the sunshades, observe the following precautions.

• Do not put anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of a sunshade.

• Do not put anything on the sunshades.
• Do not hang anything on the hook.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Instruments and controls

3-1. Ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system") ..... 164

Key positions 164

Key reminder chime....165

Ignition switch light (if equipped) 165

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with "keyless access with push-button start system") 166

Safety precautions.... 166

Operating range for push-button start system ..... 166

Switching power status.... 167

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 168

3-3. Hazard warning flasher 168

3-4. Meters and gauges 168

Speedometer 168

Tachometer.... 168

Odometer 169

Double trip meter.... 169

Fuel gauge 170

Engine coolant temperature gauge.... 170

ECO gauge 171

Combination meter settings 171

3-5. Illumination brightness control 171

Auto dimmer cancel function 172

3-6. Warning and indicator lights 172

Initial illumination for system check.... 172

Seatbelt warning light and chime 173

SRS airbag system warning light 17\$

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator lights 176

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light.... 176

Charge warning light.... 177

Oil pressure warning light 177

Engine low oil level warning light 1

Windshield washer fluid warning light .... 1 AT OIL TEMP warning light.... 178

Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped).... 178

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models).... 179

ABS warning light 180

Brake system warning light 18 ^2

Electronic parking brake indicator light 181

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light 183

Low fuel warning light.... 183

Door open warning light.... 183

Engine hood open warning light.... 183

All-Wheel Drive warning light 183

Power steering warning light 184

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light..... 184

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 185

Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped).... 186

Security indicator light 190

Select lever/gear position indicator.... 191

Turn signal indicator lights.... 191

High beam indicator light 191

High beam assist indicator light 191

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light....191

LED headlight warning light.... 191

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light....191

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light .....192

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .....

Headlight indicator light.... 192

X-MODE indicator 192

Hill descent control indicator 192

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) 192

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .....192

RAB warning indicator (if equipped).... 193

RAB OFF indicator (if equipped) 193

Icy road surface warning indicator ....193

Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped).... 193

Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped) 193

Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped) 193

Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped) 193

One-touch Interior Illumination indicator (if equipped) 194

3-7. Combination meter display (color LCD) .....

Basic operation 195

Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation).... 195

Warning screen 196

Meter information screen 196

Telltale screen.... 197

Basic screens 198

3-8. Center information display (CID) .....201

Features 201

Welcome screen.... 202

Good-bye screen.... 202

Interruption screen.... 202

Touch screen operations 202

Display 203

3-9. Clock 228

Setting the clock manually 228

Setting the clock automatically.... 228

Time Zone (models with navigation system) ..... 229

Daylight Saving Time (models with navigation system).... 229

3-10. Valet Mode 230

Activation of Valet Mode.... 230

Deactivation of Valet Mode 230

3-11. Light control switch 231

Precautions and tips 231

Headlights 231

High/low beam change (dimmer) 234

Headlight flasher 234

High beam assist function.... 234

Daytime running light system.... 237

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) .....238

3-13. Headlight beam leveler 239

3-14. Fog light switch (if equipped) .....239

3-15. Turn signal lever....240

One-touch lane changer 240

3-16. Wiper and washer.... 241 Windshield wiper and washer switches .... 243 Rear window wiper and washer switch.... 245

3-17. Mirrors 246 Inside mirror (if equipped) 246 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink (if equipped) 247

Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with HomeLink (if equipped).... 254 Outside mirrors.... 269

3-18. Defogger and deicer....273

3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel....274 Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ....

3-20. Horn....276

3-1. Ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

WARNING

• Never turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position while the vehicle is being driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, preventing steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it takes a much great effort than usual to steer.
• Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child or others. Children could operate the power windows, the moonroof or other controls or even make the vehicle move.

Do not attach a large key holder key case to either key. If it bange against your knees or hands while you are driving, it could turn the ignition switch from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position, thereby stopping the engine. Also, if the key is attached to a holder or to a large bunch of other keys, centrifugal force may act on as the vehicle moves, resulting in unwanted turning of the ignition switch.

to s. e PUSH LOCK ACC ON S/SS 301689

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

• Keep the ignition switch in the "LOCK" position when the engine is not running.
• Using electrical accessories for a long time with the ignition switch in the "ON" or "ACC" position can cause the battery to go dead.
• If the ignition switch will not move by key from the "LOCK" position to the "ACC" position, turn the steering wheel slightly to the left and right as you turn the ignition switch.

■ Key positions

Position	Description
LOCK	The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
ACC	In this position the electrical accessories (audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can be used.
ON	This is the normal operating position after starting the engine.
START	The engine is started in this position.

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to "START" position while the engine is running.

R PUSH LOCK ACC 04 301690

NOTE

• To turn the key from the "ACC" to "LOCK" position, the select lever must be in the "P" position and the key must be pushed in and turned
• If your registered key fails to start the engine, pull out the key once security indicator light will blink), and then insert the key again and turn it to the "START" position ag to restart the engine.

• The engine may not start in the following cases:

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with concentric circles and a key inserted (no text or symbols)

- The key grip is touching ano key or a metallic key holder.

the d. (the pain 301692

- The key is near another key contains an immobilizer trans-

ponder.

- The key is near or touching another transmitter.

■ Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position.

The chime stops under the following conditions.

• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
• The key is removed from the ignition switch.

- The driver's door is closed.

■ Ignition switch light (if equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in the dark, the ignition switch light illuminates when the driver's door is opened or when the driver's door is unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several tens of seconds and then gradually turns off under the following conditions.

- The driver's door is closed.

that The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light turns off immediately under the following conditions.

• The ignition switch is turned to the "O" position.
• All doors and the rear gate are locked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with "keyless access with push-button start system")

■ Safety precautions

■ Operating range for push-button start system

Refer to "Safety precautions" P118.

1 2 305671

1 Antennas
2 Operating range

NOTE

- If the access key fob is not detected within the operating range of the antennas inside the vehicle, the push-button ignition switch and the

engine start cannot be operated. Even when the access key fob is outside the vehicle, if it is placed too close to the glass, it may be possible to switch the power or to start the engine.

- Do not leave the access key fob in the following places. It may become impossible to operate the push-button ignition switch and the engine start. It may also cause a false warning to issue although no malfunction actually occurs, or not to issue a warning when any malfunction occurs.

• On the instrument panel
• On the floor
• Inside the glove box
• Inside the door trim pocket
• On the rear seat
• In the cargo area

- When operating the push-button ignition switch or starting the engine, if the access key fob battery is discharged, perform the procedure described in "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P464. In such a case, replace the battery immediately. Refer to "Replacing battery of access key fob" P517.

Switching power status

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 204312

1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in driver's seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the "P"/"N" position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. Every time the button is pressed, the power is switched in the sequence of "OFF", "ACC", "ON" and "OFF". When the engine is stopped and the push-button ignition switch is in "ACC" or "ON", the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch illuminates

in orange.

Power status	Indicator color	Operation
OFF	Turned off	Power is turned off.
ACC	Orange	The following systems can be used:audio and accessory power outlet.
ON	Orange (while engine is stopped)	All electrical systems can be used.
	Turned off (while engine is running)

CAUTION

• When the push-button ignition switch is left in "ON" (while the engine is not running) or "ACC" for a long time, it may result in vehicle battery discharge.
• Do not spill drinks or other liquids on the push-button ignition switch. It may cause a malfunction.
• Do not touch the push-button ignition switch with a hand soiled with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

• If the push-button ignition switch does not operate smoothly, stop the operation. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If the push-button ignition switch does not illuminate even when the instrument panel illumination is turned on, have the vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
• If the vehicle was left in the hot sun for a long time, the surface of the push-button ignition switch may get hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.

NOTE

• When operating the push-button ignition switch, firmly press it all the way.
• If the push-button ignition switch is pressed quickly, the power may not turn on or off.
• If the indicator light on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green when the push-button ignition switch is pressed, steering is locked. When this occurs, press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

▼ Battery drainage prevention function

When the push-button ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position for approximately 1 hour, the push-button ignition switch will be automatically switched to "OFF" to prevent the battery from going dead.

■ When access key fob does not operate properly

Refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P464.

3-3. Hazard warning flasher

ft 204313

The hazard warning flasher is used to w other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning flasher works regardless of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning flasher switch the instrument panel. All the turn signal lights and the turn signal indicator lights will flash. To turn off the flasher, push to switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and gauges

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the combination meter use liquid-crystal displays. You will find their indications hard to see if you wear polarized glasses.

■ Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.

Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The engine will resume running normally after the engine speed is reduced below the red zone.

on,

Odometer

1 2 900 mi 307158

1 TRIP RESET switch 2 Combination meter

This meter displays the odometer when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up.

The indicators will turn off when:

• The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10 seconds.

- The driver's door is opened and then closed.

■ Double trip meter

1 2 A 34.5 307159

1 TRIP RESET switch 2 Combination meter

This meter displays the two trip meters when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The trip meter shows the distance that vehicle has been driven since you last it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown the following sequence by pressing the TRIP RESET switch.

To reset the trip meter, select either the A trip or B trip meter, then press and hold the TRIP RESET switch.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to change the function of the indicator during driving, as an accident could result.

NOTE

• If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
• If you press the TRIP RESET switch when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is possible to switch between the trip meter and B trip meter indications while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. In addition, it is possible to reset the trip meter by pressing and holding the TRIP RESET switch.
  The indicators will turn off when:
• The TRIP RESET switch is not operated for approximately 10

- CONTINUED -

seconds.

- The driver's door is opened and then closed.

■ Fuel gauge

F E 306055

The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge shows "E" even if the fuel tank contains fuel.

The gauge may move slightly due to fuel level movement in the tank (e.g., during braking, turning or acceleration).

NOTE

filler lid is located on the right side of the vehicle.

- If you press the TRIP RESET switch while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. The gauge will turn off when the TRIP RESET switch is not operate for approximately 10 seconds.

■ Engine coolant temperature gauge

" / 1 306056

1 Normal operating range

The engine coolant temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

The engine coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temperature and driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the engine coolant temperature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high revving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be avoided.

CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Refer to "Engine overheating" P459.

■ ECO gauge

- MPG + 305591

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the current rate of fuel consumption and the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

If the ECO gauge moves towards the right side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE

• The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication of fuel efficiency.
• After resetting the trip meter, the average rate of fuel consumption not shown until you have driven mile (or 1 km). Before that time, ECO gauge does not operate.

■ Combination meter settings

Meter settings can be set on the center information display. For details, perform the procedures described in "General settings" P210.

is for 1 the

3-5. Illumination brightness control

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's side panel and a directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

Instruments and controls

The illumination brightness of the combination meter and center information display dims under the following conditions.

• The light switch is in the ☐☐ or ☐D " position when the ambient light is dark.
• The light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightness for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward. To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

• When the control dial is turned fully upward, the illumination brightness becomes the maximum and the automatic dimming function does not work at all.
• The brightness setting is not canceled even when the ignition swit is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" portion.

■ Auto dimmer cancel function

When the ambient light is bright, the illumination brightness is set to the maximum regardless of the position of the control dial. In this case, you cannot adj the illumination brightness by using the control dial. When the ambient light is d you can dim the illumination brightness a described above.

The operational/non-operational setting and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel function can be changed by your SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

3-6. Warning and indicator lights

■ Initial illumination for system check

Several of the warning and indicator lights illuminate momentarily and then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned the "ON" position. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. For the system check, the following lights illuminate and turn off after several seconds or after the engine has started.

Seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the driver fastens the seatbelt.)

PASSENGER: Front passenger's seatbelt warning light (The seatbelt warning light turns off only when the front seat passenger fastens the seat belt.)

2nd Rear seatbelt warning light SRS airbag system warning light Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator light

OFF: Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator light
CHECK ENGINE / CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light
Charge warning light
Oil pressure warning light
(1): Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)
ABS/ (ABS): ABS warning light
BRAKE/ (!): Brake system warning light
Low fuel warning light
Power steering warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
PARK / P: Electronic parking brake indicator light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.

■ Seatbelt warning light and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the driver's and passenger's seats, as required by current safety standards.

▼ Driver's and front passenger's seats With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, this device reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by illuminating the warning lights in the locations indicated in the following illustration and sounding a chime.

Simple line drawing of a car with two circular components and a person silhouette inside a box (no text or symbols)

Driver's seat

PASSENGER 307160

Front passenger's seat

▽ Operation

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the driver's and/or front passenger's warning light will illuminate, then it will blink for several seconds. If the seatbelt of the driver's seat is not fasten the warning chime may make a peep sound.

NOTE

- If the driver's and/or front passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is not fastened while driving, the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

- The warning light will illuminate when driving approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) or less.

• The warning light will blink, and the warning chime will make a peep sound when driving between approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h). The warning chime will stop when the vehicle stops.
• The warning light will blink, and the warning chime will sound loudly when 15 seconds have elapsed while driving between approximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph (20 km/h).
• The warning light will blink, and the warning chime will sound loudly when driving approximately more than 13 mph (20 ^1/2 km/h).

- The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened.

If there is no passenger on the front passenger's seat, the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat will be deactivated. The front passenger's seatbelt warning system monitors whether or not there is a passenger on the front passenger's seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

- CONTINUED -

Failure to do so may prevent the device from functioning correctly or cause the device to fail.

• Do not install any accessory such as a table or TV onto the seat-back.
• Do not store a heavy load in the seatback pocket.

- Do not allow the rear seat occupant to place his/her hands or legs on the front passenger's seatback, or allow him/her to put the seatback.

- Do not use front seats with their backward-forward position and seatback not being locked into place securely. If any of them are not locked securely, adjust them again. For adjusting procedure, refer to "Manual seat" P33.

If the seatbelt warning system for the front passenger's seat does not function correctly (e.g., it is activated even when the front passenger's seat is empty or it is deactivated even when the front passenger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take the following actions.

- Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than a child restraint system and its child occupant, although we

strongly recommend that all children in the rear seat properly restrained.

• Ensure that there is no article left in seatback pocket.
• Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passenger's seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning system for first passenger's seat does not function correctly after taking relevant corrective actions described above, immediately contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

are

sit▼ Rear passenger's seats

the front 2nd 1 2* 3 3rd 6 5 4 307161

1 Second-row left seat
2 Second-row center seat*
3 Second-row right seat
4 Third-row right seat
5 Third-row center seat
6 Third-row left seat
*: Second-row bench seat models

The layout of those warning lights is shown in the illustration. When the seatbelts are not fastened, the warning lights for the seats will illuminate or blink.

WARNING

- The driver must check that the all passengers have fastened their seatbelts properly since the seat-belt warning system may not

detect passengers under the following circumstances.

• When cushions or child restraint systems, etc., are used
• When a child or small adult sitting in the seat

- Observe the following precautions

• Do not apply any strong impact to the rear seat.
• Do not fold the seatback forward when objects are on the seat.
• Do not spill liquid on the reseat. If liquid is spilled, wipe off immediately.
• Do not remove or disassemble the rear seat.

NOTE

- The seatbelt warning system of the rear seats detects if any of the s are occupied by a passenger. Heat cargo or large pets on the rear s may result in the activation of the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime. Fastening the rear seat belt prior to loading cargo or large pets will avoid activating the passenger seatbelt warning light and

chime.

- When folding second- or third-row seats, ensure that the seats are empty prior to folding. Items caught between the seat bottom and seat-back, when folded, may damage the seat surface or activate the passenger seatbelt warning light and chime.

Operation

If passengers in the rear seats do not fasten their seatbelts while the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning lights will illuminate or blink to indicate that their seatbelts are not fastened.

NOTE

- If the rear passenger's seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened while driving, the seatbelt warning system operates as follows according to the vehicle speed.

seats- The warning light will illuminate avy when driving approximately 4 seats mph (6 km/h) or less.

- When driving approximately between 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 (20 km/h), if the seatbelts are fastened for 50 seconds, the seatbelt warning lights will blin

and a warning chime will sound. The chime will make a peep sound for 15 seconds, and it then will become louder and continue for 35 seconds. The warning light will blink for 50 seconds, then it will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop.

- When driving more than approximately 13 mph (20 km/h), if seatbelts are not fastened for 35 seconds, the warning lights of the unfastening seatbelts will blink and a chime will sound loudly. If the rear seatbelts are not fastened after 35 seconds, the blinking warning light will illuminate steadily and the chime will stop. The warning lights will continue to illuminate until their seatbelts are fastened.

- The warning light will turn off and the warning chime will stop when the seatbelt is fastened.

SRS airbag system warning light

mph

net

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, immedi-

- CONTINUED -

ately stop the vehicle in a safe plan and consult a SUBARU dealer. Unless a technician checks and repairs the system as needed, the seatbelt pretensioners and/or the SRS airbag will not operate properly in the even of a collision, which may result in injury.

• Flashing or flickering of the warning light
• No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first turned to the "ON" position
  • Continuous illumination of the warning light
• Illumination of the warning light while driving

For details about the components monitored by the warning light, refer to "SRS airbag system monitors" P110.

a■,Front passenger's frontal air bag ON and OFF indicator lights

nt PASSSENGER AIR BAG OFF ON 307162

Front passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator lights

Front passenger's frontal airbag OFF indicator lights

The front passenger's frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag. The indicators are located as shown in illustration.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during which time the system is checked. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag determined by the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system monitoring. If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is activated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger's SRS frontal airbag is deactivated, the passenger's frontal airbag ON indicator will remain off while the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the "ON" position, if both the ON and OFF indicators remain illuminated or off simultaneously even after the system check period, the system is malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection.

■ CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- of function indicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illuminates while you are driving, have your vehicle checked/ repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the emission

control system checked and repaired as necessary could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your vehicle's warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate that there is at least one problem or potential problem somewhere in the emission control system.

▼ If the light illuminates steadily If the light illuminates steadily while drivi or does not turn off after the engine sta an emission control system malfunction has been detected. You should have your vehicle checked b an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi- ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the filler cap is not tightened until it cl If you have recently refueled your vehicle the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminating could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If the light does not turn off, take your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

▼ If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has been detected which may damage the emission control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you should do the following.

ng Reduce vehicle speed.

rts, Avoid hard acceleration.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
• Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and illuminate steadily after several driving trips. You should have you

eyehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.

Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not working properly.

elf the light illuminates while driving or do not turn off after the engine starts, stop the -engine at the first safe opportunity and check the drive belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains illuminated, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

■ Oil pressure warning light

Instruments

s and

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the engine soil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does not turn off after the engine starts, stops the engine at the first safe opportunity and contacts your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light illuminated. This may cause serious engine damage.

■ Engine low oil level warning light

This light illuminates when the engine oil level decreases to the lower limit.

If the warning light illuminates, check the engine oil level on a level surface. When the engine oil level is not within the non-range, refill with engine oil. Refer to "Engine oil" P486. After adding or charging the engine oil, warm up the engine and stop it on a level surface, then star engine after a lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirm that the warning light has turned off after the engine has started. If the warning light does not turn off after refill the engine oil, or the light illuminates ev though the engine oil level is within the normal range, have the vehicle checked a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

• The oil level will be detected by system just after turning the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. If the oil level is below the lower limit, the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position, the engine low oil level warning light will turn on.
• When the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, the engine low oil warning light may not illuminate even if the oil level is below the lower limit to avoid erroneous lighting.

■ Windshield washer fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level the windshield washer fluid tank decreases to the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt, 0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt).

e. ■ AT OIL TEMP warning AT OIL light TEMP

ing in this light illuminates when the engine is en running, it may indicate that the transmis- sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

the▼ Transmission control system warn- whening

The "AT OIL TEMP" warning light flash after the engine has started, it may indicate that the transmission control system is working properly. Contact your nearest

vUGUBARU dealer for service immediately.

■ Rear differential oil temperature warning in light (if equipped)

R.DIFF TEMP

CAUTION

If the R.DIFF TEMP warning light illuminates, reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Continuing to drive with this light illuminated may damage the rear differential and other parts of the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine is running, it may indicate that the rear differential oil temperature is too hot. If the light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. Park the vehicle for several minutes. After the light turns off, you can start driving.

If the light does not turn off, contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE

- If the tire pressures are not correct and/or the tires are not all the same size and brand, the rear differential will be heavily loaded when the vehicle is driven, resulting in an abnormally high oil temperature.

- The rear differential oil will deteriorate if its temperature increases enough for the rear differential oil temperature warning light to illuminate. It is advisable to have the differential oil replaced as soon a possible.

■ Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate for approximately seconds to check that the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning properly. If there is no problem and all are properly inflated, the light will turn each tire, including the spare (if provide should be checked monthly when cold is inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of different size than the size indicated on vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminate - a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire -pressure telltale illuminates, you should rest and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation a reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level of trigger illumination of the TPMS low pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with and TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheel allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, have the system inspected by your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned on or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, you should have your Tire Pressure Monitoring System checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur. If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare time as soon as possible. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the Low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. After any change to tire pressure(s), the tire pressure monitoring system will not re-check tire inflation pressures until the vehicle is first driven more than 20 mph (3 km/h). After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start TPMS re-checking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later. Therefore, be sure to install the specified size for the front and rear tires.

ABS warning light ABS/

CAUTION

- If any of the following conditions occur, we recommend that you have the ABS repaired at the fi available opportunity by your SUBARU dealer. - The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition

(32

switch is turned to the "ON" position.
- The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, but it does not turn off even after the vehicle is started.
- The warning light illuminates during driving.

When the warning light is on (and the brake system warning light is off), the ABS function shuts down. However, the conventional brake system continues to operate normally.

The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light, and brake system warning light illuminate simultaneously if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning" P181.

NOTE

first the warning light behavior is as described in the following conditions, the ABS may be considered normal.

- The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and turns off approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the engine has started.

• The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but to off immediately, remaining off.
• The warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, but it turns off while dri
• The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediatel and remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery voltage, such as when the engine is jum started, the ABS warning light may illuminate. This is due to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the battery becomes fully charged, the light will turn off.

■ Brake system warn BRAKE / (!) ing light

This light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch in the "ON" position. It turns off when parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

- Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.

ns If at all in doubt about whether brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has the following functions.

▼ Brake fluid level warning BRAKE / (!) -This light illuminates when the brake fluid level has dropped to near the "MIN" level the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the "ON" position and with the parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should illuminate while driving (with the parking brake fully released and with the ignition switch positioned in "ON"), it could be a indication of leaking of brake fluid or wo brake pads. If this occurs, immediately stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and check the brake fluid level. the fluid level is below the "MIN" mark in the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

▼ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning

If the warning light remains on even though this parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a SUBARU dealer.

▼ Electronic brake booster warning The brake system warning light illuminates when the electronic brake booster is malfunctioning. If the warning light illuminates, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Electronic parking PARK / (P) brake indicator light

▼ Parking brake indicator

The light illuminates with the parking brake applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.

Electronic parking brake system warning

WARNING

- When you release the electronic parking brake while the engine is

- CONTINUED -

running, the electronic parking brake indicator light will turn off. However, if the light still illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.
- If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
- If the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle in a safe location, use tire stops under the tire to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer. For details, refer to "Electronic parking brake" P374.

NOTE

- When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the electronic parking brake applied, the electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.

- When the electronic parking brake switch is pulled to apply the electronic parking brake while the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" portion, the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates, remains illuminated for approximately 30 seconds and then turns off.

• Even if the electronic parking brake indicator light flashes, if the warm light behavior is as described in following examples, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning.

- The indicator light turns off with the electronic parking brake is released.

The electronic parking brake indicates for light may flash immediately at the engine is started. However, it not malfunctioning if the indicator light turns off after the electronic parking brake is released.

- The electronic parking brake indicator light may flash after the electric parking brake is frequently applied and released. However, the electronic parking brake system is not malfunctioning if the light turn off for a short period of time.

The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes when the electronic parking brake system is malfunctioning. If the indicator sight flashes, promptly park in a safe location as soon as possible and contact your SUBARU dealer.

The electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated when the parking brake cannot be released even if the Parking brake switch is pushed. For details, refer to "Electronic parking brake" P374.

∇ Parking brake apply inhibit warning

The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is tolerated when the parking brake cannot be applied.

∇ Frequent operation warning

The electronic parking brake indicator light flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound will be heard if the parking brake switch is operated too frequently. In this case, the operation of the parking brake switch is restricted to protect the electronic parking brake system.

NOTE

Wait until the indicator light turns off.

■ Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light does not illuminate even when "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" is touched to activate the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning.

This indicator light illuminates when the Auto Vehicle Hold is activated. This indicator blinks while the vehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. For details, refer to "Auto Vehicle Hold function" or P376.

■ Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates with the tank is nearly empty, at approximate 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). It operates when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank wh ever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could ca damage to the engine.

■ Door open warning lights

The warning light illuminates if any door the rear gate is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors indicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.

■ Engine hood open warning light

The warning light illuminates if the engine hood is not fully closed. This function is effective even if the ignition switch is in "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position, or the key is removed from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

Always make sure this light is not illuminated before you start to drive.

All-Wheel Drive warn-AWD ing light

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with tires of differing diameters fitted on the wheels or with an excessively low air pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes, promptly park in a safe location then check whether all four tires are the same diameter and whether any of the tires has a puncture or has lost air pressure for some other reason. Continuing to drive with the AWD warning light flashing can lead to powertrain damage.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the IAND warning light may flash. Use of t temporary spare tire should therefore be restricted to the minimum time necessary. Replace the temporary spare tire with a conventional tire as soon as possible.

■ Power steering warning light

While the engine is running, this warning light illuminates when a malfunction has been detected in the electric power steering system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

- The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequent turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.

- The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering wheel is not operated for a while and the power steering control system has an opportunity to cool down. However if the power steering is operated in a non-standard way which causes power to assist limitation to occur too frequently that may result in a malfunction of the power steering control system.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

n▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

CAUTION

the y ntly The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- tem provides its ABS control through the electrical circuit of the ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system becomes unable to provide ABS control. As a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system also becomes inoperative, causing the warning light to illuminate. Although both the Vehicle Dynamics Control system and ABS are inoperative in this case, the ordinary functions of the brake system are still available. You will be safe while driving with this condition, but drive carefully and have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

NOTE

• If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system itself malfunctions, the warning light only illuminates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) remains fully operational.
• The warning light illuminates when the electronic control system of the ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system malfunctions.
• The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light, ABS warning light, and brake system warning light illuminate simultaneously if the EBD system malfunctions. For further details

of the EBD system malfunction warning, refer to "Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system warning" P181.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably inoperative under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.

• The warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" position.
• The warning light illuminates while the vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as described in the following examples, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal.

• The warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine has started.
• The warning light illuminates right after the engine is started but turn off immediately, remaining off.

• The warning light illuminates after the engine has started and turns while the vehicle is subsequently being driven.

• The warning light illuminates during driving, but it turns off immediately and remains off.

• The warning light illuminates when the engine has stalled and continue to illuminate after the engine has been restarted. However, it will turn off once the vehicle starts moving.

▼ Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activation of the skid suppression function and during activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

• The light may remain illuminated for a short period of time after the engine has been started, especially in cold weather. This does not indicate the existence of a problem. The light should turn off as soon as the engine has warmed up.
  The indicator light illuminates when the engine has developed a problem and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under the following condition. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn off even after the lpy lapse of several minutes (the engine has warmed up) after the engine has started.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light

"The light illuminates when "Vehicle Dynamics Control" is selected to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is probably malfunctioning under any of the following conditions. Have your vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer immediately.
- The light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.
- The light does not turn off even once several seconds have elapsed after the ignition switch has been turned to the "ON" position.

■ Warning chimes and warning indicator of the keyless access with push-button start system (if equipped)

graph TD
    A["Central Device"] --> B["Key"]
    B --> C["Left Circular Component"]
    B --> D["Right Circular Component"]
    B --> E["Left Circular Component"]
    B --> F["Right Circular Component"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start system sounds a warning chime and flashes the access key warning indicator on the combination meter in order to minimize improper operations and help protect your vehicle from theft. When the warning chime sounds and/or the warning indicator flashes, take the appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green when starting the engine. This indicates the status that the steering wheel is not released and could result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• When starting the engine again after the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green, if the operation indicator is still flashing in green there could be a steering lock malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
• When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in orange, contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

- Even when the access key fob is within the operating ranges inside the vehicle, the access key warning

for engine start may be provided depending on the status of the access key fob and the environmental conditions.

- When the access key fob is taken out of the vehicle through an open window, the access key fob takeout warning or passenger access key fob takeout warning will not be provided.

▼ List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings occurs even if the access key warning indicator does not appear, take the appropriate action.

Inside warning chime	Outside warning chime	Operation indicator on push-button ignition switch	Status Action
Ding, ding ... (intermittent)	—	—	The driver's door was opened while the push-button ignition switch is "ACC" (when the select lever is in the "P" position).	Switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF", or close the driver's door.When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".
			The push-button ignition switch was switched to "OFF" while the driver's door is open.	Close the driver's door.
Ding	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Lockout warning:An attempt was made to lock all doors using the power door locking switch of access key fob while the access key left inside the vehicle. For details, refer "Key lock-in prevention function" → P140.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors.The doors cannot be locked while the access key fob is inside the vehicle.Atchirp sound will be heard, and all d will be unlocked.
—	Short beep (2 seconds)	—	Access key fob lock-in warning:The door lock sensor was touched while the push-button ignition switch is "OFF" and the access key fob is inside the vehicle.	Take out the access key fob from the vehicle, and lock the doors.If the access key fob is inside the vehicle the doors cannot be locked.
—	Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)	—	Door ajar warning:The door lock sensor is touched while ignition switch is in the "OFF" position one of the doors including the rear gate opened.	Close the doors securely and lock their lane of the doors including the rear gate opened, the doors cannot be locked
Ding	Long beep (60 seconds max.)	—	Power warning:The door lock sensor was touched while carrying the access key fob, the push-button ignition switch is in a position of than "OFF" (when the select lever is in "P" position).	Return the access key fob inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to "OFF".If the push-button ignition switch is not switched to "OFF", the doors cannot be locked.
Ding, ding ... (7 seconds)	—	—	Access key warning:The vehicle was driven while the access key fob is not inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and drive the vehicle.

Instruments and controls

Inside warning chime	Outside warning chime	Operation indicator on push-button ignition switch	Status Action
Ding — —			Access key warning for engine start:The push-button ignition switch was pressed while the access key fob is inside the vehicle.	Carry the access key fob, and press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Access key takeout warning:The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF” (when the select lever is in the “P” position).	Switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding	Beep, beep, beep (3 times)	—	Passenger access key takeout warning:A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed a door other than the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF”.	Return the access key fob to inside the vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
Long beep (continuous)	Long beep (continuous)	—	Access key takeout without “P” position warning:The driver exited the vehicle with the access key fob and closed the driver's door while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF” and select lever is in a position other than “P” position.	Shift the select lever to the “P” position, switch the push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.the
Long beep (continuous)	—	—	Select lever position warning:Case 1: The engine is turned off by pressing the push-button ignition switch while the select lever is in a position other than the “P” position.Case 2: The driver’s door is opened while the push-button ignition switch is in a position other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a position other than the “P” position.	Case 1: Start the engine, shift the select lever to the “P” position, sw the push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.Case 2: Shift the select lever to the position, switch the push-button ign tion switch to “OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Ding — —	The battery of the	access key fob is low.	Replace the battery of the access key fob.
Ding —		Flashes in green (15 seconds max.)	Steering lock warning:The engine start procedure was performed, but the steering is still locked.	While turning the steering wheel right a left lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the push-button ignition switch.
Ding —		Flashes in orange (15 seconds max.)	System malfunction warning:A malfunction was detected in the power system or steering lock.	Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and have the vehicle inspected.

■ Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of alarm system. It also indicates operation the immobilizer system.

▼ Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operation status of the alarm system. For detailed information, refer to "Alarm system" P142.

▼ Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking in the following conditions.

For models with "keyless access wi push-button start system":

• Immediately after the push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.

• Immediately after the driver's door is opened or closed when all of the following conditions are met.

• The push-button ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

• The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is used (for example, the key is unregistered or the ID code does not match), the power is not switched to "ON" and the security indicator light continues blinking.

For models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

^1e Immediately after the key is pulled out.

- Approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

If the indicator light does not blink in the above conditions, it may indicate that immobilizer system may be malfunctioning. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for example, an unauthorized duplicate) is used to start the engine, the security indicator light illuminates. For details about the immobilizer system, refer to "Immobilizer" P132.

NOTE

- The security indicator light remains off in the following conditions. It means that the matching of the ID code is completed and the immobilizer system is deactivated, and it does not indicate a malfunction.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

• While the engine is running.
• The push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position and the driver's door has not been opened or closed.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

• While the engine is running.
• When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
• For approximately 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the "ON" position to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

- Even if a malfunction occurs, such as the security indicator light flashes irregularly, it will not affect the functionality of the immobilizer system.

■ Select lever/gear position in dicator

1 2 3 306075

1 Upshift indicator
2 Downshift indicator
3 Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the select lever.

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator (which shows the current gear selection) and the upshift/downshift indicator light up. Refer to "Continuously variable transmission" P357.

■ Turn signal indicator ← → lights

These lights show the operation of the signal or lane change signal. If the indicator lights do not blink or blir rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be but out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to "Replacing bulbs" P511.

■ High beam indicator light

This light shows that the headlights are the high beam mode. This indicator light also illuminates when the headlight flasher is operated.

■ High beam assist ind cator light

This light illuminates when the high beam assist function is activated. For details about the high beam assist function, refer to "High beam assist function" or P234.

■ Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light

This light illuminates when the automatic headlight beam leveler does not operate formally. If this light illuminates during driving, have your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU dealer.

■ LED headlight warning! n light

This light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

■ Steering Responsive SRH Headlight OFF indicator OFF light

This light illuminates when the Steering Responsive Headlight is turned off. Refer to "Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)" P238.

■ Steering Responsive SRH Headlight warning light

The light illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the Steering Responsive Headlight. Refer to "Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)" P238.

■ Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the front fog lights are illuminated.

■ Headlight indicator light

This indicator light illuminates under the following conditions.

• The light switch is turned to the "or "D" position.
• The light control switch is in the "AUT position and the headlights illuminate automatically.

■ X-MODE indicator

1 306189

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1 X-MODE indicator

1 2 306190

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes) 1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator 2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

This indicator appears while X-MODE is activated. It will disappear when X-MODE is deactivated. Refer to "To activate/deactivate X-MODE" P370.

■ Hill descent control indicator

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in standby. It will flash while the hill descent control function is operating. It will disappear when the hill descent control function is not available. Refer to "Hill descent control function" P372.

■ BSD/RCTA warning in-☐,☐,☐ indicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be shown on the combination meter display. When this indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

■ BSD/RCTA OFF indica-☐OFF tor (if equipped)

This indicator appears on the combination meter display (color LCD) when "BSD/RCTA" is touched to deactivate the BSD/RCTA or when the BSD/RCTA is sus-

pended temporarily. In this case the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the combination meter display. For details, refer to "BSD/RCTA" P382.

■ RAB warning indicator (if equipped) RAB

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system" P391.

■ RAB OFF indicator (if RAB OFF equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is turned off, or when the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is suspended temporarily. Refer to "Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system" P391.

■ Icy road surface warning indicator

When the outside temperature is 37^ F ( 3^ C) or less, the icy road surface warning will illuminate to inform the driver that the road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature in the area around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.

• While parking or driving at low speeds
• When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel

• When starting the engine after being parked for a certain per of time

• The icy road surface warning screen should be treated only as a guide. sure to check the condition of the tic road surface before driving.

• Once the icy road surface warning screen appears, it will not disappear unless the outside temperature has increased to 41^ (5°C) or higher.

■ Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is activated. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)" P410.

■ Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates if the Driver Monitoring System malfunctions. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)" P410.

■ Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when "Driver Monitoring System" is touched to deactivate Driver Monitoring System. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light" P410.

■ Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light" P410.

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances.

- The temperature of the Driver Monitoring System unit is high.

■ One-touch Interior Illumination indicator (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when the One-touch Interior Illumination function is activated. Refer to "One-touch Interior Illumination function" P304.

3-7. Combination meter display (color LCD)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to safe driving when operating the combination meter display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the combination meter display interferes with your ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle before performing operations on the screen. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so may cause you to look away from the road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the combination meter display. Also, a warning message will appear on the display if malfunction is detected. In addition, several settings for the displayed content can be performed.

1

A MPG 1 2 3 4 5 B MPG D 842.0 7452.m 6 7 8 6 7 8 D 842.0 7452.m a 307163

Combination meter display

1 Meter information screen (Refer to "Meter information screen" P196.)
2 Warning screen (Refer to "Warning screen" P196.)/Basic screen (Refer to "Basic screens" P198.)
3 EyeSight screen

4 Digital speed screen (Refer to "Basic screens" P198.)
5 Telltale screen (Refer to "Telltale screen" P197.)
6 Select lever/gear position indicator (Refer to "Select lever/gear position indicator" P191.)
7 X-MODE indicator (Refer to "X-MODE indicator" P192.)
8 Odometer (Refer to "Odometer" P169.)/Double trip meter (Refer to "Double trip meter" P169.)
A: Activating the EyeSight system
B: Deactivating the EyeSight system

Basic operation

1 2 3 307089

Control switches

By operating or of the control switches, the screens can be changed.

If there are some useful messages, such as vehicle information, warning information, etc., they will interrupt the current screen, and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. If such a screen is displayed, take proper action according to the message shown on the screen.

The warning screen will return to the original screen after a few seconds. While the i information reminder is shown on the display, it may be possible to display the warning screen again. To recall the message marked with i on the display, press the i switch on the steering wheel.

■ Welcome screen (opening animation) and Good-bye screen (ending animation)

When the driver's door is opened and closed after unlocking the door, the welcome screen (opening animation) will appear on the combination meter display for approximately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the combination meter display gradually turns off by showing Good-bye screen (ending animation).

NOTE

• The welcome screen and the goodbye screen may differ in the actual words and appearance.
• The basic screen will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position while the welcome screen is displayed.
• Once the welcome screen appears, it takes a certain period of time to display it again.
• If the ignition switch is operated, and after unlocking the driver's door, the welcome screen will not appear even when the driver's door is opened and closed.
• The welcome screen will disappear when you lock the driver's door by using the remote keyless entry system (all models) or the keyless access function (if equipped) while the welcome screen is displayed.
• The welcome screen including the audio/navigation unit can be set to on or off.
• The welcome screen and the goodbye screen can be set to on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" P210.

■ Warning screen

SRS Airbag System

305010

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a maintenance notification, it will appear or this screen. Take the appropriate actions based on the messages indicated.

■ Meter information screen

The meter information screen can be changed. For details, refer to "General settings" P210.

▼ ECO gauge

306114

The ECO gauge shows the difference between the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset and the current rate of fuel consistency.

The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel efficiency as shown in the following chart

Displayed unit	Needle position
	“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
I/100km Poorer		Better

NOTE

• The ECO gauge shows only an approximate indication.
• After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not shown until driving 0.6 miles (1 km). Until that time, the ECO gauge does not operate.

▼ Clock and outside temperature

75°F 7:14PM

306115

This screen displays the clock and outside temperature.

NOTE

• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P228.
• You can set the temperature units to be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

▼ Compass (if equipped)

N 306116

The direction of the vehicle is displayed.

▼ Driving range on remaining fuel

mi 306117

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining is only a guide. The indicated value differ from the actual driving range the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low warning light illuminates.

■ Telltale screen

MPG - 1 D 图 842.0 7452 mi 305608

1 Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs, the following telltales will be displayed on the telltale screen.

NOTE

- When there is warning information to display, it will be displayed in warning indicators, starting on the

left in ascending order of severity. If there are 6 or more warning messages to display, the indicators will be displayed in sequential order.

Mark Name Page
fuel
	Door open warning light	183
	Engine hood open warning light	183
	AT OIL TEMP warning light	178
	All-Wheel Drive warning light	183
	LED headlight warning light	191
	High beam assist indicator light	191
	Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator light	191
	Steering Responsive Headlight warning light	192
	Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)	178
	Engine low oil level warning light	177
	RAB warning indicator (if equipped)	193
	RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)	193
[0522]	BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)	192
[X22X]	BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped)	192
	Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light	191
	Windshield washer fluid warning light	178
[W44T]	Hill descent control indicator	192
[2DH6]	Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green) (if equipped)	193
	Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow) (if equipped)	193
	Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light (if equipped)	193

Mark Name Page
	Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light (if equipped)	193
	Icy road surface warning indicator	193
	One-touch Interior Illumination indicator (if equipped)	194

■ Basic screens

By operating the or switch on the steering wheel, you can change the screen that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

AVG A 12.7 MPG ← 100mi

305011

Average fuel consumption Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of fuel consumption since the trip meter was last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining fuel is only a guide. The indicated value may differ from the actual driving range on the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low fuel warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

25.3MPG

100mi

305013

Current fuel consumption Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel consumption at the present moment.

NOTE

The driving range on the remaining is only a guide. The indicated value differ from the actual driving range the remaining fuel, so you must immediately fill the tank when the low warning light illuminates.

Driving information screen:

9h37' 200mi 306238

Journey time

Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the time that has elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position) and journey distance (the distance that has been driven since the ignition switch was turned to the "ON" position).

Digital speed screen:

fuel ma on LIMIT 25 1 fuel 2 10 MPH 306169

1 Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

2 Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle speed.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

35 33 [psi] 35 33 306204

This screen displays each tire pressure. When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire and the tire pressure will be displayed on the screen in yellow.

NOTE

• The tire pressure values are displayed several minutes after driving.
• Once the tire pressure monitoring system detects the low tire pressure, the tire pressure values will display in yellow until the system detects the normal tire pressure.
• Immediately adjust the tire pressure when the warning light illuminates. When the tire pressure monitoring system detects the adjusted tire pressure, the warning light will turn

off and the tire pressure values turn to white.

- You can set the tire pressure units. For details about setting the units, refer to "General settings" P210.

For information about the specified value of the air pressure, refer to "Tires" P526.

Compass screen (if equipped):

- N - 306118

The direction of the vehicle is displayed

wNavigation screen (if equipped):

9th Ave 600 ft ← 306168

When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information. For details about the navigation system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Audio screen:

FM 98.7 306119

The audio screen shows the status of audio information. For details about the audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Clock and outside temperature screen:

1:19

OUT TEMP 74°F

306120

This screen displays the clock and outside, temperature.

NOTE

• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P228

- You can set the temperature units be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer "General settings" P210.

3-8. Center information display (CID)

WARNING

Always pay attention to safe driving when operating the center information display while the vehicle is in motion. When operation of the center information display is disturbing your awareness and ability to concentrate on driving, stop the vehicle in a safe place before performing operations on the display. Also, do not concentrate on the display while driving. Doing so could result in an accident.

Features

All information is displayed on the center information display, including vehicle settings, vehicle status, navigation system (i equipped) operation, audio operation, and climate control operation.

Interruption screen 202
Vehicle status and maintenance information	204
Vehicle settings 210
Climate control operations	210
Surround View Monitor (if equipped)/Rear view camera	320/Refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
Navigation system	Refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
Audio/telephone	Refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.
EyeSight	Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The center information display can also be used to set and initialize the center information display itself.

NOTE

• When the vehicle is in motion, certain functions and selections may not be available.
• The language and units for both the center information display and the combination meter display (color LCD) can be changed. For details

- CONTINUED -

about language settings, refer to "General settings" P210. For details about unit settings, refer to settings" P215.

- The images displayed in this Owner's Manual are sample images. Actual image may vary depending on the region and vehicle specifications.

■ Welcome screen

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen are motion graphic displayed on the combination meter display and center information display upon entering and exiting the vehicle.

When the driver's door is opened and closed, the welcome screen will appear a short time.

NOTE

• The welcome screen will disappear when the ignition switch is turned the "ON" position while the welcome screen is shown.

• The welcome screen can be turned on or off. For details, refer to "General settings" P210.

• For a certain period of time after welcome screen has once appear
  "Cait may not appear again even with the driver's door is opened and closed. This does not indicate a malfunction.

on

■ Good-bye screen

The good-bye screen will be displayed under the following conditions.

• The driver's door is opened after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.

• 3 minutes have passed after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position with the driver's door closed.

• 10 minutes have passed when the hands-free phone is used after the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" position.

• The battery voltage is low when the ignition switch is put in the "OFF" to position.

■ Interruption screen

Useful messages, such as reminders, weather information (if equipped) and traffic information (if equipped) may interrupt the current screen and appear on the display accompanied by a beep. Take the proper action according to the message.

t■ Touch screen operations

The center information display has a touch screen. Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly.

▼ Touch

Diagram showing hand positioning inside a vehicle's door panel with an inset highlighting the left side of the door panel.

Quickly touch and release once.

Drag

Diagram showing hand gesture application on car door panel with directional arrows and a highlighted section view

Touch the screen and move the screen the desired position.

▼ Swipe

Diagram showing hand positioning on a vehicle's side panel with an inset highlighting the left-hand rule for turning or disassembly.

Quickly move the screen by swiping with your finger.

NOTE

Swipe operations may not be performed smoothly in high altitudes.

to

■ Display

▼ Touch screen

72 F 2:01 No Audio Playing Play Radio Hindi Phone Apps C:\Users\ALLS\B MySuanyi Settings Car Info 1 8 5 6 7 OROFF > REAR OROFF 307269

1 HOME icon (Refer to "HOME icon" P210.)

2 Status bar (Refer to "Status bar" P204.)

3 Information bar (Refer to "Information

- CONTINUED -

bar” P204.)

4 Main screen (Refer to "Main screen" P210.)
5 Driver profiles icon (Refer to "Driver profiles icon" P210.)
6 Manage device icon (Refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.)
7 Climate control screen (Refer to "Climate control screen" P210.)
8 Car settings icon (Refer to "Car settings icon" P208.)

While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" "ON" position, the touch panel will activate

▽ Status bar

The outside temperature and clock are displayed on the status bar.

NOTE

- The outside temperature indicator shows the temperature around the sensor. However, the temperature may not be indicated correctly or the update may be delayed in the following conditions.

• While parking or driving at low speeds
• When the outside temperature changes suddenly (example: when going in and out of an underground parking area or when passing through a tunnel)

- When starting the engine after Audio screen: being parked for a certain period of time

• You can set the temperature units be displayed in Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F). For details, refer to "General settings" P210.
• The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For details, refer to "Clock" P228
  ●Touch the clock on the status bar e. display the clock setting screen. Refer to "Clock" OF P228.
• For details about Bluetooth device information, refer to the navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

∇ Information bar

Swipe the information bar or touch >or on the information bar to switch the item displayed.

to

to

306127

The screen of the currently selected audio source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

Navigation screen (models with navigation system):

W 37th St 306170

The directions to the destination are displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the navigation system, the compass orientation, street name and speed limit remain displayed on the screen.

Compass Weather 6H Calendar MON 306128

Favorite screen

This screen displays up to three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the following items.

Item Details

Water TempNorm	Engine coolant temperature
Oil Temp158°F	Engine oil temperature
AVG Speed0 MPH	Average vehicle speed
Accel49%	Accelerator opening ratio
Angle0°	Vehicle posture

Item Details
	Direction of the vehicle*
	Weather information for the next three hours*
	Weather information for the next six hours*
	Posted speed limit of the road you are currently driving on*
	Calendar
	Driver Monitoring System* information and the average fuel consumption of driver
	Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped *2: Models with

NOTE

Some items may not be shown depending on the model and specifications.

The items shown on the favorite screen can be changed. For details, refer to "Favorite Widgets" P221.

Weather information screen (if equipped):

Detroit,MI 52°F 306218

NOTE

• When all of the following conditions are satisfied, weather information is displayed.
• The vehicle is equipped with an audio and navigation system for SiriusXM satellite radio.
• The SiriusXM satellite radio subscription is active.

- The weather forecast for the set destination remains displayed until a new destination is set or until destination is reached.

- Depending on the reception timing of XM, the weather information may be delayed.

X-MODE screen:

MODE OFF ON 307270

Models with 1 mode

X MODE SNOW DIRT NORMAL DEEP SNOW MUD 307271

Models with 2 modes X-MODE information is displayed on the screen.

Also, X-MODE can be switched to a different mode on the screen.

▽ Main screen

For details about the following menu, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

• Radio
  • Media
• Phone
• Map
• Apps
• My Subaru
• SUBARU STARLINK
• Add Shortcut

Auto Vehicle Hold icon

Display Off Vaser Mode Cash Control Auto Switch 307272

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on

and off, touch the "Auto Vehicle Hold" When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light on combination meter turns off. The "Auto Vehicle Hold" indicator on center information display also turns off at the same Refer to "To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function" P377.

▽ Vehicle Dynamics Control icon

Display Off Valent Mouse Color Connect Auto Valent Mouse Valent Mouse Control Auto Main Start 307273

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control and off, touch the "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon.

When the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is turned off during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon will then turn off.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will die deactivated. When you touch the vehicle Dynamics Control" icon again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control-system, the Vehicle Dynamics ControlOFF indicator light turns off. The "Vehicle Dynamics Control" icon will then turn on. Refer to "To turn on/off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system" P368.

Cabin Connect

Display Off Vault Mode Close Connect Auto ON/OFF MODE ON/OFF MODE ON/OFF MODE ON/OFF MODE 307403

Touch the "Cabin Connect" icon to turn on and off. When the "Cabin Connect" function is on, the indicator illuminates, when the "Cabin Connect" function is off, the indicator does not illuminate. For details, refer to "Cabin Connect" P302.

▽ Display Off

Activation of the display off mode:

Display Mode Main Mode Close Connect Auto Interface Mode Auto Shortset

307275

1. Touch "Display Off".

Deactivation of the display off mode:

Diagram of a device interior with control buttons and a central screen (no text or symbols)

1. Touch the display or push the temperature control button.

307277

1. Press and hold the volume knob to turn the screen back on.

▽ Car settings icon

Touch to display the items that are changeable while driving.

Item		Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd	menu
Vehicle Control	Vehicle Dynamics Control	ON/OFF 368 220
	X-MODE	Models with 1 mode: ON/OFFModels with 2 modes: Normal, Deep Snow/Mud, Dirt	370 220
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)	ON/OFF 376 220
	Steering Responsive Headlights (SRH)	ON/OFF 238 220
	Cruise Control Acceleration	Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic *	2	—
Driving Assistance	Pre-Collision Braking	Setting ON/Setting OFF	*2	—
	Lane Departure	All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
	BSD/RCTA*1	ON/OFF 388 220
	Driver Monitoring System*1	ON/OFF 402 220
More Settings	Warning Volume Min	Mid/Max 387, 401 and *	2	—
	Units	km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	168 and 194	220

*1: If equipped
*2: For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

▽ Driver profiles icon

Touch driver profiles icon) to confirm the driver's information. For details, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

▽ HOME icon

Touch (HOME) to display the top menu

▽ Climate control screen

The climate control status is shown on screen.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 72 AUTO AIC SYNC 72 ON/OFF < REAR ON/OFF SYNC 13 12 11 307278

1 Driver's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)
2 Set temperature indicator (driver's side)
3 Airflow mode
4 Climate control mode
5 Air inlet selection
6 SYNC mode indicator

7 Set temperature indicator (passenger's side)

8 REAR SYNC mode indicator
9 REAR set temperature
10 Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)
11 Customizable icon
12 REAR Climate control ON/OFF icon
13 Fan speed control
14 Climate control ON/OFF icon

When operating the climate control system, the main screen switches to the climate control screen. For details, refer to "Climate control panel" P279.

▼ Main screen

File Watch Mode Phone Audio Smart MyLearn Settings Car Info 307279

To display the main screen, touch (HOME).

In this Owner's Manual, the following settings will be explained. For details

about other items, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

• "Settings" → "General"
• "Settings" → "Car"
• "Car Info"

▽ General settings

Set the time and display general items.

General Sound Navigation Clock Display Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Security Information Reminder Screen Violet Mode 307280

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. Select the preferred menu.

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu 2nd menu 3rd menu
General	Clock	Time Setting**2	AUTO/Manual	228	228
		Time Setting*	Sync With Phone/Manual
		Time Zone*	AUTO/Hawaii/Alaska/Pacific/Mountain/Central/Eastern/Atlantic/Newfoundland/Guam		220
		Daylight Saving Time*	AUTO/ON (+1 hour)/OFF 220
		Clock Format 12H/24H 220
	Display	Display Off Turn the screen	off. — 220
		Brightness Dial ON/OFF 171	220
		Brightness/Contrast	Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the display.	220	220
	Wi-Fi Settings	Wi-Fi	ON/OFF	*6	—
		Connected to:	Select the registered devise.
		Available Wi-Fi Networks	Add
		Wi-Fi Protected Setup	PIN Setup/Push Button Setup
		Registered Wi-Fi Networks	—
	Wi-Fi Security Information	Wi-Fi Security Information (AP mode)	—
General	Wi-Fi Hotspot	Wi-Fi Hotspot ON/OFF		*7	—
		Wi-Fi name (SSID): —
		Security Type: —
		Password: —
		Broadcast Frequency: —
		SSID Broadcast ON/OFF
		Connected Devices: —
	Reminder Screen	Maintenance ON/OFF		202	220
		Birthday	ON/OFF		220
		Anniversary	ON/OFF		220
	Valet Mode	Passcode Setting®	Keyboard: Enter New Passcode	230	220
		Activate Valet Mode	Keyboard: Enter Your Passcode
		Change Passcode	Keyboard: Change Passcode
	Meter Screen	Gauge Initial Movement	ON/OFF	168	220
		Meter Information Screen	Eco Gauge/OUT TEMP/Clock/Compass*4/Gas Range	196	220
		Turn by Turn Screen Interruption*1	ON/OFF	198	220
General	Camera	Rear Camera Delay Control	ON/OFF 320 220
		Steering Angle Lines ON/OFF	320 220
	Climate Control Customize Climate Button		A/C/MAX A/C/AUTO/Recirculation/SYNC	286 220
	Temperature Unit °F/°C — — 221
	Language	—	English/Français/Espanol	194 and 201	220
	Tire Pressure Units*	—	kPa/PSi	198 220
	Home Screen Short-cuts	—	ON/OFF	*6	220
	Welcome Screen	—	ON/OFF 195 220
	Goodbye Screen	—	ON/OFF 195 220
	Favorite Widgets	—	Set a favorite widget from the list.	204	221
	Birthday List —	Set a birthday.	202 221
	Anniversary List	—	Set an anniversary day.	202	222
	Periodic Rest Notification*1	—	ON/OFF	*6	—
General	Software Update	Update Check if a new software update		*6	—
		Automatically Check for Updates	ON/OFF
		Automatically Download Updates	ON/OFF
		Default —
	SUBARU STARLINK Apps Recovery	— OK/Cancel		*6	—
	SUBARU STARLINK Auto Connect	— ON/OFF
	Factory Data Reset —	Reset/Cancel
	System Information —	—
	Free/Open Source Software Information	—	—

*1: Models with navigation system

*2: Models with SUBARU STARLINK without navigation system

*3: Models without SUBARU STARLINK or navigation system

*4: Models without navigation system

*5: If equipped

*6: For details about the audio and navigation system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the audio and navigation system.

*7: For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.

*8: Displayed until valet mode is set.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

Car settings

Perform the EyeSight system setting and vehicle setting.

Eyesight ① EyeSight Assist Monitor ① Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) Driver Monitoring System Keyless Entrs System ① Detogger 15 minutes 307281

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. Select the preferred menu.

The setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed to meet your personal requirements.

Item			Available settings	Page reference for the vehicle system operation	Page reference for the setting procedure
1st menu	2nd menu 3rd menu
Car	EyeSight	Pre-Collision Braking Setting	ON/Setting OFF	*3	—
		Lane Departure	All Functions/Lane Departure Prevention Function Only/Warning Buzzer Only/OFF
		Cruise Control Acceleration	Eco/Comfort/Standard/Dynamic
		Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound	ON/OFF
		Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor	ON/OFF
		Select Drive on Left/Drive on Right	Right Lane/Left Lane
	EyeSight Assist Monitor	Red Indicator ON/OFF
		Yellow Indicator ON/OFF
		Green Indicator ON/OFF
	Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*1	Sonar Audible Alarm ON/OFF	391 220
Car	Driver Monitoring System*	Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF		402	220
		Repeat Facial Scan Perform the user recognition. 222
		User Recognition ON/OFF 220
		Automatically Retract Seat on Entry	ON/OFF 220
		Register User Register the user. 222
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Re-register the driver's position.		222
		Delete Driver Position	Delete the registered driver's position.		222
		Delete User Delete the registered user. 222
		Delete All Users Delete all registered users.
	Keyless Entry System	Audible Signal**2	ON/OFF	130 and 135	220
		Hazard Warning Flasher	ON/OFF	130 and 135	220
		Security Relocking*	20 seconds/30 seconds/40 seconds/50 seconds/60 seconds/OFF	137	220
		Driver Door Unlock*	Driver Door Only/All	124	220
		Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*	Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All	124	220
Car	Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 273 220
	Interior Light —		10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/OFF	304 220
	Ambient Lighting*1	— ON/OFF 171	220
	Auto Light Sensor	Light Sensitivity Min/Low/Mid/Max 231 220
		Wiper Link ON/OFF 231 220
	Welcome Lighting	Approaching Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF	232	220
		Leaving Time Set	30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/OFF		220
	One-Touch Lane Changer —	ON/OFF 240 220
	Auto Door Lock/Unlock	Auto Door Lock	Vehicle Speed/Shift into or out of PARK*/OFF	139	220
		Auto Door Unlock	Ignition OFF/Driver Door Open/Shift into or out of PARK/OFF		220
	Rear Seat Reminder	— ON/OFF	65	220
	Door Mirror Setting*	Auto Electric Folding	ON/OFF 272 220
		Reverse Tilt	ON/OFF 270 220
	Power Rear Gate*	Power Rear Gate Memory	ON/OFF 154 220
	Vehicle Dynamics Control	— ON/OFF 368 220
	Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)	—	ON/OFF	376	220
Car	Rear Vehicle Detection (BSD/RCTA)*1	— ON/OFF 388	220
	X-MODE —		Models with 1 mode: ON/OFF Models with 2 modes: Normal, Snow/Dirt, Deep Snow/Mud	370 220
	Steering Responsive Head-lights (SRH)	— ON/OFF 238	220
	Warning Volume — Min/Mid/Max 387, 401 and *			3	220
	Units —		km, km/h, Liter/Miles, MPH, Gallon	168 and 194	220

*1: If equipped

*2: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.

However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.

*3: For details about EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

NOTE

Touch to display the explanation of the items.

▼ How to select items on the screen ▽ Selecting

ON/OFF setting

Reminder Screen Maintenance Birthday Anniversary

Example

Touch the changing menu and select ON or OFF.

Meter Information Screen Eco Gauge OUT TEMP/Clock Compass Gas Range 306134

Example

Touch the preferred item.

▼ How to set items on the screen

∇ Brightness/Contrast

Set and adjust the brightness and contrast of the center information display.

NOTE

"Brightness" can only be adjusted when "Brightness Dial" is off. Refer to "General settings" P210.

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Display"
5. → "Brightness/Contrast"

Brightness/Contrast Brightness 1 11 Contrast 6 11 Default 306135

1. Drag to adjust the brightness and contrast.

Touch "Default" to revert to the factory setting.

∇ Favorite Widgets

Favorite Widgets Please select the icon you want to change. Then, choose your favorite widget from the list below. Excel Pear Caps Angle 307262

The menu on the favorite screen can be customized.

1. Touch Ⓞ (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Favorite Widgets"
5. Select the icon of the display position
6. Select the display item.

▽ Birthday List

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching, a message will be shown when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. This function can be set to on or off by "Reminder Screen". For details, refer to "General settings" P210.

1. Touch Ⓞ(HOME).
2. → Ⓦ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Birthday List"

Birthday List End Add X000X 8/7

306137

1. → "Add"

Enter Name XXXXX 4/10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Q W E R T Y U I D P A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M ALL NET Black

306138

1. Enter the name.
2. → "Next".

BEE Enter Month and Day 03 / 30 OK

306139

1. Enter the date.
2. → "OK"

NOTE

A maximum of 5 birthdays can be stored.

Anniversary List

The procedure for setting an anniversary is the same as "Birthday List" P221, except that in step 4 "Anniversary List" is selected.

▽ Driver Monitoring System (if equipped)

The Driver Monitoring System settings can be changed.

For setting method for the following menu on the Driver Monitoring System, refer to "ON/OFF setting" P220.

• Driver Monitoring System
• User Recognition
• Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

Repeat Facial Scan:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Repeat Facial Scan"

Scan again? OK Cancel

306140

1. → "OK"
2. While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments. When the scan is completed, the completion screen is displayed on the combination meter (color LCD).

Register User:

1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle so that you are seated in the correct driving posture.

NOTE

• Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power seat" P34 or "Outside mirrors" P269.

• If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be saved.

• Touch (HOME).

• → Ⓠ° (Settings)
• → "Car"
• → "Driver Monitoring System"
• → "Register User"

Register User 1.Driver A 2.Driver B 3. 4.Driver D 5.Driver E 306141

1. Select the preferred user from the

User 3 registered. Input name and select icon.

list.When the screen changes, the registration of the facial scan is completed.

graph TD
    A["Car Inlet"] --> B["1: Stagger with *"]
    B --> C["2: Car Wheel with arrow"]
    C --> D["3: Seatbelt with *"]
    D --> E["2: Driver in car wheel"]

Register User Information. Adjust seat and door mirror positions, then press "Set". Set Cancel 306142

1. → "Set"
2. While seated in the driver's seat, face forward and wait for a few moments.

A Forward direction

B Display direction

1 Face forward.

2 Do not lower your chin.

3 Face the display.

*: Display

NOTE

• If user registration cannot be performed, turn your face forward as shown in the illustration, then turn the display.
• There are some cases where user registration cannot be registered properly. In those cases, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P402.
• If "Unable to register. Try again." appears, repeat the procedure beginning from step 5.

Enter Name 4/10 XXXXX I 2 3 4 S 5 6 7 B 8 O Q W E R T Y U I D P A S D F G H J K L Z X C V B N M AA# 10# Next 306138

1. Enter the name.
2. → "Next"

to Back Select Icon Set 306144

1. Select the preferred icon.
2. → "Set"

NOTE

• An existing user can be overwritten by selecting a registered number. When a user is registered by overwriting, the individual fuel economy data is reset.
• When "User Recognition" is set to OFF, user registration cannot be selected.

Update Seat and Mirror Position:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓦ (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Update Seat and Mirror Position"

Update seat and mirror position. Adjust seat and door mirror positions, then press "Set". Set Cancel 306145

NOTE

- Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power seat" P34 or "Outside mirrors" P269.

• If the ignition switch is turned to Delete User: "OFF" position before user registra1. Touch (HOME). tion is complete, the information of (Settings)
  the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-dow outside mirror angle will not be saved.
  thelete User: a1. Touch (HOME). of
• → Ⓜ (Settings)
• → "Car"
• → "Driver Monitoring System"
• → "Delete User"

Delete Driver Position:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Delete Driver Position"

Delete driver position. OK? Yes No 306146

1. → "Yes"

Delete User 1.XXXXX 2.Driver B 3.Driver C 4. 5. 306147

1. Select the preferred user from the list.

Delete User 3. OK? Yes No 306148

1. → "Yes"

Delete All Users:

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "Car"
4. → "Driver Monitoring System"
5. → "Delete All Users"

Delete all users. OK? Yes No 306149

1. → "Yes"

▼ Car information screen

1. Touch (HOME) to display the top menu.

Play Falls Radio Phone Apps MySmart Settings Car Help 307283

1. → (car Info)

∇ Driving Statistics screen

1 Driving Statistics Maintenance 2 3 4 5 307284

1 Driving Statistics
2 Steering angle
3 Running condition
4 Vehicle posture
5 Telltale screen

This screen displays the driving status of the vehicle and the operation status functions. For functions that are operating, the indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

• The vehicle posture indication may differ from the actual vehicle posture.
• When X-MODE has been turned on, the screen of the center information display will be changed to the X-MODE screen.
• The vehicle posture angle varies not only due to the angle of the road surface, but also due to the vehicle tilt caused by the occupants, cargo, and acceleration or deceleration.

▼ Maintenance screen

Driving Statistics Maintenance Auto Manual Engine Oil Left Oil Filter Left Tires Left Maintenance Schedule Left Reset

307082

Maintenance reminders can be set. Engine Oil change reminder:

1. Touch "Maintenance" from the 2nd menu in the car info screen.
2. → ⚙ (Engine Oil)
3. Select "Notification Date" or "Notification Distance" of the reminder.
4. → "Set"
5. → ✗

Oil Filter change reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Oil Filter" item in step 2.

Tires rotation reminder:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Tires" item in step 2.

Maintenance Schedule setting:

The setting procedure is the same as the "Engine Oil" reminder, but touch the "Maintenance Schedule" item in step 2.

NOTE

• Touch "Reset" to reset each setting.
• Touch "Update" to revert to the default value.

3-9. Clock

For models with a genuine SUBARU navigation and/or audio system, the clock can be adjusted using either auto mode manual mode.

■ Setting the clock manually

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Phone Radio Radio Phone Airbus MyCarls Settings Car Info 307279

1. Touch (HOME).
2. → Ⓠ° (Settings)
3. → "General"
4. → "Clock"
5. → "Time Setting"

BACK Time Setting AUTO Manual 8 / 6 / 20XX 2 : 12 PM OK 307080

1. → "Manual"
2. → ∧ or ∨
3. → "OK"

NOTE

The clock setting screen can also displayed by touching the clock on status bar.

■ Setting the clock automatically

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Play Fatics Photo Phone Aero MyScore Settings Car Fly 307279

1. Touch (HOME).

e8. → Ⓠ° (Settings)

the → "General"

1. → "Clock"
2. → "Time Setting"
3. Models with navigation system: → "AUTO"

Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system: → "AUTO"

Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system: → "Sync With Phone"

▼ Models with navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where GPS signal is available.

▼ Models with SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security without navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where DCM (Data Communication Module in vehicle cellular connection) signal is available.

▼ Models without SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security or navigation system

The clock will be set and adjusted automatically when a smartphone is connected via Bluetooth for transferring phonebook data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio system. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to "Bluetooth SETTINGS" in the supplemental Owner's Manual for the audio/navigation system. The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smartphone, the settings of the connected smartphone may need to be changed. (ex: For iOS or other models, notification settings may need to be activated.) For details, check the instructions on connecting smartphones.

■ Time Zone (models with navigation system)

You can configure the "Time Zone" setting on the clock setting screen.

If a GPS signal is available when "AUTO" is selected, "Time Zone" is set automatically. Refer to "Main screen" P210 for the setting.

■ Daylight Saving Time (models with navigation system)

You can configure the "Daylight Saving Time" setting on the clock setting screen. If a GPS signal is available when "AUTO" is selected, "Daylight Saving Time" is set automatically. Refer to "Main screen"

P210 for the setting.

NOTE

• When "Time Setting" is set to "AUTO", you can change "Daylight Saving Time" and "Time Zone" settings.
• When "Daylight Saving Time" is set to "AUTO", the "Time Zone" setting can only be set to "AUTO".

3-10. Valet Mode

When leaving your vehicle with a valet service, such as at a hotel or restaurant, you can set the valet mode, which disables the navigation, audio, and vehicle setting functions. The display cannot be operated, preventing the leakage of personal information. The valet mode is designed to help prevent personal information leaks.

■ Activation of Valet Mode

Up! House Up! House Up! Down! Down! 307285

1. Touch "Valet Mode".

Passcode Setting Enter New Passcode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

307145

1. Enter the passcode.
2. Touch "OK".

■ Deactivation of Valet Mode

Visit Plus is Active 307286

1. Touch "Valet Mode" or select OFF.

2. Enter the passcode.

3. Touch "OK".

NOTE

If you enter the passcode incorrectly three times in a row when setting or canceling valet mode, a message prompting you to contact a SUBARU dealer will be displayed, but it is still possible to enter the passcode even after the fourth attempt.

If you have forgotten your passcode, consult your SUBARU dealer.

3-11. Light control switch

■ Precautions and tips

CAUTION

• Use of any lights for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause the battery discharge.
• Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the lights are turned. If the vehicle is left unattended for a long time with the lights illuminated, the battery may be discharged.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when push-button ignition switch is in the "AC or "ON" position.

Regardless of the position of the light control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the push-button ignition switch is turned off.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

The light control switch operates when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. Regardless of the position of the light

control switch, the illuminated lights are turned off when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

NOTE

The light control switch can be operated (except auto on/off headlights), even under the following conditions.

- When the push-button ignition switch is turned off (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").

- When the key is not inserted into ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

If the driver's door is opened while headlights are illuminated under such conditions, a chirp sound will inform the driver that the lights are illuminated.

Headlights

the 301716

For U.S. models

the EDGE AUTO OFF 306400

For Canada models

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal lever.

"position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, r side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are on.

“DOE” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plat lights are on.

"AUTO" position:

• Auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the instrument panel illumination headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail light and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

NOTE

The light sensitivity of the auto on/O headlights can be changed by operating the center information display. F details, refer to "Car settings" P21 Also, the setting can be changed by SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBAR dealer for details.

- If the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position and the headlights do not turn on when it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the "≡D" position.

ear Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights While the light control switch is in the "AUTO" position, the headlights will automatically turn on when the windshield wipers operate several times. The headlights will automatically turn off when the wipers stop.

NOTE

The ON/OFF setting of this function be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

its” position (except for Canada models):

The headlights are all off. Only when the following conditions are fulfilled, instrument panel illumination, headlights, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail light and license plate lights are automatically on or off depending on the level of the ambient light.

The engine is running.

• The parking brake is fully released.
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

"OFF" position (for Canada models): The headlights are all off ^2 .

*1: When the light switch is switched to the "OFF" position while the vehicle is stopped, the lights turn off. Then the light switch will automatically return to the "AUTO" position.
*2: The headlights will automatically change to the AUTO mode when the following conditions are met:

- The engine is running.

eThe parking brake is fully released.

- The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

▼ Welcome lighting function

The welcome lighting function turns on the low beam headlight for smooth approaching to or exiting from the vehicle at night or in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the following conditions are met.

• The light control switch is in the "AUTO" position.
• It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/off headlights.

NOTE

If the engine is turned off after turning off the light switch, the welcome lighting function may not operate (for

Canada models).

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will automatically illuminate when unlocking doors including the rear gate by using remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain illuminated for 30 seconds and then turn off. However, if any of the following operations is done, the low beam headlights will turn off.

• The doors are locked.
• The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
• The ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is activated, the low beam headlights will remain illuminated even when either of following operation is done.

• The push-button ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" status (models with "keyless access with push-button start system").
• The key is pulled out from the ignition switch (models without "keyless access with push-button start system").

The low beam headlights will turn off and any of the following conditions.

- 3 minutes have passed since the low beam headlights were illuminated by the welcome lighting function.

the 30 seconds have passed since the door is opened and closed.

• The light control switch is turned to a position other than "AUTO".
• The locking procedure is performed twice. When performing the unlocking procedure after performing the locking procedure, perform the locking procedure twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which low beam headlights remain on by the welcome lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, you can change the setting by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Ca settings" P215.

▼ Sensor for the auto on/off headlights

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

the The sensor is as shown in the illustration.

If any object is placed on or near the sensor, the sensor may not detect the level of the ambient light correctly and the auto on/off headlights may not operate properly.

■ High/low beam change (dim-■ Headlight flasher mer)

1 2 304881

1 High beam
2 Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, high beam indicator light "≡" on the combination meter is also on.

Simple line drawing of a cylindrical object with a pointed tip, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flash position for more than just a few seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it. The high beam will stay on for as long as you have the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, high beam indicator light “≡” on the combination meter also illuminates.

■ High beam assist function NOTE

• The high beam assist function utilizes the stereo camera installed at the position of the front map lights.
• For details on how to handle the stereo camera, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

The high beam assist function automatically changes the headlight from high beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to high beam.

Ifg When the vehicle speed increases to or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

• There is no preceding or oncoming vehicle.
• The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
  ● The road does not have a sharp curve.
  When any of the following conditions are met, the headlight will change to low beam.
• When the vehicle speed decreases to or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
• When the forward area of the vehicle is bright.
• When there is a preceding or oncoming vehicle.

- When the EyeSight system is malfunctioning or temporarily stopped.

NOTE

• Do not overestimate the capacity of the high beam assist function. The driver always has the responsibility to understand the surrounding situation, to drive safely, and to change the headlight mode manually if necessary.
• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as "operational". This setting can be changed to OFF (non-operation) at SUBARU dealers. For more details, contact SUBARU dealer.

▼ How to use the high beam assist function

The high beam assist function will be activated when all the following condition are met.

• The light control switch is in the "AUTO position and the low beam headlights are on automatically.
• The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

304963

edHigh beam assist indicator light When the high beam assist function is activated, the high beam assist indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is smallfunctioning or temporarily stopped, the headlight will be fixed at low be

▼ How to temporarily lower the sensitivity of the high beam assist function

The sensitivity of the high beam assist function can be lowered by performing the following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the "ON" position, set the light control switch to the "AUTO" position and push the signal lever forward (high beam position).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and within approximately 15 seconds, press the "A/V" (following distance setting) switch more than 1 times consecutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam assist function is lowered, the high beam assist indicator light[A] on the combination meter will flash.

NOTE

- The sensitivity of the high beam assist function cannot be lowered in the following conditions.

• The Cruise Control indicator is illuminated.
• The EyeSight warning indicator (yellow) is illuminated.

• The sensitivity of the high beam

- CONTINUED -

assist function returns to normal level the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.

▼ How to change the headlight mode manually

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to center position, the high beam assist function will turn off and the high beam assist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to the "D" position, the headlight mode will be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function will turn off, the high beam assist indicator light will turn off and the high beam indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

- After manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you turn on the high beam assist function, return the light control switch to the "AUTO" position.

- When manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you turn the light control switch to the “ ^300 ” position, the instrument panel

illumination, parking lights, front side marker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights will be on.

▼ Tips for the high beam assist sys-tem

- The high beam assist function recognizes the conditions surrounding the vehicle based on the brightness of illumination ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the headlight mode may switch in some situations that do not match to the driver's sense.

- A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be detected.

- Under the following situations, the brightness of ambient illumination may not be detected correctly and the high beam assist function may not work properly. As a result, the glare of the high beam may disturb the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode may continue although there are no oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead. In the such cases, change the headlight mode manually.

- In bad weather (fog, snow, sand storm, heavy rain, etc.).

- When the windshield glass is dirty fogged.

- When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

• When the stereo camera is deformed or the stereo camera lenses are dirty.
• If there are lights similar to the headlights or the tail lights in the surrounding area.
• When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is driven without its headlights and tail lights on.
• If the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the light beams are not aimed correctly.
• When a rapid change of brightness continues while driving.
• When driving on a road with many ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
• When driving on a road with many curves.
• When there are some objects that reflect light strongly, such as a road sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
• When the rear part of the vehicle ahead, such as a container, reflects light strongly.
• When the headlights of your vehicle are damaged or dirty.
• When your vehicle is tilted, such as in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is being towed.

- Immediately after the engine has started.

- In the following conditions, the head-light mode will not be automatically changed from the high beam to the beam.

- When your vehicle passes an on- coming vehicle suddenly in a blind curve.

- When another vehicle passes in front of your vehicle.

- When an oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead comes in and out of view because of continuous curves, median strips, roadside trees, etc.

- If the stereo camera detects the light the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle, the headlight mode may change from the high beam to the I beam automatically.

- The headlight mode may change from the high beam to the low beam, or the low beam mode may continue, when affected by a street light, traffic signal illumination of an advertisement board, or a reflective object such as a road sign and signboard.

- The timing of the change of headlight mode may differ due to the following factors.

- Color or brightness of the headlight of an oncoming vehicle or the tail

low

lights of a vehicle ahead.

- The headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of the vet ahead are covered with mud, snow etc.

- Movement and direction of an on- coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead

- When the headlights of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle ahead illuminate on only or side.

- When the oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

- Conditions of a road (slope, curve road surface, etc.).

- Number of passengers and weight of loaded cargo.

- Limitation of the detection ability of the stereo camera.

■ Daytime running light system

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are illuminated, the tail lights do not illuminate. When it becomes dark outside, turn the light switch to the "D" position to illuminate the headlights and tail lights. This will improve visibility and allow other drivers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automatically illuminate when the following conditions are fulfilled.

• The engine is running.
- The parking brake is fully released.
- The light control switch is in "AUTO", "ODO" or "OFF" (for Canada models).
- The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the "ear" position, the instrument panel illumination, front side marker lights, tail lights and license plate lights are also illuminated.

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

1 2 304837

1 The target area of illumination when SRH is activated
2 The target area of illumination when SRH is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves the headlight beam to the left or right in accordance with the steering angle and vehicle speed. This function helps to improve the visibility at night by illuminating the road ahead at corners and intersections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off. The settings can be changed by using the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

1 SRH OFF 305294

1 SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates when SRH is turned off.

es 1 SRH 306177

1 SRH warning indicator

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH warning indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) illuminates and a message appears on the warning screen when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position. It indicates that SRH has been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

• The SRH function operative/non-operative status is kept when the engine is turned off, even if the engine is restarted.
• When you turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position, the SRH OFF indicator light will illuminate and turn off after several seconds.
• SRH only activates when the vehicle is traveling forward at the speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

3-13. Headlight beam leveler 3-14. Fog light switch (if

The LED headlights produce more light than conventional halogen headlights. When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and the headlight beams are angled upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the optimum height automatically depending on the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the headlights may become misaligned, and the headlight beam leveler will not reset them to the proper angle. This may occur after transporting your vehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if the vehicle is parked and restarted on different angles. In such cases, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer.

d e e 1 2 301721

Except for Canada models
1 Headlight switch
2 Fog light switch

1 2 306401

For Canada models
1 Headlight switch 2 Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch is placed in the position while the headlights are in the following condition.

• The headlight switch is in the “ ” position.
• The headlight switch is in the "AUTO" position and the low beam headlights turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, perform the following.

- Turn the switch to “O” (except for Canada models).

- Turn the switch to "OFF" (for Canada models).

- CONTINUED -

扣 304967

The indicator light on the combination meter will illuminate when the front fog lights are illuminated.

3-15. Turn signal lever

1 2 3 4 304856

1 Right turn
2 Lane change right signal
3 Lane change left signal
4 Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and hold it during the lane change. The lever will return automatically to the neutral position when you release it.

■ One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal indicator light three times, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly and immediately release it.

NOTE

You can turn the one-touch lane changer on/off by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215. Your SUBARU dealer can also help you change this setting. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

3-16. Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the wind-shield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking your view.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 10 seconds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level frequently, such as at fuel stops.

• Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the blade rubbers and might cause the wiper motor to fail. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield washer.

• In freezing weather, be sure that the blade rubbers are not frozen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to the window glass could cause not only the blade rubbers to be damaged but also might cause the wiper motor to fail. If the blade rubbers are frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster, windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) or rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.

• If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some other obstruction on the window, this might cause the wiper motor to fail even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper operation.
• Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Refer to "Windshield washer fluid" P503.

- Do not clean the blade rubbers with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This will cause deterioration of the blade rubbers.

For models with automatic rain sing windshield wipers:

- When the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position, do not touch the windshield near the rain sensor and do not place a wet cloth on the windshield near the rain sensor. Doing so may result in unexpected wiper operation and cause injury.

• When washing the vehicle, make sure that the wiper is turned off. Otherwise, the wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause injury.
• When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure that the wiper is turned off. Otherwise, the wipers may be damaged because they may operate unexpectedly and car wash brushes could become tangled around them.

NOTE

• The windshield wiper motor is protected against overloads by a circuit breaker. If the motor operates continuously under an unusually heavy load, the circuit breaker may trip to stop the motor temporarily. If this happens, park your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the wiper switch, and wait for approximately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker will reset itself, and the wipers will again operate normally.
• Clean your blade rubbers and window glass periodically with a washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations of road salt or road film. Operate the windshield washer for at least 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the windshield or rear window.
• Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If

ever, use detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade strongly, the black coating component will peel off, which will cause the wiper to judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that the rubber has not come loose. After cleaning the window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean water. Rinse the window until the water does not form beads on glass. This indicates that the glass clean.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this procedure, replace the blade rubbers with new ones. For replacement instructions, refer to "Replacement of wiper blades" P504.

NOTE

For models with automatic rain sensing windshield wipers:

When the wiper switch is turned to the "AUTO" position while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, or the wipers will operate once. This indicates that the wiper switch is in

the "AUTO" position. When the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position, the following situations may occur.

• The wipers may operate if the rain sensor or the windshield is vibrated or objects such as insects, dirt, mud, etc. are covering them. Turn off the wiper unless it is raining or snowing.
• The wipers do not operate if the rain sensor does not detect rain or snow. If necessary, push the wiper control lever down to the low speed position or high speed position.
• The wipers may not operate properly if the rain sensor does not detect the amount of rain-drops because a water-repellent coating, dirt, or ice is on the upper half of the windshield.
• The rain sensor may be malfunctioning if the wiper intermittent operation does not vary depending on the amount of rainfall. If necessary, turn the wiper switch to any position except the "AUTO" position. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected as soon as

possible.

• The wipers stop operation if the ambient temperature decreases to 5^ (-15^) or lower. The wipers resume operation when the ambient temperature increases to 14^ (-10^) or high. If you need to operate the wi under 5^ (-15^) , push the w control lever down to the low speed position or high speed position.

- The wipers may not operate if temperature around the rain sensor is more than 176^ (80°C) because the system cannot detect the amount of raindrops under these temperatures.

• This system is also equipped with the vehicle speed interlocking intermittent wiper function. When the vehicle stops, the wiper operation interval will become longer compared with that while driving.
• This system may malfunction in a location with strong radio waves noise.
• If the wiper switch is in the "AU" position and the wipers do not operate when it rains, or the wiper switch is in the "Low speed" portion and the wipers do not operate

turn the wiper switch to the "Hig speed" position. In this case, contact your SUBAR dealer.

■ Windshield wiper and washes er. switches

The wiper operates only when the ignitic switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.
▼ Windshield wipers (models with automatic rain sensing windshield thewipers)

AUTO 305672

/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe) O / OFF: Off

AUTO / AUTO: Automatic operation r ▼ / LO: Low speed i-▼ / HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down. With the wiper switch in the "AUTO" position, the wipers operate automatically when the rain sensor detects falling rain. The wiper timing is automatically adjusted depending on the amount of rain.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the "OFF" position. For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you release the lever.

NOTE

The automatic adjusting mode of the wiper timing can be changed from the rain-sensing mode to the vehicle speed interlocking mode. The setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. For more details, we recommend that you contact a SUBARU dealer.

▽ Rain sensor

Line drawing of a car interior showing a vehicle and roof structure (no text or symbols)

1 Rain sensor

The rain sensor is on the windshield glass.

▽ Sensor sensitivity control

AUTO 306510

Turn the dial to adjust the sensitivity of

rain sensor for wiper control. Turn the diaelease the lever.

downward to increase the sensitivity. Turn the dial upward to decrease the sensitivity. ▽ Wiper intermittent time control

▼ Windshield wipers (models without automatic rain sensing windshield wipers)

S. 301723

△ / MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)
O/ OFF: Off
/ INT: Intermittent
▼/ LO: Low speed
/ HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the "O"/"OFF" position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the lever up. The wipers operate until you the

Diagram of a car handle with directional arrows and triangular symbols, no readable text or labels

When the wiper switch is in the “ ” position, turn the dial to adjust the operating interval of the wiper. The operating interval can be adjusted in several steps from the shortest interval to the longest.

▼Windshield washer

Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper control lever toward you. The washer fl sprays until you release the lever. The wipers operate while you pull the lever.

304857

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warning light illuminates when the washer fl level in the tank has dropped to th lower limit. If the warning light illur nates, refill the tank with fluid. For refilling procedure, refer to "Wind- shield washer fluid" P503.

■ Rear window wiper and washer switch

Diagram of a car connector with four ports and wiring (no text or symbols)

: Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)
— : Continuous operation
re- : Intermittent operation
O : Off
: Washer operation (accompanied by wiper operation)

▼ Rear wiper

With the switch turned to the " " position, the rear wiper will operate intermittently at intervals corresponding to the vehicle speed. In this position, when you move the select lever to the "R" position, the rear wiper will switch to continuous operation.

- CONTINUED -

When you move the select lever from t "R" (reverse) position to another position the rear wiper will return to intermittent operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper: Even if the rear wiper switch is in the "O" position, if the front windshield wipe operating continuously, the rear wiper w operate intermittently when you move the select lever to the "R" (reverse) position

The factory setting (default setting) of the reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as follows.

• U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
- Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs the rear wiper operation on the rear gate. Doing so may damage the rear wiper when it operates.

new Washer

To wash the rear window, turn the knob the "☐" position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you release the knob.

The rear view camera washer also operates while the rear window washer is operating.

3-17. Mirrors

to Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted before you start driving.

■ Inside mirror (if equipped)

Diagram of a car rearview mirror with labeled parts (1 and 2), no text or symbols present

1 Normal position
2 Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use. To reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-glare position.

■ Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink(if equipped)

1 2 3 304867

1 Compass
2 HomeLink Buttons
3 Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming feature senses distracting glare from vehicle headlights behind you and automatically dims to eliminate the glare and preserve your vision.

▼ To Operate the Auto-Dimming Feature

Press the “☐” switch to turn the auto-dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming feature is enabled when the switch's green LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming feature will default to on with each ignition cycle.

▼ To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds or until the display turns on/off. The compass feature will default to on with each ignition cycle
2. If the display reads "C", slowly drive vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 304866

Compass calibration zones

1. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the "1" switch for more than 6 seconds or until a zone number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in the display, toggle the "1" switch again until your current location zone number appears. After you stop pressing the switch, your new zone number will be saved. With a few seconds, the display will show a compass direction.

If the vehicle's magnetics have changed or if the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass. Press and hold the "Switch" for more than 9 seconds or until a "C" appears in the display. Once a "C" appears in the display, slowly drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink ® Wireless Control System

The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and even

- CONTINUED -

home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers, please go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

• Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to outside of the garage.

• Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features, as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.

• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.

• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to "ON" or "ACC" position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
• Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P251.

▽ Programming a New HomeLink Button

the 1 2 306958

1 Indicator Light
2 HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink button that you would like to program. The HomeLink indicator light will flash orange slowly (if not, refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P251).

1 304869

1 Garage door opener remote

1. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 1 to 3 in (2 to cm) away from the HomeLink button that you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (30 cm). Keep this in mind if you had difficulty with the programming process.

Line drawing of a hand pressing down on a curved surface with a small house symbol (no text or labels)

1. While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and hold the hand-held remote button. Continue pressing the hand-held remote button until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE 15 to

Some devices may require you to replace this "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section. Refer to "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" P251.

1 304871

1 Indicator Light

1. Press the HomeLink button that you would like to program and observe indicator light.

2. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete.

3. If the indicator light rapidly flashes green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the programming process. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.

- CONTINUED -

1 304872

1 "Learn" button

1. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 7.

Simple line drawing of a finger pointing at a curved surface with a diagonal line, no text or symbols present.

1. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button up to three times. A this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1 304874

1 Status Indicators

1. If status indicator arrows appear next to the indicator light, please refer to "Garage Door Two-Way Communication" P251.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink website.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator of garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote ever two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 4 to complete.

▽ Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be used at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LE indicator will change from continuously lit to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. HomeLink is now ready to be programm at any time beginning with "Programming New HomeLink Button" step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slow flash orange after 20 seconds. The HomeLink button can be released at this point. Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-and-ming of a new device to the button, it will revert to the previously stored programming.

∇ Garage Door Two-Way Commu-nication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall and display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

- CONTINUED -

Range may be reduced by obstacles such online at www.HomeLink.com and as houses or trees. You may have to slow www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

1 304874

1 Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found

∇ Using Two-Way Communication

1 304875

1 Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink by simultaneously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for three seconds

1 2 3 4 304876

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)
2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)
3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)
4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with Sarrow indicators.

▼ Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

• Canada-spec. models

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

■ Smart Rearview Mirror/compass with HomeLink(if equipped)

▼ Safety precautions

WARNING

of

● Never rely exclusively on the Smart Rearview Mirror. The Smart Rearview Mirror has blind spots that must be checked prior to operating the vehicle. Please exercise caution when using this system.
- Do not disassemble or modify the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror. If there is a strange odor or smoke, stop using it immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
- Never operate the Smart Rearview Mirror while driving. Doing so could result in an accident that causes serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Do not put the main unit, camera or wiring of the Smart Rearview Mirror close to fire. Doing so could result in a malfunction and fire.
• When the Smart Rearview Mirror malfunctions, change to the mirror mode immediately and we recommend that you consult a SUBARU dealer.
• Staring at Smart Rearview Mirror for extended period of time may result in car sickness.
• The display could become hard to see because of lights (e.g. sunlight or the headlights of approaching vehicles) from outside of the vehicle. In this case, change to the mirror mode if necessary.

▼ Smart Rearview Mirror switches

5 1 2 3 4

307216

1 Mode lever
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button
5 HomeLink buttons

NOTE

When the moonroof is opened (if equipped):

If the sunlight is too bright to see the display of the Smart Rearview Mirror, close the moonroof (sunshade), or select the mirror mode.

▼ How to use the Smart Rearview Mirror

CAUTION

Adjust the rearview mirror before driving.

1) Change the Smart Rearview M ror to the mirror mode.
2) Sit with the correct posture in the driver's seat and adjust the mirror position to see behind.
3) Change the Smart Rearview Mirror to the display mode.
If you start driving without adjusting the mirror, light may reflect on the mirror while selecting the display mode and it may make it hard to see the screen.

∇ To change the mode

2 1 307218

1 To select the display mode, first adjust the rearview mirror, then pull the mode lever towards you.
2 To select the mirror mode, push the mode lever away from you.

Select the display mode to show the im from the camera that is installed in the antenna.

Select the mirror mode to use as a nor mirror. If the mirror mode is selected, the image from the camera is not shown or mirror.

NOTE

- It is not possible to use the Smartthe display while the select lever is Rearview Mirror in the display mode position other than the "P" position. when the ignition switch is in the "LOCK"/"OFF" or "ACC" position.

- When using the display mode, partsBrightness adjustment

of the vehicle interior may reflect light on the display. Adjust the angle of the Smart Rearview Mirror to avoid unwanted reflection.

▽ Display adjustment

1 2 3 307219

roof Left button

2 Center button 3 Right button

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed

the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

gle 1 2 3 307220

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to set the brightness.
2 Press this button to decrease the brightness.
3 Press this button to increase the brightness.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the up/down adjustment mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the brightness adjustment menu will exit.

in a

Up/down adjustment

1 2 3 307221

1 Setting button: Press the setting button set the angle.

2 Press this button to lower the angle.

3 Press this button to raise the angle.

After pressing the setting button, the r will change to the left/right adjustment mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the up/down adjustment menu will exit.

Left/right adjustment

1 2 3 307222

1 Setting button: Press the setting button to set the angle.

2 Press this button to turn the angle left.

3 Press this button to turn the angle right.

after pressing the setting button, the mo will change to the rotation adjustment mode.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the left/right adjustment menu will exit.

Rotation adjustment

1 2 3 307223

1 Setting button: Press the setting button set the angle.
2 Press this button to turn the angle counterclockwise.
3 Press this button to turn the angle clockwise.

After pressing the setting button, the mode will change to the HomeLink menu.

NOTE

If the button is not touched for 5 seconds, the rotation adjustment menu will finish.

∇ Dimming setting

The Smart Rearview Mirror has a dimm mirror mode. When the mirror mode is selected with the ignition switch in the "position, auto dimming will activate. This mode decreases glare automatically depending on the brightness level from behind.

1 2 3 307219

1 Left button
2 Center button
3 Right button

When selecting the mirror mode, press any of the buttons to display the auto dimming menu. Press the center or right buttons to turn the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF.

ng ON" ON OFF 307224

Dimming mirror mode ON indicator

ON OFF 307225

Dimming mirror mode OFF indicator

When turning the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF, the dimming mirror mode ON/OFF indicator will illuminate for 5 seconds.

NOTE

• When the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, Auto dimming will not activate.
• When the display mode is selected, auto dimming will not activate.

▼ When the display mode malfunctions

▽ Vehicle communication error

VEHICLE COMMUNICATION ERROR 307226

When the vehicle communication error, the warning indicators will appear as shown in the illustration.

1 2 3 4 307227

1 Mode lever
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button

When the warning indicators appear, operate the mode lever to select the mode. In such a case, we recommend you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

If the mode does not change to the mirror mode even when operating the mode lever, the mode lever may have malfunctioned. In such a case, press and hold one of the left, center, or right buttons for 10 seconds. Then the mode will change to the mirror mode.

▽ Camera calibration error

Top-down line drawing of a car front bumper with a circular emblem and a small object on the side (no text or symbols)

When the camera calibration error, the warning indicators will appear as shown the illustration.

When the warning indicators appear, or operate the mode lever to select the mode. In such a case, we recommend you consult your SUBARU dealer for repair.

▼ Maintenance

Line drawing of a car rear view with no visible text or symbols

1 Camera

in Make sure to clean the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera regularly. If these parts are not clean, error the screen cannot be seen clearly.

that Wipe off the Smart Rearview Mirror and the area around the camera by using a dry soft cloth. If the foreign matter cannot be removed, first wipe the area off using a wet soft cloth, and then wipe using a dry cloth.

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning. Doing so could result in discoloration, deterioration, or malfunction.
• Make sure to clean the rear gate glass regularly. When you clean the rear gate

- CONTINUED -

glass, first soak a soft cloth with diluted mild detergent to wipe it off, and wipe using a dry cloth.

• Do not attach stickers on the rear gate glass that is in front of the camera.
• During snowy weather, remove the accumulated snow from around the antenna, because snow interferes with the camera image on the mirror.
• When installing a roof box or a similar accessory, do not block the area in front of the camera lens to avoid interfering with the camera image on the mirror.

▼ Tips

• Do not use the display mode for a long time while the engine is not running. Doing so could result in the battery discharge.
• Do not install radio antennas around the Smart Rearview Mirror. Radio waves may disturb the Smart Rearview Mirror screen.

• Observe the following instructions. Not doing so could result in malfunction or the main mirror unit falling off.

• Do not push the button too strongly or move the lever too forcibly.

• Do not turn the main mirror unit more than 90 degrees.
• Do not impact the main mirror unit.
• Do not impact the camera or cam-

era cover that are installed on the upper part of the rear gate.

• If the screen is hard to see because of light, select the mirror mode.
• If LED lights or scattered reflections are caught in the camera, the screen may flicker. However, this is not a malfunction.
• If something moves rapidly near the camera, the display may not be able front catch the item. However, this is not g malfunction.
• If the display mode is used, the view the rear will be different from the no use of the inner mirror or the mirror mode. Do not rely solely on the Small Rearview Mirror; check the rear visual if necessary. Pay attention to traffic conditions for safe driving.
• Adjust the brightness of the screen appropriately. If the screen is too bright, the driver's eyes may get tired while driving.
• When it is raining, use the rear wiper. If the screen of the Smart Rearview Mirror is still unclear, even though rear wiper is being used, check the condition of the rubber of the rear wiper blade.

• When using the rear wiper, the screen may flicker when the rear wiper passes through the front of the camera. However, this is not a malfunction.

• If the screen of the Smart Rearview Mirror is not clear, clean the rear gate of glass around the camera. If it is still not clear, there is a possibility that the surface of the glass is covered with oil. In this case, remove the oil and clean the glass.

• If the rear gate glass is fogged, use the rear window defogger. Use the mirror to mode until the fog is clear completely. For how to use the rear window defogger, refer to "Defogger and dei-cer" P273.
  The Smart Rearview Mirror sometimes becomes hot. However, this is not a malfunction.
  In the following cases, the color may not be clear. However, this is not a malfunction.

• The shown items are a very far distance away.

• The environmental conditions are very dark.

▼ To operate the compass feature

1 2 3 307219

1 Left button
2 Center button
3 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right button. to display the main menu. Select compass mode using the left button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

∇ To turn the compass feature off

NW 1 307231

1 Compass

Select "ON" or "OFF" using the center

on/ ▽ Compass calibration

If the compass appears inaccurate, recalibrate the compass.

Front view diagram of a car rearview mirror with labeled screen (NW) and control buttons, no text or symbols beyond labels

Instruments and controls

1. Select "CALIBRATE" using the right button.

2. To start the compass calibration, press the center button.

3. Select "Continue" using the center button.

COMPANIC CHEMICAL Select zone for other for sound pressure from the way Jitter Drive Compase Seat 307252

1. Select your current location in the display using the left button.
2. Select "Continue" using the center button.
3. Once "C" appears in the display, slow drive the vehicle in circles until compass is calibrated.

▼ HomeLink \*Wireless Control System

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up three hand-held radio-frequency remotes used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and even home lighting. The below steps are generic programming instructions; for Genie and Sommer garage door openers, pleas go directly to the HomeLink website. Additional information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

• Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and objects are out of the way the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to outside of the garage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features, as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.
• It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker and more accurate training.

• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the "ON" or "ACC" position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink.
• Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of the device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to "Erasing HomeLink Buttons" P265.

HomeLink set up

1 2 3 4 307253

1 HomeLink buttons
2 Left button
3 Center button
4 Right button

Press any of the left, center or right but to display the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left button or press any of the HomeLink buttons.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

SET UP 307254

1. Select "SET UP" using the right button

2. Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.

3. Press any of the HomeLink buttons.

4. Be sure to read the displayed instruction stions.

Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.

1. Position the hand-held remote (garage door opener remote) 2 in (5 cm) aw from the mirror.

Internal unit Press and press normally before within 2 inches and will be prepared. 1 307255

1 Garage door opener remote
6. While the HomeLink programming in structions are displayed, press and hold the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6 to 12 in (15 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.

1. Be sure your garage door is not moving, then press OK.
2. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3 times.

At this point, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is

- CONTINUED -

pressed and released.

307256 Shire the guard door press to any of the 3 outer press? 307256

1. "Program Success":

If the programmed HomeLink button works, select "Yes" and programming is completed.

If the programmed HomeLink button does not work select "No" and proceed to step 10.

Power Light Control 30 307257

1 304872

1 "Learn" button

1. At the garage door opener motor, (security gate motor, etc.) locate the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to

the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps.

1. Firmly press and release the "Learn", "Smart", or "Program" button. You now have 30 seconds in which to complete step 12.

2. Return to the vehicle and press the HomeLink left button.

3. Firmly press the HomeLink left button 3 times.

At this point, your device should operate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

1. "Program Success":

If the programmed HomeLink button works, select "Yes" and programming is completed.

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For Genie and Sommer garage door openers please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

▽ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter remote signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. The indicator LED on the hand-held remote will go off when the device times out, indicating that it has finished transmitting.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator garage door opener by using the programming procedures, replace "Programming New HomeLink Button" step 3 with the following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is flashing orange, press and release ("cycle") your device's hand-held remote ever two seconds until the HomeLink indicator light changes from orange to green. You may now release the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unp the device during the "cycling" proce to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with "Programming a New HomeLink Button" step 4 to complete.

▽ Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the handheld remote of the device may also be pressed at any time.

▼ Erasing HomeLink Buttons

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to select the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left switch.
2. Select "SET UP" using the right button
3. Select "Continue" using the HomeLink left button.
4. Select the "Trash can icon" using the HomeLink left button.

HomeLink Clear current HomeLink button programming? Clear No 307330

1. To erase the program for the HomeLink button, select "Clear" using the HomeLink center button.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming a new HomeLink button" - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button

To program a previously programmed HomeLink button refer to "HomeLink set Up" P263.

▽ Garage Door Two-Way Communication

HomeLink has the capability of communicating with your garage door opener. HomeLink can receive and display "closing" or "opening" status messages from compatible garage door opener systems. At any time, HomeLink can also recall a display the last recorded status communicated by the garage door opener to indicate your garage door being "closed" or "opened".

HomeLink has the capability of receiving this communication from the garage door opener at a range up to 820 feet (250) Range may be reduced by obstacles such as houses or trees. You may have to say your vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

▽ Programming Two-Way Communication

nd 1 HomeLink 307251

m)1 Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink garage door status indicators will flash rapidly green indicating that the garage door two-way communication has been enabled. If your garage door status indicators flashed, two-way communication programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do flash, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found online at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru and www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

∇ Using Two-Way Communication

STATUS SET UP 307250

Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select HomeLink menu using the left button. Select "STATUS" using the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed on the display while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

not

1 HomeLink 307251

1 Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last recorded garage door status message communicated to HomeLink. HomeLink will display the last recorded status for 5 seconds.

1 2 3 4 304876

1 Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking Orange)

2 Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid Green)

3 Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blinking Orange)

4 Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid Green)

If two-way communication programming successful, HomeLink will display the status of your garage door opener with arrow indicators.

▼ Certification

In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, additional HomeLink information and programming videos can be found at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline at 1-800-355-3515.

• U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could v the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

• Canada-spec. models

This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Innovation, Science, and Economic Development Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End Users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

306210

HomeLink® and the HomeLinkhouse are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

WARNING

• When programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System, you may be operating a garage door opener or other device. Make sure that people and objects are out of the way the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use the HomeLinkWireless Control System with a garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse feature as required by applicable safety standards. A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet these safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases risk of serious injury or death. For more information, consult the HomeLink website at www.HomeLink.com/Subaru or call 1-800-355-3515.

Language

Front view of a car rearview mirror with control buttons and display screen (no text or symbols on the main body)

Changes the language displayed in the Smart Rearview Mirror.

1. Press any of the left, center or right buttons to display the main menu. Select "LANGUAGE" using the left button.
2. Select the language using the right button and press the center button.

NOTE

The main menu cannot be displayed the display while the select lever is position other than the "P" position.

■ Outside mirrors

▼ Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex mirror and farther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use convex mirror to judge the distance of vehicles behind you when changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrors before driving.

▼ Remote control mirror switch

L' R 304882

Select side to adjust

Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that you want to adjust. "L" is for the left mirror, "R" is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral position to prevent unintentional operation.

NOTE

- The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

For models with memory function:

• The outside mirror can be adjusted for approximately 45 seconds after the following conditions are met.
• The ignition switch is turned the "OFF" position.
• The door is unlocked using access key fob.
• The outside mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" P35.
• The outside mirror angle can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P222.

▽ Reverse tilt-down feature (if equipped)

When backing the vehicle up, the right and/or left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Move the select lever to the R (Reverse) position.

3. The outside mirror angle moves downward.

The outside mirror angle will return to its original position when the following condition are met.

• Approximately 9 seconds after the select lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
• The ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• The vehicle is running.

NOTE

The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can be registered with button "1", "2" or each of the key fobs. For details, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" P35.

• The reverse tilt-down mirror angle can also be retrieved with the Driver Monitoring System user information. To do so, perform user registration in the Driver Monitoring System settings. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P222.
• The operational/non-operational setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

- The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as the first passenger's side mirror. The sett of driver's side mirror operation be changed by a SUBARU dealer Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal during reverse tilt-down mirror angle adjustment.

To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirror angle, adjust the outside mirror using remote control mirror switch while the reverse tilt-down operates. For details about how to adjust the outside mirror angle, refer to "Remote control mirror switch" P270.

Memory function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be registered. Register the position with button "1", "2" or each of the access key fobs and retrieve the position.

For details about registration or retrieval of a position, refer to "Power driver's seat with synchronized outside mirrors memory function" OF P35.

NOTE

from tind if the seat is moved forward or back ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, the can er. reverse tilt-down will move to the factory default position or the last position hold.

Hold last position function:

The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirror can be set to the latest adjusted angle. The hold last position function operates when the following condition are met.

• The memory function is not used.
  ● The seat is moved forward or backward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more.

NOTE

• The factory setting (default setting) for this function is set as “non-operational”. This setting can be changed to “operational” at SUBARU dealers. For more details contact a SUBARU dealer.
• If the hold last position function is setting is "non-operation", the reverse tilt-down will move to the of factory default position.

▼ Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)

Diagram showing car control panel with labeled buttons and a close-up of the main dial with 'L' and 'R' indicators.

The power folding mirror switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON" or "ACC" position.

To fold the outside mirrors, press the power folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors, press the switch again.

NOTE

- If the outside mirrors have been operated (folded or unfolded) manually, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK/OFF" position to the "ACC" or "ON" position, the outside mirrors may be adjusted automatically depending on the status of the power folding mirror switch.

- CONTINUED -

- If the outside mirrors have been manually folded slightly forward of the regularly unfolded position, when you turn the ignition switch from the "LOCK/OFF" position to "ACC" or "ON" position, the outs

mirrors may automatically fold further forward depending on the status of the power folding mirror switch. When this happens, press the power folding mirror switch. E doing so, the outside mirrors which have been folded to the furthest forward position will extend to the regularly unfolded position and the fold rearward in the usual way. In order to unfold the outside mirror press the switch again.

- When you unfold the outside mirrors manually, the mirrors may become N wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mir rors by switch operation. If the out side mirrors are still wobbly, fold t mirrors again and then unfold them by switch operation.

- When the temperature is low, the outside mirrors may stop during switch operation. If that occurs, push the switch again. When the outside mirrors do not work by switch operation, move them several times manually. This makes it possible to operate them by switch

operation.

- When you operate the power folding mirror switch continuously, it may not work. This is not a malfunction. the Operate the switch again after wait-ide ing for a short period of time.

▼ Power folding door mirror function (if equipped)

The mirrors are automatically folded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position, the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the doors are locked. The mirrors are automatically unfolded when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position and the doors are unlocked.

NOTE The power folding door mirror function does not operate when the power folding mirror switch is in the mirror unfolding position.

- The setting of the power folding door mirrors function can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" -P215. Also, the setting can be changed by your SUBARU dealer.

We recommend that you contact your @SUBARU dealer for details.

3-18. Defogger and deicer

1 2 3 305666

1 Rear window defogger
2 Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defogge

and the deicer (if equipped) system. The defogger and deicer system is activated only when the ignition switch is in the position.

Technical diagram showing a device interior with directional arrows and a labeled component, likely for motion or ventilation instructions.

Rear window and outside mirror defogge button

To activate simultaneously the rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger (if equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if equipped), press the rear window and outside mirror defogger button that is located on the climate control panel. The indicator light on the defogger button illuminates while the defogger and deicer system is activated.

To turn them off, press the defogger button again. They also turn off when the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position.

The defogger and deicer system will automatically shut off after approximately 015 minutes. If the rear window and the outside mirrors have been cleared and the windshield blade rubbers have been deiced completely before that time, press the defogger button to turn them off.

It is possible for the defogger and deicer system to be set to continuous operation mode by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

CAUTION

• To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the defogger and deicer system continuously for any longer than necessary.
• Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

NOTE

• Turn on the defogger and deicer system if the wipers are frozen to the windshield.
• If the windshield is covered with snow, remove the snow so that the windshield wiper deicer works effectively.
• While the defogger and deicer system is in the continuous operation mode:

- If the vehicle speed remains at mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes, the windshield wiper deicer system automatically stops operating. However, the rear window defogger system and outside mirror defogger system maintain continuous operation in this condition.

- If the vehicle battery voltage drops below the permissible level, continuous operation of the defogger system and deicer system is canceled and the system stops operating.

3-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt/telescopic position while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
  If the lever cannot be raised to the fixed position, adjust the steering wheel again. It is dangerous to drive without locking the steering wheel. This may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.

e 1 2 3 304858

1 Tilt adjustment
2 Telescopic adjustment
3 Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to "Manual seat" P33 or "Power seat" P34.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it up and down, and forward and backward.

■ Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system warms the steering wheel at a constant temperature.

1 2 307214

1 Heated Steering Wheel switch 2 Indicator light

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel switch when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position. Then the steering wheel will be warmed and the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. To turn the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull the switch again. Then the indicator light will turn off.

CAUTION

• Use the Heated Steering Wheel system with the engine running. Otherwise, the battery voltage may drop below the permissible level and it may not be possible to start the engine.
• There is a possibility that people with delicate skin may suffer slight burns even at low temperatures if they use the Heated Steering Wheel for a long period of time. When using the Heated Steering Wheel, always be sure to warn the persons concerned.
• Do not cover the Heated Steering Wheel with an object such as a steering wheel cover. Doing so may cause the Heated Steering Wheel to overheat.
• Do not spill liquid on the steering wheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off immediately and dry it before using the Heated Steering Wheel off system.

NOTE

• If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is approximately above 104^ (40°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. Then, the indicator light will continue to illuminate.
• The Heated Steering Wheel system will automatically turn off approximately 30 minutes after the system has been turned on.
• The temperature of the Heated Steering Wheel system cannot be adjusted.

3-20. Horn

P 304901

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Climate control

4-1. Ventilator control 27\$

Center ventilators 278

Side ventilators 278

Rear ventilators 278

4-2. Climate control panel 279

Front climate control panel 280

Rear climate control panel (if equipped) 283

4-3. Automatic front climate control operation ... 284,

4-4. Automatic rear climate control operation..... 285

Rear climate control panel (if equipped) ....

Sensors.... 286

4-5. Manual climate control operation for front climate control 286

Airflow mode selection 286

Temperature control 288

SYNC mode 288

Fan speed control.... 288

Air conditioner control.... 288

Air inlet selection 289

To turn off the front climate control system......

4-6. Manual climate control operation for rear climate control 290

Locking and unlocking the rear climate control panel (if equipped).... 290

Airflow mode selection.... 290

Temperature control 291

Fan speed control 291

To turn off the rear climate control system ..... 29

4-7. Front seat heater and ventilation (if equipped) 291

Front seat heater.... 291

Front seat ventilation 292

4-8. Defrosting 292

4-9. Operating tips for heater and air conditioner....293

Cleaning ventilation grille.... 293

Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight 293

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit 293

Checking air conditioning system before summer season 293

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature weather conditions ..... 294

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded.... 294

Refrigerant for your climate control system ..... 294

4-10. Air filtration system....294

Replacing the cabin air filter.... 295

4-1. Ventilator control

■ Center ventilators

Technical diagram of a door frame with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Center ventilators

To adjust the airflow direction, move the To adjust the flow direction, move the tab. tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way down.

■ Side ventilators

2 1 402805

Side ventilators

1 Close
2 Open

■ Rear ventilators

Diagram of a car's side panel with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

To adjust the airflow direction, move the tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all the way rearward.

4-2. Climate control panel

WARNING

• The cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

CAUTION

Do not open and close the center console lid while operating the rear climate control panel. There is the risk of fingers being caught in the lid.

■ Front climate control panel

Technical diagram of a vehicle front panel with labeled components and directional indicators

403712

1 Climate control screen
2 Rear window and outside mirror defogger button* (Refer to "Defogger and deicer" P273.)
3 Passenger's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature control" P288.)
4 Driver's side temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature control" P288.)
5 Defroster button (Refer to "Defrosting" or P292.)
*: Some models may not have an outside mirror defogger.

▼ Front climate control screen

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A/C SYNC 72 72 ON/OFF REAR ON/OFF SYNC Front Climate Control AUTO A/C MAX A/C 11 12 13 14 15 403728

→:Touch the climate control mode indicator

1 Climate control mode indicator
2 SYNC mode indicator
3 REAR SYNC mode indicator
4 REAR set temperature
5 Front passenger's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)†
6 Customizable icon* 2
7 REAR climate control ON/OFF icon
8 Fan speed control
9 Climate control ON/OFF icon
10 Driver's seat heater/ventilation icon (if equipped)*1
11 Climate control mode select icon
12 Temperature control screen (passenger's side)
13 SYNC icon
14 Temperature control bar
15 Airflow mode selection screen
16 Temperature control screen (driver's side)
*1: For details, refer to "Front seat heater and ventilation" P291.
*2: The customizable icon can be changed to the favorite icon. Refer to "General settings" P210.

▼ Rear climate control screen

1 72 A/C SYNC SYNC 72 72 ON/OFF < > REAR ON/OFF SYNC 2 3 Rear Climate Control AUTO LOCK 72 6 7 60 5 4 REAR 72 72 72 72 403727

→Touch the rear climate control mode indicator

1 Rear climate control mode indicator
2 Rear climate control auto mode icon
3 Rear climate control panel lock icon*
4 Fan speed control
5 Airflow mode selection screen
6 Temperature control screen
7 Temperature control bar
*: Touch "LOCK" to deactivate the operation of the rear climate control panel will then be shown on the display of the rear climate control panel and the rear climate control mode indicator.

Rear climate control panel (if equipped)

1 TEMP 2 ON/OFF MODE AUTO 3 4 5

402799

1 Temperature control button (Refer to "Temperature control" P291.)
2 Fan speed control button (Refer to "Fan speed control" P291.)
3 Rear climate control ON/OFF button (Refer to "To turn off the rear climate control system" P291.)
4 Airflow mode selection button (Refer to "Airflow mode selection" P290.)
5 AUTO button (Refer to "Automatic front climate control operation" P284.)

NOTE

When the climate control operation is set to "LOCK" on the center information display, it appears on the center information display and the display of the rear climate control panel. When "i" is shown on the display, you cannot use the rear climate control panel to operate the system. To unlock the rear climate control panel, refer to "Locking and unlocking the rear climate control panel" P290.

4-3. Automatic front climate control operation

Front Climate Control 1 AUTO 72 dSD AC MAX AIC 2 H 85 72 SYRC 72 60 UO 60 UO 3 4 AUTO AIC 72 dSD 72 dSD 72 SYRC 403729

Front climate control screen

1 Air inlet selection

2 Air conditioner

3 Airflow mode

4 Fan speed

When the auto mode is selected, the following functions are automatically controlled.

• Fan speed
• Airflow mode
  • Air inlet selection
  ● Air conditioner operation

To activate this mode, perform the following.

1. Touch the climate control mode indi-

cator.

1. Touch "AUTO".
2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to "Temperature control" P288.

NOTE

• Operate the automatic climate control system when the engine is running.
• Even when cooling is not necessary, the air conditioner will automatic turn on if the temperature is set much lower than the current out air temperature. Even in this case the "A/C" indicator light on the climate control screen illuminates.

- The air conditioner may not opera in the following cases:

• When the cabin temperature is low

• When the ambient temperature decreases close to 32^ (0°C)

• The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the region specifications of the vehicle.

• The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the region specifications of the vehicle.

- When “AUTO” is displayed, if you perform one of followings, “AUTO” will no longer be displayed.

• Operating the fan speed control
• Operating the airflow mode
• Pressing the defroster button
• Turning on MAX A/C mode

You can then manually control the system as desired using the climate control screen. To change the system back to auto mode, touch "AUTO".

To turn off the front climate control system, touch "ON/OFF".

At this time, the air inlet selection mode will differ depending on the auto mode and manual mode.

- When the air inlet selection is set to set auto mode: Outside air circulation

- When the air inlet selection is set to manual mode: No change

When the ignition switch is changed to the "OFF"/"LOCK" or "ACC" position from "ON", the air inlet mode will automatically change to the outside air circulation regardless of whether it is the auto mode or manual mode.

4-4. Automatic rear climate control operation

Rear Climate Control NETS LOCK 1 2 72 BEAT 解 3 4 72 60 50 V 72 72 72 403730

Rear climate control screen

1 Rear climate control auto mode icon
2 Rear climate control panel lock icon (if equipped)
3 Fan speed
4 Airflow mode

You can operate the rear climate control using the rear climate control screen on the center information display.

To activate the automatic rear climate control, perform the following.

1. Touch the rear climate control mode indicator.
2. Touch "AUTO".
3. Set the preferred temperature. Refer "Temperature control" P288.

NOTE

When 🔒 is shown on the rear climate control mode indicator, you cannot the rear climate control panel to operate the system.

■ Rear climate control panel equipped)

For vehicles equipped with a rear climate control panel, you can operate the rear climate control using the rear climate control panel.

6 5 4 AUTO 1 2 3 403731

Display of the rear climate control panel

1 Set temperature indicator
2 Airflow mode indicator
3 Fan speed indicator
4 AUTO indicator
to 5 Rear climate control lock indicator
6 SYNC indicator

To activate AUTO mode, perform the following.

1. Press the "AUTO" button.

2. Set the preferred temperature. Refer to "Temperature control" P288.

(iNOTE

When the climate control operation is set to "LOCK" on the center information display, "a" appears on the center information display and the display of the rear climate control panel. When "a" is shown on the display, you cannot use the rear climate control panel to operate the system. To unlock the rear climate control panel, refer to "Locking and unlocking the rear climate control panel" P290.

■ Sensors

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and sensor placement with labeled parts 1 and 2

1 Solar sensor
2 Interior air temperature sensor

1 402856

1 Rear interior air temperature sensor

The automatic climate control system employs several sensors. These sensors are delicate. If they are not treated properly and become damaged, the system may not be able to control the interior temperature correctly. To avoid damaging the sensors, observe the following precautions.

• Do not subject the sensors to impact.
• Keep water away from the sensors.
• Do not cover the sensors.
• Do not touch the rear interior air temperature sensor.

4-5. Manual climate control operation for front climate control

■ Airflow mode selection

Select the preferred airflow mode by the following operation.

1. Touch the climate control mode indicator.
2. Touch the preferred airflow mode.

Airflow modes are as follows.

erly a- 403689

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Ventilation 2: Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of instrument panel and some through wind shield defroster outlets (A small amount air flows to the windshield and both side windows to prevent fogging.)

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating airflow (no text or symbols)

threat-def: Windshield defroster outlets, foot outlets and both side outlets of the instrument panel (Refer to "Defrosting" P292.)

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and seat with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot outlets

■ Temperature control

Perform the following operation to regulate the temperature of airflow from the air outlets.

Temperature control buttons:

Press the temperature control button to the blue side (cool) or the red side (warm).

Temperature control screen:

1. Touch the climate control mode indicator.

2. Select the preferred temperature by the following operation.

3. Touch and move the temperature control bar.

4. Touch the “ ∧”/∧”.
5. Touch the preferred temperature in the temperature control screen.

▼ Max A/C mode

For quicker cooling, touch "MAX A/C" on the climate control mode select icon or customizable icon.

When the Max A/C mode is on, the following settings will be changed automatically.

• The air conditioner will turn on.
• The temperature will be set on the lowest.

• The fan speed will be set on the maximum speed.

• The air inlet will be set to the recirculation mode.

• The airflow mode setting will be set to the ventilation mode.

To turn off the Max A/C mode and return to the previous setting, touch "MAX A/C" again.

SYNC mode

- When the "SYNC" mode is turned on, the front passenger's and rear passenger's side (when rear climate control is on) settings are synchronized with the driver's side settings. The following settings will be in synch:

• Temperature control (front passenger's and rear passenger's side)
  -Airflow mode (rear passenger's side)

• Fan speed control (rear passenger's side)

• If "SYNC" is displayed on the customizable icon, touch "SYNC" to turn the SYNC mode on or off.

• If a customizable icon other than "SYNC" is displayed, touch the climate control mode indicator. Then touch "SYNC" to turn the SYNC mode on or off.

When the SYNC mode is turned on, the SYNC mode indicator and rear SYNC

mode indicator (when rear climate control is on) will turn white.

Touch “SYNC” again or adjust the front passenger’s side temperature to cancel the “SYNC” mode. Operating the rear climate control panel cancels “SYNC” mode only for the rear climate control system.

■ Fan speed control

Select the preferred fan speed by touching *< or ># on the climate control screen.

■ Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.

Perform the following operation while the fan is in operation to turn on the air conditioner.

• If “A/C” is displayed on the customizable icon, touch “A/C”. When the air conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator illuminates. An A/C icon will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.
• If a customizable icon other than “A/C” is displayed, touch the climate control mode indicator. Then touch “A/C” on the climate control mode select icon. When the air conditioner is on, the “A/C” indicator illuminates. The A/C icon will

be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

To turn off the air conditioner, touch "A/C" again. The indicator light will turn off.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidifying in cold weather, turn on the air conditioner. However, if the ambient temperature decreases to approximately 32^ F ( 0^ C), the air conditioner and dehumidification system may not work properly.

Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by touching the air selection icon.

Recirculation mode: Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. This mode is used for the following cases.

• When driving on a dusty road
• When you want cooling performance to increase (for example, in particularly hot weather)

Perform the following operation to select this mode.

- is displayed on the customizable icon:

(1) Touch.

- is not displayed on the customizable icon:

(1) Touch the climate control mode indicator.

(2) Touch 📄 on the climate control mode select icon.

will be displayed on the climate cont mode indicator.

Outside air circulation mode: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment. This mode is used for the following cases.

• When the road is no longer dusty
• When the interior has cooled to a comfortable temperature

Perform the same operation as the recirculation mode to change the mode will be displayed on the climate control mode indicator.

WARNING

Continued operation in the recirculation mode may fog up the windows. Switch to the outside air circulation mode as soon as the outside dusty condition clears.

NOTE

When outside air circulation is selected, the system may automatically adjust the air inlet setting depending on such factors as the temperature setting, the temperature inside the vehicle, or conditions outside the vehicle.

■ To turn off the front climate control system

To turn off the front climate control system: touch "ON/OFF".

4-6. Manual climate control operation for rear climate control

You can adjust the settings of the rear climate control using the rear climate control screen on the center information display or the rear climate control panel. To control the rear climate control on the center information display, touch the rear climate control mode indicator on center information display.

■ Locking and unlocking the rear climate control panel (if equipped)

To lock the rear climate control panel, touch the "LOCK" icon of the rear climate control screen on the center information display. The rear climate control panel lock indicator "a" is shown on the rear climate control mode indicator on the center information display and display of the rear climate control panel. To unlock the rear climate control panel, touch the "LOCK" icon again.

■ Airflow mode selection

Select the airflow mode using the airflow mode selection button on the rear climate control panel or the rear climate control screen on the center information display.

Airflow modes are as follows.

Interior view of a car showing seat compartments and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Ventilation: Rear ventilator outlets

Line drawing of a car interior showing seats, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Heat: Foot outlets under the rear left side trim

Interior view of a car showing seat compartments and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Bi-level: Rear ventilator outlets and Foot outlets under the rear left side trim

■ Temperature control

Adjust the temperature setting using the rear climate control screen on the center information display or the buttons on the rear climate control panel.

NOTE

• The controllable temperature range may vary depending on the regional specifications of the vehicle.
• If the air conditioner icon on the fro climate control screen on the center information display is turned off, the rear interior temperature may not become the setting temperature.

■ Fan speed control

Select the preferred fan speed using the rear climate control screen on the center information display or the fan speed control button on the rear climate control panel.

■ To turn off the rear climate control system

To turn off the rear climate control syste touch the rear climate control ON/OFF icon on the center information display or press the ON/OFF button on the rear climate control panel.

4-7. Front seat heater and ventilation (if equipped)

■ Front seat heater

The seat heater operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

Front the 1 AUTO A/C 72 72 REAR 72 ON/OFF REAR ON/OFF SYNC 3 2 403711

1 Seat heater indicator
2 Front passenger's seat heater icon
3 Driver's seat heater icon

Touch the driver's/passenger's seat heater icon on the climate control screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

graph LR
    A["HIGH"] --> B["MID"]
    C["OFF"] <--_D["LOW"]

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Selecting HIGH mode will cause the seat to heat up quicker. Holding and releasing the seat heater icon turns the seat heater off in any mode.

NOTE

The front seat heater function cannot be used simultaneously with the seat ventilation (if equipped).

■ Front seat ventilation

The front seat ventilation operates when the ignition switch is in the "ON" positio

1 72 A/C 72 REAR 72 ON/OFF SYNC 3 2 403713

1 Seat ventilation indicator
2 Front passenger's seat ventilation icon
3 Driver's seat ventilation icon

Touch the driver's/passenger's seat ventilation icon on the climate control screen. Each time you touch the icon, the mode will change as follows.

graph TD
    A["HIGH"] --> B["MID"]
    C["OFF"] <--_D["LOW"]

HIGH:

3 indicator lights are illuminated.

MID:

2 indicator lights are illuminated.

LOW:

1 indicator light is illuminated.

.OFF:

All indicator lights turn off.

Holding and releasing the seat ventilation icon turns the seat ventilation off in any mode.

4-8. Defrosting

FRONT 403733

Select the 🎨 or 📌 mode to defrost or dehumidify the windshield and front door windows.

NOTE

• When the “ 🎨 or “ 🎨 mode is selected, the air conditioner operates automatically regardless of the position of the air conditioner icon to defrost the windshield more quickly. However the indicator on the air conditioner icon may not illuminate. At the same time, the air inlet selection is automatically set to the outside air mode.
• After defrosting the windshield by pressing the defroster button,

pressing the button again returns the system to the setting that has been selected before the defroster was activated.

4-9. Operating tips for heat and air conditioner

■ Cleaning ventilation grille 1 403695

1 Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grill free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clear because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of insects and leaves on the condenser.

■ Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.

■ Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to circulate its oil.

■ Checking air conditioning system before summer season

Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and proper operation each spring. Have the air conditioning system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Cooling and dehumidifying i high humidity and low tem-perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets may be noticed. This condition is normal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.

■ Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner compressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation whenever the accelerator is fully depressed such as during rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.

in■ Refrigerant for your climate control system

1 403621

1 Air conditioner label Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf). Before adding, changing or checking the refrigerant, check the air conditioner label in the location shown in the illustration to confirm which type of refrigerant is used your vehicle. Consult your SUBARU dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not covered under warranty.

4-10. Air filtration system

Your vehicle's air conditioning system is equipped with an air filtration system. Replace the cabin air filter according to the replacement schedule found in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". This schedule should be followed to maintain the filter's dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter should be replaced more frequently. Have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the following occurs, even if it is not yet time to change the filter:

• Reduction of the airflow through the vents.
• Windshield gets easily fogged or misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster performance if not properly maintained.

■ Replacing the cabin air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take measures to protect the center console with masking tape first, so that you avoid scratching the center console with the glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle interior showing a bracket and seat assembly (no text or symbols)

(2) Remove the damper shaft from glove box.

er ures id the 402809

(3) Push in the stoppers located on both sides of the glove box and then pull down the glove box as as it will go.

he 402824

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally and remove the hinge portion.

When doing this, be careful not to damage the hinge.

Technical diagram showing engine compartment with directional arrows and a magnified inset of the internal component, labeled 402387.

Climate control

1. Remove the cabin air filter according to the following procedure in order to prevent dust on the air cleaner from falling to the inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the filter cover.

(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).

(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

Technical diagram showing car air intake system with labeled components and a zoomed-in inset of the internal component.

1. Replace the cabin air filter with a one and then reinstall the cover.

402825

1. Reinstall the glove box, and connect the damper shaft.
2. Close the glove box.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must point UP.

Audio

5-1. Antenna 298 Printed antenna 298

Roof antenna 298
5-2. Audio set 298

5-1. Antenna

■ Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the window on which the antenna printed. Doing so may damage the antenna printed on the window.

Line drawing of a car rearview side profile with no text or symbols

The antenna is printed on the inner surface of the rear window glass.

NOTE

Antenna performance will deteriorate significantly if you apply tinting film any other material over the antenna portion of the rear window glass.

■ Roof antenna

Simple line drawing of a boat on water with a triangular hull, no text or symbols present

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

5-2. Audio set

your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system or audio system, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual for details.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Interior equipment

6-1. Cabin Connect (if equipped).... 302
6-2. Interior lights.... 302

Map lights 302

Reading light 303

Cargo area light 303

OFF delay timer 304

One-touch Interior Illumination function (if equipped) 304

6-3. Sun visors 305

Vanity mirror with light 306

6-4. Overhead console.... 306

Cabin view mirror 306

6-5. Storage compartment.... 307

Glove box.... 307

Center console 308

Cup holders.... 308

Bottle holders.... 309

6-6. Power outlets 310

12 V power outlet 310

Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option) .....

120 V power outlet (if equipped).... 311

6-7. USB power supply 312

How to use the USB power supply.... 313

6-8. Ashtray (dealer option) 314
6-9. Floor mat....315
6-10. Assist grip....315
6-11. Coat hook....316
6-12. Shopping bag hook....317
6-13. Cargo area cover (if equipped) .....317

Using the cover.... 317

To remove the cover housing 318

Stowage of the cargo area cover 318

To install the cover housing 319

6-14. Cargo tie-down hooks....319
6-15. Under-floor storage compartment......32
6-16. Surround View Monitor (if equipped)....320

How to change the display of Surround View

Monitor 321

How to cancel Surround View Monitor 323
How to view the camera images \$24
Range of Surround View Monitor.... 32 ^2
Using the camera 327

316-17. Rear view camera 328

How to use the rear view camera.... 329
Viewing range on the screen 330
Help lines.... 331

6-1. Cabin Connect (if equipped)

You can use "Cabin Connect" to speak the 3rd-row seat passenger.

Top-down schematic of a vehicle layout with seating arrangement and traffic indicators (no text labels)

Display Off Yield Mode Core Connect Add Before Add Add Onset Add 307403

Touch the "Cabin Connect" icon to toggle this function "ON" and "OFF". For details, refer to "Cabin Connect" P207.

You can change the volume settings. For detailed explanation of the settings, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner's Manual.

NOTE

The audio system's volume adjusts automatically when this function is

6-2. Interior lights

a CAUTION When leaving your vehicle, make sure the lights are turned off to avoid battery discharge.

or ■ Map lights

DOOR OFF 602539

1 Door interlock switch
To turn on the map light, push the lens. To turn it off, push the lens again.

▼ Automatic illumination

When the door interlock switch is in the "DOOR" position, the map lights illuminate automatically in the following cases.

• Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened.
• The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to "Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob" P120.
• The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P133.
• The ignition switch is turned from the "ON" or "ACC" position to the "LOCK" OFF position.

■ Reading light

Line drawing of a car air vent and exhaust system (no text or symbols)

To turn on the reading light, push the /To turn it off, push the lens again.

▼ Automatic illumination

The reading lights illuminate automatically in the following cases, even if the door interlock switch on the map light is in a position.

• Any of the doors other than the rear gate is opened.
• The doors are unlocked using the keyless access function (if equipped). Refer to "Locking and unlocking by holding the access key fob" P120.
• The doors are unlocked using the remote keyless entry system. Refer to "Remote keyless entry system" P133.

- The ignition switch is turned from the "ON" or "ACC" position to the "LOCK"/ "OFF" position.

■ Cargo area light

ns. 601835

1 DOOR 2 OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear gate is opened. The light remains illuminated for several seconds and gradually turns off after the rear gate is closed. OFF: The light remains off.

■ OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic illumination function.

• Reading light
• Map light
• Cargo area light

When the interior light switch is set to "DOOR" position (except the reading light), the light will automatically turn on and turn off depending on the locking of the doors, the opening and closing of the doors including the rear as well as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time (which the lights remain on (OFF de timer) can be changed by a SUBAR dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, the setting can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to settings” P215.

■ One-touch Interior Illumination function (if equipped)

e d ate, 602516

Push the One-touch Interior Illumination switch once to illuminate the map light (if the map light switch is in the "DOOR" position) and reading light.

When the map light and reading light are illuminated by the One-touch Interior Illumination function, the lights will be turned off by one of the following operation.

• Push the One-touch Interior Illumination switch once.
• Push the lock button on the access key fob or transmitter.
• Hold the front door handle and lock it while holding the access key fob (if equipped).

- Push the power rear gate lock switch/ rear lock button while holding the access key fob to lock the rear gate.

NOTE

• When the lights are illuminated using function other than this, the lights will not be turned off even though the One-touch Interior Illumination switch is pushed.
• If the battery drainage prevention function is activated, the map light and reading light will be turned off.

6-3. Sun visors

Diagram of a car interior showing a steering wheel and dashboard with a curved arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To block out glare, swing down the visc To use the sun visor at a side window, swing it down and move it sideways.

Diagram of a hand holding a car seatbelt with a black arrow indicating left motion (no text or symbols)

With the sun visor positioned over the side window, you can slide the sun visor to wait the rear to prevent glare through the gap between the sun visor and center pillar. The slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear the vehicle. When you have finished sliding it, push it toward the front of the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Do not slide the sun visor over windshield. The slid sun visor would obstruct your view of the rearview mirror.

■ Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover clo while the car is being driven to being blinded by glare.

6-4. Overhead console

used avoid 602540

Diagram of a car interior showing a directional arrow and dashboard (no text or symbols)

To open the console, push up the lid lig that is located on the "PUSH" mark and will automatically open.

WARNING

Do not use the overhead console while driving. Doing so may distract you from the road conditions ahead and cause an accident that may result in serious injury or death.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover. The lights beside the vanity mirror illuminate when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a period of time while the engine is running can cause battery discharge.

- When your vehicle is parked in the sun or on a warm day, the inside of the overhead console

heats up. Avoid storing plastic or other heat vulnerable or flammable articles such as a lighter in the overhead console.

- Do not pull the lid when opening the overhead console.

There is the risk that the over-head console may be damaged.

■ Cabin view mirror

htly it 1 602537

1 Cabin view mirror

To use the cabin view mirror, push up the "PUSH" mark located on the lid lightly and it will automatically open.

Diagram of a car interior showing a door handle and seat area with a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Push the lid back up half way.

NOTE

When opening the overhead console while the cabin view mirror is in use, first close the lid and then push up the "PUSH" mark to open the console.

6-5. Storage compartment

CAUTION

• Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
• Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compartment.

Glove box

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement

1 Rotate the key clockwise to lock.

2 Rotate the key counterclockwise to unlock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

• The emergency key is directional. If the key cannot be inserted, change the direction that the grooved side is facing and insert it again.
• For models with the "keyless access with push-button start system", use the emergency key to lock or unlock the glove box.

■ Center console

The center console box provides a storage space.

601838

1 Coin tray
2 Accessory tray

The top of the console can be used as armrest.

■ Cup holders

CAUTION

- Do not pick up a cup from the cup front passenger's cup holder holder or put a cup in the holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to an accident.

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might scald you and/or your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery or carpets. When a cup in the rear passenger's cup holder contains a beverage, do not fold down the rear seatback. Otherwise, the beverage could spill and, if the beverage is hot, it could scald you and/or your passengers.

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

cup front passenger's cup holder er The cup holder is built into the center ay console.

Diagram showing two car interior compartments with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

2nd-row seat's cup holder (2nd-row captain seat models)

The cup holder is built into the center console. To use the cup holder, pull the cup holder lid.

Line drawing of a car seat with rear seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

2nd-row seat's cup holder (2nd-row bench seat models)

The cup holder is built into the armrest

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car intake manifold with adjustment knobs and a valve (no text or symbols)

3rd-row seat's cup holder (left side)

Diagram of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

3rd-row seat's cup holder (right side)

The cup holder is built into the rear side trim.

■ Bottle holders

CAUTION

• Do not pick up a bottle from the bottle holder or put a bottle in holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead an accident.
• When placing a beverage in a bottle holder, make sure it is capped. Otherwise, the beverage could spill when opening/closing the door or while driving and, the beverage is hot, it could so you and/or your passengers.

Line drawing of a vehicle interior with lane markings and a small boat, no text or symbols present

Front door bottle holder

the to 601840

F Rear door bottle holder

scale the bottle holder equipped on each door trim can be used to hold beverage bottles and other items.

6-6. Power outlets

CAUTION

• Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones, such as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power outlet. That could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory power outlet when it is not use.
• If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too tight for the accessory power outlet, this can result in a poor contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit properly.
• Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power outlet for a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause battery discharge.
• Before driving your vehicle, make sure that the plug and the cord your electrical appliance will not interfere with shifting gears and operating the accelerator and brake pedals. If they do, do not use the electrical appliance while

driving.

■ 12 V power outlet

Electrical power (12 V DC) is available at any of the accessory power outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position. Accessory power outlets are located in the following places.

in 602519

isPower outlet

on

t or 601842

Power outlet in the cargo area

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appliance by connecting it to an outlet. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

• Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory power outlets.
• Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12 V DC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 120 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.

- When using appliances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 120 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could also damage the heating element.

so may cause the plug to stick and overheat, creating a potential fire hazard.

CAUTION

■ Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option)

To use the accessory power outlet as a cigarette lighter socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It will automatically spring up when ready for use.

• Do not hold the lighter pushed because it will overheat.
• The electrical power socket is originally designed to use a genuine SUBARU cigarette lighter plug. Do not use a non-genuine cigarette lighter plug in the socket. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
• If the socket is ever used for a plug-in accessory such as a cell phone, that may damage the portion of the socket's internal mechanism that causes a cigarette lighter plug to "pop out" after its lighter element is heated. Therefore, do not place a cigarette lighter plug in a socket that has been used, even once, to power a plug-in accessory. Doing

■ 120 V power outlet (if equipped)

Electrical power (120 V AC) is available at any of the power outlets when the ignition switch is in either the "ACC" or "ON" position. Power outlets are located in the following places.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt switch and a small inset icon with an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

Power outlet behind the center console The maximum power rating of an appli- ance that can be connected is 100 W.

CAUTION

• Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 120 V AC. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 100 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet. The maximum power rating of an appliance that can be connected is 100 W. Do not use an appliance which exceeds the indicated wattage for each outlet.
• When using appliances connected to two outlets simultaneously, the total power consumed by them must not exceed 100 W. Overloading the accessory power outlet can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical appliance.
• Remove the plug from the power outlet before operating the second-row seat slide. There is a that the 120 V power outlet or plug may be damaged.

6-7. USB power supply

CAUTION

• The specification of a USB terminal that can be used is the Typ A and Type-C. If a different specification of terminal is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible, or the device may malfunction.
• There is a risk that a connected device may malfunction or data may be damaged. The connection of a device shall be performed at your responsibility.
• To avoid an electric shock or a malfunction, observe the following precautions.

- Do not connect a USB hub.

- Do not insert any metal or other foreign objects into the USB terminal.

- Do not spill water or other liquid on the USB terminal.

• Be careful not to pull the connected cable. Doing so could break the USB terminal and the connected device.

• If a device is connected for a long time when the engine is not running, the battery may be discharged. Even when the engine is running, we recommend that you do not connect a device for an unnecessarily long time.

• Do not connect a malfunctioning device. Doing so may cause smoke and fire.
• Remove the USB electronic device from the console USB power supply before operating the second-row seat slide. There is a risk that the USB power supply or USB electronic device may be damaged.
• Put the cap on the 3rd-row seat USB terminal when it is not in use. If any foreign objects get into the USB terminal, that could cause a short circuit.

NOTE

- The rated voltage of each USB terminal is DC 5 V. For details about the maximum rated power, refer to "How to use the USB power supply" P313. Before connecting a device, be sure to read the instruction manual of the device and check

whether or not this specification of the output is supported by the device. If a device that requires power exceeding the maximum rating is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible. Even if charging could be completed, the time required for charging may be longer than when the genuine charger for that device is used.

• Depending on the device, charging may be possible only when a spec cable is used. In this case, be sur connect the device using the spec cable.
• When a device that communicates with a PC is connected, power supply or charging may not be possible.
• When connect a device for charging, disconnect the device promptly after charging is completed.

How to use the USB power supply

n e - cial to -3.0A -2.4A 602481

Front seat USB power supply (an audio device can be connected and used)

2-terminal type USB power supply g, USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A* er USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two USB terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.
1-terminal type USB power supply - USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A

3.0A 2.4A 602482

Console USB power supply (power supply function only)

• USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.4 A*
• USB Type-C: DC 5 V/3.0 A*
  *: The available electrical power of the two USB terminals is a maximum of 5.4 A.

2.1A 601849

3rd-row seat USB power supply (power supply function only) (if equipped)

- USB Type-A: DC 5 V/2.1 A*

*: The available electrical power of the two terminals is a maximum of 4.2 A.

Use the USB terminal to use or charge electronic device.

When using the terminal, open the USB power supply cover. After use, close the USB power supply cover.

When the ignition switch is in the "ACC" "ON" position, the power can be supplied to the electronic device.

6-8. Ashtray (dealer option)

CAUTION

• Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted cigarette in an ashtray. This cause a fire.
  ● Always extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them into the ashtray, and then close the ashtray securely. If you keep the ashtray open, the fire of the cigarette may spread to another cigarette butt and start a fire.

- Do not put flammable material in the ashtray.

• Do not leave a lot of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accumulate around the hinges of the ash-tray's inner lid. Clean them off using a toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended implement.

Diagram of a mechanical device with an open lid and internal components, showing a bidirectional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

601270

The portable ashtray can be installed in each cup holder or bottle holder. For the locations of the cup holders, refer to "Cup holders" P308. For the locations of the bottle holders, refer to "Bottle holders" P309.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

6-9. Floor mat

Diagram of a car interior showing foot and seat components with a warning symbol (no text or labels)

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it could cause an accident. Observe the following precautions to prevent the floor mat from slipping forward.

• Be sure to use a genuine SUBARU floor mat or an equivalent designed with grommets in the correct locations.
• Make sure that the driver's floor mat is placed in its proper location and is correctly secured on its retaining pins.

- Do not use more than one floor mat.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Retaining pins are located on the driver's side floor. The floor mat should be properly secured using the built-in grommets, by placing the grommets over the pins and pushing them downward.

6-10. Assist grip

Diagram of a curved mechanical component with labeled parts (0 and 1), showing a crack or fracture between two surfaces (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1 Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support the body of the passengers when they are in the seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip when getting up from the seat. Holding and pulling the assist grip in the wrong way could break the grip and possibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to the assist grip. Doing so could break and damage the object.

6-11. Coat hook

Simple line drawing of a curved object with a small protrusion, possibly part of a device or component (no text or symbols)

A coat hook is attached to the rear passenger's assist grip.

Line drawing of a hanger with handle and frame, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

• Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or pointed objects on the coat hooks. Hang clothing directly on the coat hooks without using hangers.
• Before hanging clothing on the coat hooks, make sure there are no pointed objects in the pockets.

If these instructions are ignored, the following may occur in sudden stops or in a collision.

• Serious injuries by the items thrown through the cabin
• Incorrect SRS curtain airbag deployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the driver's view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

6-12. Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shoppi bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) more.

Top-down line drawing of a car backseat with two ventricular cutouts (no text or symbols)

A shopping bag hook is attached to each side of the cargo area.

6-13. Cargo area cover (if equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to protect contents from direct sunlight. This cover detachable to make room for additional cargo.

■ Using the cover

Technical line drawing of a car rearview structure with a highlighted section showing a gear or component (no text or symbols present)

To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the housing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stays while extending and re-winding the cover. Scratches on the stays could cause leakage of gas from the stays, which may result in their inability to hold the rear gate open.

■ To remove the cover housing ■ Stowage of the cargo area cover 1. Rewind the cover

1. Rewind the cover.

Top-down view of a car showing the rear intake compartment and internal component layout (no text or symbols)

1. Push the cover housing to the right, shorten the length of the cover.
2. Remove it from the retainer.

The cargo area cover can be stowed in under the cargo floor.

Technical diagram showing two views of a vehicle's internal compartments with no visible text or symbols

1 Straps

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo

floor board.

Technical line drawing of a car rear intake structure with no visible text or symbols

1. Shorten the cargo area cover, then stow it under the cargo area floor.
2. Put the cargo floor board back.

NOTE

To stow, insert the right end of the cover into the recess of floor. To take it out, lift up the left end of the cover, then pull it out from the recess.

To install the cover housing

1 2 3 601890

1 Cargo cover inner housing
2 Cargo cover outer housing
3 Cargo cover button

1. Hold the cover inner housing and outer housing. Press the cover housing button and lengthen the cover housing
2. Shorten the cover housing.

Diagram of a car interior showing a valve, seatbelt, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Insert both ends of the cover housing into the recesses of the retainers.

NOTE

Store the window-side seatbelt in the holder before using the cover housing

6-14. Cargo tie-down hooks

Top-down diagram of a car's front wheel and dashboard showing steering wheel (no text or symbols)

The cargo area is equipped with several tie-down hooks so that cargo can be secured with a cargo net or ropes. When using the tie-down hooks, turn them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are designed only for securing light cargo. Never try to secure cargo that exceeds the capacity of the hooks. The maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10 kg) per hook.

6-15. Under-floor storage compartment

CAUTION

• Always keep the lid of the under-floor storage compartment closed while driving to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stop or an accident.
• Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items in the under-floor storage compartment.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis with labeled components (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

1 Straps

The under-floor storage compartment is located under the floor of the cargo are and can be used to store small items. open the lid, pull the tab and keep the using the strap on the seatback.

6-16. Surround View Monitor (if equipped)

lid

Surround View Monitor is a feature that displays camera images on the center information display to allow the driver to check the blind spots of the vehicle. You can use it to check the area in the front of the vehicle, when starting the vehicle or while driving, and the area to the rear of the vehicle, when backing up. You can also use it to check your surroundings when parking the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely on only the Surround View Monitor when driving the vehicle. The image on the monitor screen may appear different from the vehicle's actual surroundings. If you drive the vehicle by viewing only the monitor image, a collision or an accident may occur. When driving the vehicle, always remain alert and the check the surrounding traffic directly and by using the mirrors.
• Do not use the Surround View Monitor in the following situations.

- You are driving on a dirt road

or a road covered in snow.

• The camera malfunctions (e.g. the lens or bracket is broken
• The outside mirrors are retracted.
• The front door is not fully closed.

- If the outside temperature is low, the monitor screen may become dark or the image may become dim. In particular, the image of moving object may appear distorted or disappear from the screen. Always remain alert and check the surrounding traffic directly when driving.

NOTE

If there is a Surround View Monitor system malfunction, an error message

“☒” or ☑” is displayed on the center information display. For details, refer to “Malfunctions of the center information display” ☑P467.

■ How to change the display Surround View Monitor

- When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, you can operate the select lever and the view monitor switch to display the image on the Surround View Monitor.

1 VIEW 602534

1 View monitor switch

of

Top-down diagram of a car inside a rectangular enclosure, showing front and side views with no text or symbols.

1 View icon

▼ Checking your surroundings while the vehicle is stopped

To display a 3D view of the vehicle's surroundings, press the view monitor switch when the select lever is in the position.

1 2 703020

1 Vehicle icon
2 Vehicle angle icon

When the 3D view is displayed, the display angle switches clockwise from the starting position. When the view returns to the starting position, the display angle stops switching. You can also switch the display angle by touching the vehicle angle icon on the screen.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View Monitor or change the screen to operate other functions, the next time the image is displayed, it will be displayed at the previously displayed angle.

▼ Checking the rearward

When the select lever is move to "R", the image in the rearward direction is displayed. Pressing the view monitor switch or touching the view icon while the image of the rear camera is displayed will switch the screen view.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> A
    B --> E["3"]
    E --> F["602570"]
    style A fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccc,stroke:#333

1 Original screen
2 Rear view screen/Top view screen/Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) screen
3 Rear view screen/Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) screen
4 Top view screen
→: Shift the select lever.
....: Touch the view icon or press the view

monitor switch.

NOTE

• If you turn off the Surround View Monitor or use it to operate another function, the next time the image is displayed, the previously displayed screen will be shown.
• When "Rear Camera Delay Control" is on, the rear-view image will be displayed on the center information display for a certain period of time after the select lever is shifted from the "R" position to another position (other than the "P" position). To turn the function on and off, refer to "General settings" P210.

▼ Checking the front

When the view monitor switch is pressed while the select lever is in the "N" or "D" position, the front view is displayed.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["602571"]
    style A fill:#ccc
    style B fill:#ccc
    style C fill:#ccc
    style D fill:#ccc
    style E fill:#ccc

1 Original screen
2 Top view screen
3 Left-side view screen/Right-side view screen/Front-top view screen
4 Front view screen/Front-top view screen
→: Press the view monitor switch.
....: Touch the view icon.

NOTE

If you turn off the Surround View Monitor or use it to operate another function, the next time the image is displayed, the previously displayed screen will be shown.

■ How to cancel Surround View Monitor

There are several ways to cancel Surround View Monitor.

▼ Manual cancellation

The Surround View Monitor will be canceled by either of the following operations.

• Press the view monitor switch until the original screen is displayed (when the select lever is other than the "R" position).
• Move the select lever to a position other than the "R" position (when the select lever is in the "R" position).
• Touch (car settings icon).
• Touch (HOME).
• Touch 📁 (driver profiles icon).

▼ Automatic cancellation

If any of the following conditions are met, the Surround View Monitor is canceled automatically.

- When the select lever is other than in the "R" position

- About 3 minutes have elapsed since you pressed the view monitor switch to access the Surround View Monitor.

- When the select lever is not in the "R" "P" position

• The vehicle accelerates to 13 mph (20 km/h) or more.
• You depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch to apply the parking brake.

- When the select lever is in the "D" or position

- The select lever is shifted to the position.

■ How to view the camera images

or R" 1 0 1 602535

P"1 Cameras

Line drawing of a car rear view with numbered annotations (1 and 602536), no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

1 Cameras

The camera image displays guiding lines that provide information on the distance and direction of travel of your vehicle, as well as information on any vehicles you are approaching.

CAUTION

• When you drive the vehicle, do not rely only on the guiding lines. Make sure that you check your surroundings directly.
• The position and other information provided by the guiding lines may differ from the actual distance of objects from the vehicle if it is tilting at an angle relative to the road surface due to the number of passengers or the distribution of cargo on board the vehicle.

NOTE

• Top view and rear view only: The display of the predicted course line linked to the steering angle can be turned on/off by operating "Steering Angle Lines" in the center information display. To turn the function on and off, refer to "General settings" P210.
• The camera image may be hard to see in the following situations. This

is not a malfunction.

• Vehicle surroundings are dark (such as at night).
• Ambient temperature outside the vehicle is high or low.
• There is water or humidity on lens (such as in rainy weather).
• There is foreign material (such as mud) on or near the camera.
• Sunlight or a headlight beam shines directly shines toward the camera lens.

- Under an artificial light such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lamp or mercury lamp, the lighted portion may appear to flicker (flick phenomenon).

• When the display is cold, the image may leave traces or become darker than usual, causing a difficulty in viewing the screen. When driving your vehicle, make sure that you check your surroundings directly for traffic.
• The following conditions may affect the appearance of the screen, but any resulting image distortion on the screen does not indicate a malfunction.

- When humidity is high on a day, the camera lens becomes foggy.

• When driving at night, the light The 3D view displays the area around the from a vehicle or building located vehicle.
  ahead shines in the direction the camera.
• When the vehicle is in a dark place or when driving at night, camera image may be adjusted as make image noise less visible.

Therefore, the image may look like a monochromatic image or the image colors may differ from the actual colors. The image sharpness in the center and in the four corners of the screen may differ. This is not a malfunction.

k 3D view

ge er 1 or the ic- 703020

2 Vehicle icon Vehicle angle icon

of▼ Top view

the to 2 2 1 2 703026

1 Vehicle icon
2 Predicted course line*
*: When the select lever is in the "R" position.

The top view displays an image of the vehicle's surroundings from above the vehicle. This view is useful for checking the vehicle's surroundings when you are driving.

▼ Front view

1 703027

1 Guiding lines

The guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of your vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

▼ Side view

1 2 3 1 2 3 3 703028

1 Front-of-vehicle guiding line
2 Side-of-vehicle guiding line
3 Center-of-front-tire guiding line

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

▼ Rear view

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 602572

1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2 Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line)
3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line)
4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line)
5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line)
6 Vehicle centerline
7 Dynamic guidelines

The help lines are a guide to help you judge distances based on the screen image.

■ Range of Surround View Monitor

A

B

5 6 7 5 8 5

703034

A Camera to be used
B Range of displayed image
1 Front camera
2 Side camera (right-hand side)
3 Rear camera
4 Side camera (left-hand side)
5 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the vehicle
6 Vehicle overall length
7 Approx. 8 ft (2.5 m) from the vehicle
8 Vehicle overall width

WARNING

The range that can be viewed with the camera is limited. Always make sure that you check your surroundings directly when the vehicle is in

motion and proceed slowly. If you not, it may cause an accident or injury.

NOTE

• The range of the displayed image may differ depending on the status of your vehicle or of the road surface.
• Because the Surround View Monitor system uses a specially designed lens, the sense of distance in the displayed image is different from t actual distance.

■ Using the camera

CAUTION

Obey the following instructions to prevent a system malfunction.

• Do not apply any strong impact to the camera such as by hitting it with an object. Striking the camera can change the mounting angle.
• The camera unit is a waterproof structure. Do not attempt to remove, disassemble or modify the unit.

do Do not vigorously rub the camera lens or polish it using a hard brush or abrasive compounds. The lens may be scratched, which can affect the camera image.
- The camera lens is made of glass or plastic. Do not allow any organic solvent, body wax, oil film remover or glass coating agent to become attached on the lens surface. If any becomes attached, remove it immediately.
- Do not expose the camera lens any sudden temperature change such as spraying hot water on in cold weather.
- Do not apply the water jet of a high pressure washer to the camera or the surrounding area when cleaning the vehicle. The force of the water pressure can dislodge the camera. Also, water may enter inside the camera and cause a malfunction.
- If the camera is exposed to any impact, it can lead to a malfunction. Have the camera inspected by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use a steam cleaner un any circumstances. Some types of steam cleaners inject hot steam.
• The camera surface may be damaged by a flying stone.

NOTE

If the camera lens is covered in dirt, system will not be able to produce a sharp image. If there is foreign mater on the camera, such as water drops, snow or mud, clean it with water and wipe away any moisture with a soft cloth. If the camera is heavily soiled, wash it using a neutral detergent.

e6-17. Rear view camera

the rial d 602556

A rear view camera is attached to the gate. When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the select lever is set "R", the rear view camera automatically displays the rear view image behind the vehicle on the center information display.

WARNING

• Since the rear view camera uses wide-angle lens, the image on the monitor is different from the actual view in terms of distance.
• Since the range of the image on the monitor is limited, always check the rear view and the surrounding area with your eyes

and mirrors, and move backward at a slow speed. Moving backward only by checking the rear view image from the camera could cause an accident.

- Do not disassemble or modify the camera, switch or wiring. If smoke comes out or you smell a strange odor, stop using the rear view camera immediately. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection. Continued use may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

CAUTION

• When washing your vehicle with a high-pressure washer, do not allow water to touch the camera directly. Entry of water in the camera lens may result in condensation, malfunction, fire or electric shock.
• Since the camera is a precision device, do not subject it to strong impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, fire or electric shock may occur.
• If mud or snow sticks to or is frozen on the camera, you must be very careful when removing it.

Otherwise, damage to the camera may cause a fire or electric shock. Pour water or lukewarm water over the camera to remove mud and ice, and wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.

• Do not put a flame close to the camera or wiring. Otherwise, damage or fire may occur.
• When replacing the fuse, be sure to use a fuse with the specified rating. Use of a fuse with a different rating may result in a malfunction.
• If you use the rear view camera for a long time while the engine not operated, the battery may become completely discharged.

NOTE

• Do not wipe the camera with alcohol benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with a diluted neutral detergent. Then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
  mol, functions of the center information e, display" P467.

- When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with a diluted view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other positions, the image before setting to "R" is displayed.

neutral detergent to remove the w • The camera lens has a hard coat to help prevent scratches. However e when washing the vehicle or clear ing the camera lens, be careful n

scratch the camera lens. Do not a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate.

- Strong light shined on the camera lens may develop vertical lines around the light source. This is a malfunction.

- Under the fluorescent light, the display may flicker. However, this is a malfunction.

- The image of the rear view camera may be slightly different from the actual color of the objects.

- If there is a malfunction on the c information display, refer to "Mal-

^th How to use the rear view camera

When the select lever is set to "R", the view camera automatically displays the rear view image from the vehicle. When the lever is set to other positions, the image before setting to "R" is displayed.

vak. Set the ignition switch to "ON". ng. Set the select lever to "R".

NOTE

The image of the rear view camera is horizontally reversed as is the case with the vehicle inside mirror or the outside mirror.

• When "Rear Camera Delay Control" is on, the rear view image will be displayed on the center information of display for a certain period of time after the select lever is shifted to a position other than the "P" position from "R". To turn the function on an off, refer to "General settings" P210.
• It may be difficult to see the image of the rear view camera in the following cases. This is not a malfunction of the camera.

- The vehicle is in a dark place (at night, in a tunnel, etc.).

- The vehicle is in an extremely hot or cold place.

- An object (such as raindrops, snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the view of the rear view camera sticks to the lens of the camera.

- Strong light is shining directly on the camera lens (occasionally,

- CONTINUED -

there are vertical lines on the screen).

■ Viewing range on the screen

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed with the rear view camera is limited. Always be sure to check with your eyes when moving backward and proceed slowly. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

Side view line drawing of a car on an inclined ramp with a vertical post (no text or symbols)

Range of view

Top-down diagram of a car with a road and traffic cone, no text or symbols present

Range of view

Pure technical diagram of a mechanical or structural component with no text, numbers, or symbols

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumper can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the

bumper and areas just under the bumper cannot be viewed.

Also, the image from the rear view camera looks shorter than the actual distance.

Diagram of a car being struck by an explosion, with a vertical barrier and triangular load (no text or symbols)

Range of view

Pure technical diagram showing a cylindrical component inserted into a curved channel, with no text or symbols present.

The image from camera The area above the camera cannot be viewed. If there is an object that has a wide

projection on its upper part such as a pole behind the vehicle, the projection cannot be seen on the screen.

■ Help lines

The help lines are a guide to help you realize the actual distance from the screen image.

NOTE

If you shift to the "R" range within several seconds after turning on the ignition switch, the warning message may not be displayed. Wait for seven seconds after turning on the ignition switch before shifting to the "R" rad. Then, the warning message will be displayed.

sign 1 2 3 4 5 + 6 7 Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 702392

Help lines

^a1 Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2. Approx. 10 ft (3 m) from the bumper (green horizontal line)
3 Approx. 6 ft (2 m) from the bumper (gree horizontal line)
4 Approx. 3 ft (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line)
5 Approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizontal line)
6 Vehicle centerline
7 Dynamic guidelines

When the select lever is set to "R", the monitor screen displays the help lines together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

- When moving backward, always check the back with your eyes without relying on the help line

Otherwise, it may cause an accident or injury.

• The actual position may be different from the indication of the help lines.
• Differences may occur due to the number of passengers or the loaded cargo.
• When the vehicle is on a slope or inclined against the road, the indication is different from the actual position.

NOTE

When "Steering Angle Lines" is off, the dynamic guidelines will be disappeared on the center information display. To turn the dynamic guidelines on and off, refer to "General settings" P210.

▼ Difference between screen image and actual road

The distance markers show the distance for a level road when the vehicle is not loaded. It may be different from the actual distance depending on the loading conditions or road conditions.

When there is an upward slope at When there is a downward slope Feature of distance marker the back at the back

702955-M

1 3 ft (1 m)

702956-M

1 3 ft (1 m)

2 1 702823

1 3 ft (1 m) line
2 10 ft (3 m) line

The distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance.

The distance on the screen looks nearer than the actual distance.

NOTE

When cargo is loaded, the rear view distance on the screen looks farther than the actual distance as in an upward slope.

The distance marker shows the distance on the road. If there is a car or another object close behind, distance cannot be correctly displayed.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Starting and operating

7-1. Fuel 337

Fuel requirements.... 337

Fuel filler lid and cap 338

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only).... 342

7-3. Preparing to drive.... 343

7-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 344

Starting engine 344

Stopping the engine 345

Steering lock 345

7-5. Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system).... 346

Safety precautions.... 346

Operating range for push-button start system .....

Starting engine 346

Stopping engine 348

When access key fob does not operate properly.... 348

Steering lock 349

7-6. Remote engine start system (dealer option).... 349

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) 350

Alternate operation method for models with "keyless access with push-button start system".... 353

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start (models without "keyless access with push-button start system"). 353

Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start (models with "keyless access with push-button start system"). 354

Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shutdown.... 354

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the vehicle 354

Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver).... 354

System maintenance 355

Certification for remote engine starter 356

7-7. Continuously variable transmission .....357

Continuously variable transmission features ..... 357 Select lever ..... 358

Selection of manual mode 359

Shift lock function.... 361

Driving tips 362

3467-8. Power steering....362

Power steering warning light 362

Power steering system features 362

7-9. Braking....363

Braking tips 363

Brake system 364 and Disc brake pad wear warning indicators

7-10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) \$65

ABS self-check 366

ABS warning light 366

7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system....366

If EBD system malfunctions 366

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system ......367

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor...... 368

To turn on/off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.... 368

Starting and operating

7-13. X-MODE 369

To activate/deactivate X-MODE....370

Hill descent control function 372

7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 373

7-15. Parking your vehicle.... 374

Electronic parking brake 374

Parking tips 379

7-16. Hill start assist system.... 380

7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equipped) 382

System features.... 382

System operation 385

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer 386

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator 388

BSD/RCTA warning indicator....388

To turn on/off the BSD/RCTA.... 389

Certification for the BSD/RCTA.... 389

Handling of radar sensors 390

7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system (if equipped) 391

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system overview 392

Operating conditions.... 394

Sonar Audible Alarm function.... 397

Automatic Braking function operation 399

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system operation 400

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system ON/OFF setting 401

RAB warning indicator 401

Handling of the sonar sensors 402

7-19. Driver Monitoring System (if equipped) .....402

User recognition function.... 406

Inattentive/drowsy driving warning 408

Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning ..... 409

Using the Driver Monitoring System 410

Registering and deleting a user 412

Registering and deleting driver position personalization 412

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF settings..... 412

How to get the source code using the Open Source 413

7-1. Fuel

CAUTION

• Use of a fuel which is low in quality or use of an inappropriate fuel additive may cause damage to the engine and/or fuel system.
• Some gas stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, off fuels posted as regular octane gasoline with an octane rating below 87 AKI (90 RON). Use of those fuels is not recommended

■ Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using unleaded gasoline with an octane ratio of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

NOTE

When towing a trailer, SUBARU recommends using unleaded gasoline with octane rating of 91 AKI (95 RON) higher to reduce the risk of engine overheat.

▼ Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill when you accelerate. Contact your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

▽ RON

This octane rating is the Research Octar Number.

▼ AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).

▼ Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline be used because it will damage the emission control system and may impair driveability and fuel economy

an▼Reformulated gasoline

SUBARU supports the use of reformulate gasoline when available. Reformulated gasoline has been blended to burn more cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.

pe▼ MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If you use such fuels, your emission control system performance may deteriorate and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light may turn on. If this happens, return to your authorized SUBARU dealer for service. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

-▼ Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your engine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a way of doing your port for cleaner air. If you continuously use high-quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should contain no more than

- CONTINUED -

15% ethanol for the proper operation of your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains more than 15% ethanol, including from pump labeled, E30, E50 or E85 (which only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU approves the use of reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains you should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as explained in the following description.

• Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that specified in this manual.
• Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by sufficient quantities of the

proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.

• If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
• Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because fu may damage the paint, be sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by spilled fu is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

■ Fuel filler lid and cap

Locations of the fuel filler lid

Line drawing of a car showing the side profile and rear door mechanism (no text or symbols)

or▼ Refueling

only one person should be involved in refueling. Do not allow others to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions that are posted at the service station.

1. Before refueling, stop the vehicle, then turn off the ignition switch to turn off all the electrical components. At this time, the fuel filler lid also unlocks.

NOTE

When you lock the door, the fuel filler lid also locks. To unlock the fuel filler

lid, perform one of the operations below.

• Press the unlock button on the key fob.

• Press the unlock side of the power door locking switch.

• Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid

• The fuel filler lid opens automatically. Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap, first touch the vehicle body or a metal portion of the fuel pump or similar object to discharge any static electricity that may be present of your body. If your body is carrying an electrostatic charge, there is a possibility that an electric spark could ignite the fuel, which could burn you. To avoid acquiring a new static electric charge, do not get back into the vehicle while refueling is in progress.

1 2 702074

1 Open
2 Close

-4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning on slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

• Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position first and then close all vehicle doors and windows. Make sure that there are no lighted cigarettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area. Only handle fuel outdoors. Quickly wipe up any spilled fuel.
• When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left. Do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck, especially in hot weather. If you hear a hissing sound while you are removing the cap, wait for the sound to stop and then slowly open the cap to prevent fuel from spraying out and creating a fire hazard.

Mechanical diagram showing two connected components with a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

- When refueling, insert the fuel nozzle securely into the fuel filler pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

- CONTINUED -

fully inserted, its automatic stopping mechanism may not function, causing fuel to overflow the tank and creating a fire hazard.

- Stop refueling when the automatic stop mechanism on the fuel nozzle activates. If you continue to add fuel, temperature changes or other conditions may cause fuel to overflow from the tank and create a fire hazard

1. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler pump automatically stops. Do not add any more fuel.
2. Put the cap back on and turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise. B certain not to catch the tether under t cap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

1. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately.

Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged.

NOTE

• You will see the “” sign in the gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler lid is located on the right's the vehicle.
  If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks or if the tether is under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light may illuminate. Refer to "CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light" P176.
  BeTo lock the fuel filler lid, perform the of the operations below. However these operations are performed when the fuel filler lid is open, fuel filler lid will not lock when it is subsequently closed.

- Press the lock/arm button on key fob.

- Press the lock side of the p door locking switch.

- When the doors are locked or unlocked using the automatic door lock system, the fuel filler lid will be locked or unlocked at the same t

CAUTION

• Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
• After refueling, turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If the cap is not securely tightened, fuel may leak out while the vehicle is being driven or fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.
• Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Because one fuel may damage the paint, be if sure to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly. Paint damage caused by the spilled fuel is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
  ● Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting and your fuel tank and emission control system may be damaged. It could also lead to fuel spillage and a fire. ● Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine. Continuing to operate your vehicle at an extremely low fuel level may result in a reduction of engine performance.

could

▼ If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due to malfunction or a dead battery, it can be opened from the cargo area.

Diagram showing a car door handle with a directional arrow and connector, alongside a numbered section view.

1. Remove the access cover at the right-side of the cargo area trim using a flathead screwdriver.

ould ed to 1 702240

1 Clip

1. Remove the orange knob from the clip.

Technical line drawing of a car interior showing a door, seat, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Pull the orange knob, then the fuel filler lid will be unlocked.

2. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.

3. The fuel filler lid will open slightly. Then, open it further by hand.

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer when testing an All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must NEVER be performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or injuries to persons nearby.

CAUTION

• At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service station in advance not place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.
• Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states have Inspection/Maintenance programs to inspect your vehicle's emission control system. If your vehicle does not pass this test, some states may deny renewal of your vehicle's registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the performance of the engine's emission control system. Certified emission inspectors will inspect the On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as part of the state emission inspection process. The OBDII system is designed to detect engine and transmission problems that might cause the vehicle emissions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII inspections apply to all 1996 model year and newer passenger cars and trucks. Over 30 states plus the District of Columbia have implemented emission inspection of the OBDII system.

• The inspection of the OBDII system consists of a visual operational check of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light/malfunction indicator light (MIL) and an examination of the OBDII system with an electronic scan tool.
• A vehicle passes the OBDII system inspection if proper operation of the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is

observed, there are no stored diagnostic trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness monitors are all complete.

• A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if the "CHECK ENGINE" warning light is not properly operating (light is illuminated or is not working due to faulty LED [Light Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more diagnostic trouble codes stored in the vehicle's computer.
• A state emission inspection may reject (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of OBDII system readiness monitors "NOT READY" is greater than one. If the vehicle's battery has been recently replaced or disconnected, the OBDII system inspection may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for the emission test. Under this condition, the vehicle driver should be instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few days to reset the readiness monitors and return for an emission re-inspection.
• Owners of rejected or failing vehicles should contact their SUBARU dealer for service.

Some states still use dynamometers in their emission inspection program. A dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your vehicle's wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being on a dynamometer, tell your emission inspector not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel dynamometers in their emission testing program have EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing program that involves a two-wheel dynamometer. There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing program. When properly used, this equipment should not damage a SUBARU AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected in an attempt to bypass AWD for state emission testing. An AWD vehicle must be tested using an AWD dynamometer with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

ut7-3. Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day before you start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for pro inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign leaks.
4. Check that no small animals enter the engine compartment.
5. Check that the hood and rear gate are fully closed.
6. Check the adjustment of the seat.
7. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
9. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position
10. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment or under the vehicle before starting the engine.

NOTE

• Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops. • When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer hitch (dealer option)” P431

7-4. Starting and stopping t engine (models without push button start system)

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 10 seconds. If the engine fails to start operating the starter for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10 seconds or more before trying again.

NOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle's self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the "ON" position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.

th Starting engine

General precautions when starting engine

WARNING

- Never start the engine from outside the vehicle (except when using the remote engine start system). It may result in an accident.

- Do not leave the engine running in locations with poor ventilation such as a garage and indoors. The exhaust gas may enter the vehicle or indoors, and it may result in carbon monoxide poisoning.

- Do not start the engine near dry foliage, paper, or other flammab substances. The exhaust pipe and exhaust emissions can create a fire hazard at high temperatures.

CAUTION

- If the engine is stopped while driving, the catalyst may overheat and burn.

- When starting the engine, be sure to sit in the driver's seat (except when using the remote engine start system).

NOTE

• Avoid rapid racing and rapid acceleration immediately after the engine has started.
  After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
• On rare occasions, it may be difficult to start the engine depending on the fuel and the usage condition (repeated driving of a distance in which the engine has not warmed up sufficiently). In such a case, it is recommended that you change to a different brand of fuel.
  On rare occasions, transient knocking may be heard from the engine when the accelerator is operated rapidly such as a rapid start-up and a rapid acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
• The engine starts more easily when the headlights, air conditioner and rear window defogger are turned off.

• Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
• Shift the select lever to the "P" or "N" position (preferably the "P" position). The starter motor will only operate when the select lever is at the "P" or "N" position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position and check the operation of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to "Warning and indicator lights" P172.
• Turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has started. If the engine does not start, try the following procedure.
  (1) Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. After checking that the parking brake is firmly set, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position while depres-ssing the accelerator pedal slightly (approximately a quarter of the full stroke). Release the accelerator pedal as soon as the engine starts.
  (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch back to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and wait for at least 10 seconds. Then fully

depress the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the "START" position. If the engine starts, quickly release the accelerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn the ignition switch again to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. After waiting for 10 seconds or longer, turn the ignition switch to the "START" position without depressing the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still does not start, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer for assistance.

1. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have turned off after the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the idle speed as the engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make it that the select lever is in the "P" or "N" position and that the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the select lever into the "N" position. Do not attempt to place the select lever of a moving vehicle into the "P" position.

Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off only when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster, making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in accidental activation of the "LOCK"/"OFF" position on the ignition switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.

■ Steering lock

After stopping the engine and the key is removed from ignition switch, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steer lock will be automatically released.

▼ When the steering lock cannot be released

When you cannot unlock the steering wheel, perform the following steps.

1. Check that the parking brake is applied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in "P" position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position while turning the steering wheel left and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel doing the steps, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

9-5. Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

■ Safety precautions

Refer to "Safety precautions" OF P118.

■ Operating range for push-button start system

Refer to "Operating range for push-button the start system" P166.

■ Starting engine

WARNING

• There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "Starting engine" P344.
• If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering is still locked, and may result in an accident.

CAUTION

• When the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in orange, there may be a malfunction with the vehicle. Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If the indicator on the push-button ignition switch is flashing in green after the engine has started, it means that the steering is still locked. Depress the brake pedal while moving the steering wheel to the right and left, and press the push-button ignition switch.
• Do not continue pushing the push-button ignition switch for more than 10 seconds. Doing so could cause a malfunction. If the engine does not start, stop pushing the push-button ignition switch. Instead, press the push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to switch the power status to "OFF". Wait 10 seconds, and then push the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

NOTE

• After the engine starts, the engine speed will be kept high.
- When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine starter operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. After starting the engine, the starter stops automatically.
- When the push-button ignition switch is pressed while depressing the brake pedal, the engine can be started regardless of the status of the push-button ignition switch.
- If the security indicator light illuminates when you attempt to start engine but the engine does not press the push-button ignition switch to switch the power to "OFF" and then try to start the engine again.
- If the engine does not start, press push-button ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal to swi the power to "OFF". Then, while depressing the brake pedal more forcefully, press the push-button ignition switch.
- The engine start procedures may function depending on the radio wave conditions around the vehicle. In such a case, refer to "Starting

engine" P465.

• It may be difficult to start the engine when the battery has been disconnected and reconnected (for maintenance or other purposes). This difficulty is caused by the electronically controlled throttle's self-diagnosis function. To overcome it, keep the ignition switch in the "position for approximately 10 seconds before starting the engine.
  If the vehicle battery is discharged the steering cannot be unlocked. Charge the battery.
• Do not shift the select lever while the starter is cranking.

start, the witch 1 ENGINE START STOP 2 not 703046

1 Operation indicator le. 2 Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is impressed while depressing the brake pedal, -the engine will start. The starting procedure for the engine is as follows.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the driver's seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
   3 Shift the select lever into the "P" position. The engine can also start when the select lever is in the "N" position, however, for safety reasons, start in the "P" position.
3. Depress the brake pedal until the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green. When starting with the select lever in the position, the indicator does not turn green.
4. While depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch

NOTE

• While pressing the select lever button in, the indicator on the push button ignition switch will not turn green even when the select lever is in the "P" position.
• In case the engine does not start by the normal engine start procedure, move the select lever to the "P" position, and switch the power to

"ACC". Depress the brake pedal, and press the push-button ignition switch for at least 15 seconds. The engine may start. Only use this engine start procedure in case of emergency.

- When the engine is not started, the brake pedal may feel stiff. In such case, depress the brake pedal more forcefully than usual. Check that the operation indicator on the push-button ignition switch turns green, and press the push-button ignition switch to start the engine.

■ Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the "P" position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch. The engine will stop, and the power be switched off.

WARNING

- Do not touch the push-button ignition switch during driving. When the push-button ignition switch is operated as follows, the engine will stop.

- The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

- The switch is pressed briefly times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake booster will not function. A greater foot pressure will be required on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will not operate either. A greater force will be required to steer, and it may result in an accident.
- If the engine stops during driving, do not operate the push-button ignition switch or open any of the doors until the vehicle is stopped in a safe location. It is dangerous because the steering lock may be activated. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and contact a SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

• Do not stop the engine while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.
• If the engine is stopped while the select lever is in a position other than the "P" position, the power will be in "ACC". If the vehicle

left in this condition, the battery may be discharged.

Push Two More to Stop

uNOTE

be If you press the push-button ignition switch while driving, the emergency engine stop interrupt screen alerts the driver by messages on the combination meter display (color LCD) and beeps.
- Although you can stop the engine by operating the push-button ignition switch, do not stop the engine during driving except in an emergency.

When access key fob does not operate properly

Refer to "Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly" P464.

■ Steering lock

After stopping the engine and any door including the rear gate is opened, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function.

When the engine is restarted, the steer lock will be automatically released.

▼ When the steering lock cannot be released

1 ENGINE START STOP 2 703046

1 Operation indicator
2 Push-button ignition switch

When you cannot restart the engine due to the steering lock, check the status of operation indicator and perform the following steps.

▽ Operation indicator flashing in green

1. Check that the select lever is set in "P" position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it
3. Press the push-button ignition switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

▽ Operation indicator flashing in orange

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock function. Immediately contact your nearest SUBARU dealer.

7-6. Remote engine start system (dealer option)

the

WARNING

- There are some general precautions when starting the engine. Carefully read the precautions described in "General precautions when starting engine" P344.

Do not remote start a vehicle in an enclosed environment (e.g. closed garage). Prolonged operation of a motor vehicle in an enclosed environment can cause a harmful build-up of carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is harmful to your health. Exposure to high levels of carbon monoxide can cause headaches, dizziness or in extreme cases unconsciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. In addition, the remote engine start system can activate the heater or air conditioner, providing you with a comfortable cabin upon entry. For more details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the re-

- CONTINUED -

mote engine start system.

NOTE

• The length of time for which it is acceptable to allow the engine to remain idling may be bound by laws and regulations. Check the local rules when using the remote engine start system.
• When taking your vehicle in for service, it is recommended that y inform the service personnel that your vehicle is equipped with a remote engine start system.

■ Remote engine starter trans ceiver (fob)

1 701909

1 Fob button

▼ Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate and the engine hood must be close prior to activating the remote engine start system. Any open entry point prevent starting or cause the engine stop. For models with push-button's system, doors must also be locked prior to remote engine start activation

The remote engine start system is activated by pressing the fob button on you remote engine starter transceiver (fob) twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is with operating range of the system and the request is received, the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps once.
• The horn sounds once.
• The side marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights flash once.

The system will check certain safety preconditions before starting, and if all conditions are met, the engine will start within 5 seconds. After the engine starts the following will occur.

• The fob flashes and beeps twice.
  • The horn sounds once.
  ● The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote engine start system, the following will occur.

The side marker lights, tail lights, and will parking lights remain illuminated. The fob button flashes once every 3 seconds.

• The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start (or starts and stalls) the remote engine start system will power off and then attempt to start the engine 3 additional times. The system will not attempt to start the engine if it determines a vehicle malfunction is preventing starting. If the engine does not start after 3 additional attempts, the remote engine start request will be aborted.

▼ Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least 3 seconds to stop the engine. The fob will flash and beep three times, indicating the engine has stopped. If the stop request is not received (for example, if the user is too far away from the vehicle), the fob will continue to flash once every 3 seconds. The system will automatically stop the engine after 15 minutes.

▼ Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the remote engine start system will prevent starting (or stop the engine if running) and sound the horn twice if any of the following conditions is detected. In addition, the fob will flash and beep 3 times.

• The total run-time has exceeded 20 minutes.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• A key is in the ignition switch.
• The engine hood is open.
• The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500 rpm.
• The security alarm is triggered.
• The select lever is not in the "P" position.

If the system detects any door (including the rear gate) open during operation, it prevent starting or stop the engine (for models without push-button start system) and sound the horn and flash side mark lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 tim

In addition to the items above, if the vehicle's engine management system determines there is a safety risk due to vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will power down and the horn will sound 3 times.

NOTE

- If the alarm system is armed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on using the combination meter is flashing), the alarm system will remain armed throughout the remote start run cycle.

- If the alarm system is disarmed at the time of remote engine starter activation (the security indicator light on the combination meter is not flashing), the alarm system will remain disarmed throughout the remote start run cycle.

▼ Remote start operation - fob confirmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a bidirectional transceiver that can confirm will system operation with several different visual and audible indications. The fob's LED-backlit button and internal piezo fuzzer will indicate status of the system using the following flash and beep sequences, provided the fob is within operational range of the system.

Precondition	Fob Indication		Meaning
	Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed	Continuous while button is held down	— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob button twice within 3 sec	1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
	2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
Engine idling by remote engine start operation	1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
	3 flashes 3 beeps		Engine stopped by system time-out or for safety reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and holding fob button for at least 3 sec	3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
	1 flash every 3 sec —		Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

Alternate operation method for models with "keyless a cess with push-button start system"

1 701405

Access key fob

1 Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the remote engine start transmitter. Operate the lock button to start or stop the eng as follows.

▼ Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start system to start the engine, confirm the following conditions.

• The select lever is in the "P" position.
• All doors including the rear gate are closed.

• The engine hood is closed.
- The push-button ignition switch is in the "OFF" position.

▼ When starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine start system, briefly press the lock button twice within 2 seconds, then press and hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The hazard warning flashers then flash once and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button briefly again. The hazard warning flashers then flash once again, and the keyless buzzer chirps once again
3. After step 2, immediately press and hold the lock button. The hazard warning flashers then flash three times, and the horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3 release the lock button. The engine then start successfully.

▼ When stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop engine with remote engine start system.

▼ Remote start safety features

For detailed information, refer to "Remote start safety features" P351.

■ Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote start (models without "keyless access with push-button start system")

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating the remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either of the following procedures to disarm the alarm system. Refer to "Alarm system" P142.

• Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "ON" pue position.

• Press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

• Enter the vehicle. The engine will shut down when any door or rear gate is he opened.

• Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the "START" position to restart the engine.

- Entering the vehicle while it running via remote start (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the keyless access function and remote keyless entry system.

NOTE

If the vehicle's doors are unlocked manually using the key, the vehicle's alarm system will trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior to activating remote engine start system) and the engine will turn off. Perform either the following procedures to disarm alarm system. Refer to "Alarm syste P142.

• Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ACC" or "ON" position.

• Press any button on the acce key fob.

• Enter the vehicle. The engine will remain running provided the access key fob is present and detected by vehicle.

• Press the push-button ignition switch once while depressing the brake pe before driving your vehicle. The rem

t is engine starter transceiver (fob) will flash and beep 3 times to indicate that the remote start system has been shut down.

■ Entering the vehicle following remote engine start shut-down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle opened by the remote keyless entry transmitter within a few seconds immediately following remote engine start shutdown.

the ■ Pre-heating or pre-cooling of the interior of the vehicle After the system starts the engine, the heater or air conditioning will activate and heat or cool the interior to a set interior temperature of 72°F (22°C), with automatic selected for all other settings.
■ Remote transmitter program (Remote engine starter transceiver)

New transmitters can be programmed to the remote engine start system in the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, damaged or additional transmitters are adesired (the system will accept up to ei transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed according to the following procedure.

ut. Open the driver's door (the driver's door must remain open throughout the entire process).
9. Turn the ignition switch to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", back to "ON" then "LOCK"/"OFF", then back to "ON" again and leave the ignition "ON" throughout the programming process.
3. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn three times, indicating that the system has entered the transmitter learn mode.
4. Press and release the 🔒 button on the transmitter that you want to program.
5. The system will flash the side marker lights, tail lights and parking lights and honk the horn one time, indicating that the system has learned the transmitter. Upon successful programming, the remote start confirmation transmitter button will flash one time.
6. Repeat step 5 for any additional transmitters (the system will accept up to eight transmitters).
7. The system will exit the transmitter ht learn mode if the key is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the door is

closed or after 2 minutes.

■ System maintenance NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver: In the event that the vehicle's batter replaced, discharged or disconnected, it will be necessary to start the veh minimum of one time using the key prior to activating the remote engine start system. This is required to allow the vehicle electronic systems to re-synchronize.

▼ Changing the battery

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water g or in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to damage the printed circuit board in the remote engine start transmitter when replacing the battery.

• Be careful not to allow children touch the battery and any removed parts; children could swallow them.

• There is a danger of explosion in an incorrect replacement battery is used. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery.

• Battery should not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

For models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

Perform the procedure described in "Replacing battery of access key fob" P517 For remote engine starter transceiver: The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450) supplied in your remote engine start transmitter should last approximately one year, depending on usage. When the battery begin to weaken, you will notice a decrease in range (distance from the vehicle that your remote control operates). Follow the instructions below to change the remote engine start transmitter battery.

to

Line drawing of a car's door and handle with a curved tool inserted (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the small phillips screw located on the back side lower left corner of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start transmitter halves apart using a smart flat-head screwdriver.

Line drawing of two open containers with internal compartments and a handle, no text or symbols present

701911

- CONTINUED -

CR-2450 701912

1. Remove the circuit board from the bottom half of the case and remove the battery and replace with new one Be sure to observe the (+) sign on old battery before removing it to ensure that the new battery is inserted properly (battery “+” should be pointed away from the transmitter circuit board on battery).
2. Carefully snap the case halves back together, reinstall the phillips screw and test the remote engine start system.

■ Certification for remote engine starter
▼ U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

REMARQUE

7-7. Continuously variable transmission

WARNING

Do not shift from the "P" or "N" position into the "D" or "R" position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

- Observe the following precautions. Otherwise, the transmission could be damaged.

- Shift into the "P" or "R" position only after the vehicle has completely stopped.

- Do not shift from the "D" position into the "R" position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely stopped.

- Do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the "N" or "P" position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

- Never move the vehicle as follows. Doing so may result in a unexpected accident or malfunction.

- Moving rearward by inertia with the select lever set in forward driving position.

- Moving forward by inertia with the select lever set in the position.

- When parking the vehicle, first securely apply the parking brake and then place the select lever the "P" position. Do not park for long time with the select lever any other position as doing so could result in a dead battery.

■ Continuously variable transmission features

The continuously variable transmission is electronically controlled and provides an infinite number of forward speeds and 1 reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.

NOTE

- When the engine coolant temperature is still low, the transmission shift at higher engine speeds than when the coolant temperature is

an

sufficiently high in order to shorten the warm-up time and improve driveability. The gearshift timing will automatically shift to the normal timing after the engine has warmed up.

- Immediately after transmission fluid is replaced, you may feel that the transmission operation is somewhat unusual. This results from invalidation of data which the on-board computer has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission in to shift at the most appropriate time:

for for the current condition of your in vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle continues to be driven for a while.

- When driving under continuous heavy load conditions such as when towing a camper or climbing a lang, steep hill, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may automatically be reduced. This is not a malfunction. This results from the engine control function maintaining the cooling performance of the vehicle. The engine and vehicle speed will return to a normal speed when the engine will be able to maintain the optimum cooling performance after the heavy load decreases. Driving under a heavy load must be performed with ex-

- CONTINUED -

treme care. Do not try to pass a vehicle in front when driving on uphill slope while towing.

- The continuously variable transmission is a chain type system that provides superior transmission efficiency for maximum fuel economy. At times, depending on varying driving conditions, a chain operating sound may be heard that is characteristic of this type of syste

■ Select lever

▼ Select lever positions

1 701374

1 Select lever button

an

graph TD
    P["Point P"] --> R["Point R"]
    R --> N["Point N"]
    N --> M["Point M"]
    M --> D["Point D"]
    style P fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style R fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style N fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style M fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style D fill:#fff,stroke:#000

700878

→: With the brake pedal depressed, shift while pressing the select lever button in.
→: Shift while pressing the select lever button in.
→: Shift without pressing the select lever button.

The select lever has four positions, "P", "R", "N", "D" and it also has the "M" po for using the manual mode.

NOTE

• For some models, to protect the engine while the select lever is in the "P" or "N" position, the engine controlled so that the engine spe may not become too high even if accelerator pedal is depressed ha
• When you change the select lever position, make sure to move the

select lever firmly to the selected position.

▼ P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine. In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the parking brake firmly, then shift to the "P" position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the "P" position to any other position, you should depress the brake pedal fully then move the select lever. This prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.

▼ R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To shift from the "N" to "R" position, stop the vehicle completely then move the lever to the "R" position while pressing the select lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned to the "ACC" position, the movement of the select lever from the "N" to "R" position is only possible by depressing the brake pedal. For details, refer to "Shift lock function" P361.

▼ N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled engine. In this position, the transmission neutral, meaning that the wheels and transmission are not locked. Therefore, the vehicle will roll freely, even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in neutral. Engine braking has no effect in this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the select lever in the "N" position. Engine braking has no effect in the condition and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.

▼ D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The transmission shifts automatically and continuously into a suitable gear according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require. Also, while driving up and down a hill, the transmission assists and controls the driving performance and engine braking while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in "D" position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. Transmission will automatically downshift. In this case, the transmission will operate like a conventional automatic transmission. When you release the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.

If one of the shift paddles behind the steering wheel is operated while driving in the "D" position, the transmission will temporarily switch to the manual mode. In this mode, you can shift to any gear position using the shift paddles. For details about the manual mode, refer to "Selection of manual mode" P359. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes, the transmission is still switch from the manual mode back to the "D" position for normal driving.

Selection of manual mode

Line drawing of a hand inserting a plug into a device (no text or symbols)

701379

With the vehicle either moving or stationary, move the select lever from the "D" position to the "M" position to select the manual mode.

1 2 2 3 702335

1 Upshift indicator
2 Downshift indicator
3 Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the gear position indicator and upshift indicator and/or downshift indicator on the combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the currently selected gear in the 1st-to-8th-gear range. The upshift and downshift indicators show when a gear shift is possible. When the upshift indicator ^▲ illuminates, upshifting is possible. When the downshift indicator “▼” illuminates, downshifting is possible. When both indicators illuminate, upshifting and downshifting are both possible. When the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic signals) the gear will be automatically shifted to the 1st position and the down shift indicator will turn off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

702985

To upshift to the next higher gear position pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated on it. To downshift to the next lower gear position, pull the shift paddle that has “-” indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the select lever to the "D" position from the position.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on shift paddles. Doing so may result accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points carefully and bear them in mind when using the manual mode.

• If you attempt to shift down when the engine speed is too high, i.e., when a downshift would push the tachometer needle beyond the red zone, beeps will be emitted to warn you that the downshift is not possible.
• If you attempt to shift up when the vehicle speed is too low, the transmission will not respond.
• You can perform a skip-shift (for example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating the shift paddle twice in rapid succession.
  The transmission automatically selects 1st gear when the vehicle stops moving.
• If the temperature of the transmission fluid becomes too high, the "AT OIL TEMP" warning light on the combination meter will illuminate.
  "M"Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe location and let the engine idle until the warning light turns off.

the in

Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the improper operation of the select lever.

• The select lever cannot be operated unless the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and the brake peda depressed.
• The select lever cannot be moved from the "P" position to any other position before the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the brake pedal first, and the operate the select lever.
• Only the "P" position allows you to turn the ignition switch from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and remove the key from the ignition switch.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC" position while the select lever in the "N" position, the select lever not be moved to the "P" position with depressing the brake pedal and pressing the select lever button.

▼ Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, the ignition switch back to the "ON" position, then move the select lever to the "P" position with the select lever but pressed and the brake pedal depressed. If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, check and confirm the following and release the shift lock accordingly.

• When the select lever cannot be shifted from "P" to "N":
  Refer to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release button" P361.
• When the select lever cannot be shifted from "N" to "R" or "P":
  Place the ignition switch in the "ACC" position, then move the select lever to "P" position with the brake pedal depressed.
  If the select lever still does not move, re to "Shift lock release using the shift lock release button" P361.
  If the shift lock cannot be released without using the shift lock release button in the above cases, there may be a malfunction out the shift lock system or the vehicle control system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Shift lock release using the shift lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF"

position.

Line drawing of a hand inserting a plug into a car's seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Refer: Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock release button is located under the shift lock cover.

Illustration of a screwdriver with a black arrow pointing to its tip (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the grip portion of the screw driver.

Diagram of a car interior showing hand positioning and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. While depressing the brake pedal, insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it right and left while pushing the shift lock release button using a screwdriver, and then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after performing the above procedure, the shift lock system may be malfunctioning. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection soon as possible.

■ Driving tips

CAUTION If the accelerator and brake peda are depressed at the same time, driving torque may be restrained. This is not a malfunction.

- Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in the "D" "R" position. - Always apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the vehicle with only the mechanical friction of the transmission.

WeDo not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade using the position. Use the brake instead.

- The engine may, on rare occasions, knock when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This does not indicate a malfunction.

7-8. Power steering

■ Power steering warning light

or 702348

Power steering system features

The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system. When the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position, the power steering warning light on the combination meter illuminates to inform the driver that the warning system is functioning properly. Then, if the engine started, the warning light turns off to inform the driver that the steering power assist is operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning light is illuminated, there may be more resistance when the steering wheel is operated. Drive carefully the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the following ways, the power steering control system may temporarily limit the power assist in order to prevent the system components, such as the control computer and drive motor, from overheating.

• The steering wheel is operated frequently and turned sharply while the vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low speeds, such as while frequently turning the steering wheel during parallel parking.
• The steering wheel remains in the fully turned position for a long period of time.

At this time, there will be more resistance when steering. However, this is not a malfunction. Normal steering force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and 7-9. Braking the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However, if the power steering is operated in non-standard way which causes power assist limitation to occur too frequent this may result in a malfunction of power steering control system.

the

ing

e ■ Braking tips a

WARNING

th Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear on the brake pads.

▼ When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

▼ Use of engine braking

and

Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking. When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating, caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift to a lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

▼ Braking when a tire is punctured Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured. This could cause

- CONTINUED -

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Brake system

▼ Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit bra systems. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system should fail, the other half the system still works. If one circuit fails the brake pedal will go down much clos to the floor than usual and you will need press it down much harder. A much long distance will be needed to stop the vehi

▼ Electronic brake booster

The vehicle is equipped with an electron brake booster to provide additional braking force. Do not turn off the ignition switch while driving because that will turn off the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster completely stops functioning. If this happens, you will have to depress the pedal much harder than during normal braking, and the braking distance will increase.

NOTE

When the following operations are performed, an operating sound from the electronic brake boost control module may be heard. This is not malfunction.

• The brake pedal was operated.
• The driver's door was opened.

- The EyeSight function was activated.

Several minutes have passed after the engine stopped.

Supplemental booster function when pressure fails

there is a malfunction in the braking system, the power for the braking will stored by controlling the hydraulic pressure of the VDC system.

When the brake pedal is depressed while the supplemental booster function is operating, an operation sound and brake ped vibration may be generated.

▼ Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the brake assist. It is not a system that brings more braking ability to the vehicle beyond its braking capability. Always use the utmost care

when driving regarding vehicle speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly, continue depressing the brake pedal strongly to bring the effect of the brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system. It assists the brake power when the driver cannot depress the brake pedal strongly and the brake power is insufficient. Brake assist generates the brake power according to the speed at which the driver ^3 depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the following will occur. However, even though these occur, they do not indicate any malfunctions, and the brake assist system is operating properly.

• You might feel that the brake pedal is applied by lighter force and generates a greater braking force.
  at You might hear an ABS operating noise from the engine compartment.

■ Disc brake pad wear warning indicators -10. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal components and motion lines (no text or symbols)

The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn. If a squeaking or scraping noise is hear from the disc brakes while braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU dealer.

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration, in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the ABS could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

- The ABS does not always decrease stopping distance. You should always maintain a safe

following distance from other vehicles.

- When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or over newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. Therefore, when driving under these conditions, reduce your speed and leave ample distance from other vehicles.

When tire chains are installed, stopping distances may be longer for a vehicle with the ABS than one without. Be sure to reduce your speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.

- When you feel the ABS operation you should maintain constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS.

■ ABS self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may feel on the brake pedal a vibration simi to when the ABS operates, and you may also hear the sound of the ABS working from the engine compartment. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS being carried out and does not indicate a malfunction.

■ ABS warning light

Refer to "ABS warning light" P180.

7-11. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effectiveness of the brakes by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking force. It functions by adjusting the distribution of braking force to the rear wheels in accordance with the vehicle's loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the ABS and uses some of the ABS components to perform its function of optimizing the distribution of braking force. If any of the ABS components used by the EBD system malfunction, the EBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or feel a sl vibration in the brake pedal. This is norm and does not indicate a malfunction.

■ If EBD system malfunctions

BRAKE / (!) ABS / (ABS) 702349

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the system stops working and the following warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

- Brake system warning light - ABS warning light - Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light If the both warning light remains on even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid level may be low or there could be a problem with the EBD system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

• Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If the light remains illuminated, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
• If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

7-12. Vehicle Dynamics Control system

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics Control system equipped vehicle that could easily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

• Even if your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control system, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having a Vehicle Dynamics Control system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.
• Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is an indication that the road being travelled on has a slippery surface; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions, its activation should be seen as a sign that the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.

- Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, have an inspection of that system performed by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• The following precautions should be observed in order to ensure that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is operating proper
• All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Further more, the amount of wear should be the same for all tires.
  Starting, and operating our
• Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar.
• When replacing a flat tire, use only the specified temporary

spare tire. However, even with the specified temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be reduced.

- If non-matching tires are used, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system may not operate correctly.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding on a slippery road surface and/or during cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system adjusts the engine's output and the wheels' respective braking forces to help maintain traction and directional control.

- Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to prevent spinning of the driving wheels or slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to maintain traction and directional control. Activation of this function is indicated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

• Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed to help maintain directional stability by suppressing the wheels' tendency to slide sideways during steering operations. Activation of this function is indicated by flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light.

NOTE

- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system may be considered normal with the following conditions occur.

• Slight twitching of the brake pedal is felt.
• The vehicle or steering wheel shakes to a small degree.
• An operating noise from the engine compartment is heard briefly when starting the engine and when driving off after starting the engine.
• The brake pedal seems to jolt when driving off after starting engine.

In the following circumstances, the vehicle may be less stable than feels to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics Control System may therefore operate. Such operation does not indicate a system malfunction.

• On gravel-covered or rutted roads
• On unfinished roads
• When the vehicle is towing a trailer
• When the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

- Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system will cause operation of the steering wheel to feel slightly different compared to that for non-mental conditions.

• It is always important to reduce speed when approaching a corner, even if the vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Dynamics Control.
  ● Always turn off the engine before replacing a tire as failure to do so may render the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unable to operate correctly.

■ Vehicle Dynamics Control the system monitor

Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light" P184 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light" P185.

To turn on/off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

To turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P215.

Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system temporarily may help to escape from the following situations. Turn the Vehicle Dynamics Control system off when necessary.

• A standing start on a steeply sloping road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or otherwise slippery surface
• Extrication of the vehicle when its wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When turning off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system during engine operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light on the combination meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system will be deactivated. When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light turns off. You should not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except under the above-mentioned situations.

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system helps prevent unstable vehicle motion such as skidding using control of the brakes and engine power. Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics Control system unless it is absolutely necessary. If you must turn off

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, drive very carefully based on the road surface condition.

NOTE

• When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control system automatically reactivates itself the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position and the engine is restarted.
• When "Vehicle Dynamics Control" has been touched to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the vehicle's running performance is comparable with that of a vehicle that does not have a Vehicle Dynamics Control system. Do not deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control system except when absolutely necessary.
• Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is deactivated, components of the brake control system may still activate. When the brake control system is activated, the vehicle Dynamics Control operations indicator light flashes.

off

7-13. X-MODE

WARNING

• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with X-MODE could easily lead to a serious accident.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with hill descent control function could easily lead to a serious accident. Be especially careful, and depress the brake pedal if necessary when driving on extremely steep downhill, frozen, muddy or sandy roads. Failure to control the vehicle's speed may cause a loss of control and result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

- Even if your vehicle is equipped with X-MODE, winter tires should be used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition, vehicle speed should be reduced considerably. Simply having

- CONTINUED -

X-MODE does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid accidents in any situation.

• Activate X-MODE when you encounter a very slippery surface a low speed. However, having X-MODE is no guarantee that full vehicle control will be maintained at all times and under all conditions. When activating X-MODE, the speed of the vehicle should be reduced considerably.
• Whenever suspension components, steering components, or an axle are removed from a vehicle, have the system inspected by an authorized SÜBARU dealer.
• Observe the following precautions in order to ensure that X-MODE is operating properly:

- All four wheels should be fitted with tires of the same size, type, and brand. Furthermore, the amount of wear should be the same for all fo tires.

- Keep the tire pressure at the proper level as shown on the label attached to the vehicle's door pillar.

• Use only the special temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire. With a normal temporary spare tire, the effectiveness of X-MODE is reduced and this should be taken into account when driving the vehicle in such a condition.
• If the hill descent control function has operated continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake disc may increase and the hill descent control function may be temporarily disabled. In this case, the hill descent control indicator will disappear. When the hill descent control indicator disappears, the hill descent control function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control system of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamic Control system, etc. for driving with bad road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can drive more comfortably even in slippery road conditions including uphill and down-kill.

X-MODE has the following functions.
- Hill descent control function: Using the hill descent control function, you can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is likely to increase, the brake control system will be activated to adjust the vehicle speed.
- Driving ability control: This mode increases the hill-climbing ability and driving ability as well as enabling smooth application of torque for easier control of the steering wheel.

■ To activate/deactivate X-MODE

CS 1 306189

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode) 1 X-MODE indicator

1 2 306190

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes

1 DEEP SNOW/MUD mode indicator
2 SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

To activate or deactivate X-MODE, operate the center information display. Refer "Car settings" P215.

X-MODE control (models with 1 mode)

Speed range
Low-speed range (less than 25 mph (40 km/h))	Medium to high- speed range (25 mph) (40 km/h) or higher)
X-MODE: Available	X-MODE: Not avail- able*1

X-MODE control (models with 2 modes)

Speed range
Low-speed range (less than 25 mph (4 km/h))	Medium to high-46peed range (25 mp (40 km/h) or higher)
DEEP SNOW/MUD: Available	X-MODE: Not avail-able*2
SNOW/DIRT: Avail-able	X-MODE: Not avail-able*2

*1: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will deactivated.
^* 2: If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h) or more while X-MODE is activated buzzer will sound once and X-MODE will deactivated. X-MODE will automatically reactivate when the vehicle speed drops be 22 mph (35 km/h).

NOTE

• Even if you try to activate X-MODE, when the vehicle speed is 12 mph km/h) or more, X-MODE will not be activated. At this time, a buzzer will sound twice.
• While the engine is running, if any of the following conditions is met, X-MODE will be deactivated. In this case, it is not possible to activate X-MODE.

- The CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illuminates.

• The AT OIL TEMP warning light flashes.
• The ABS warning light illuminates.
• The Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light illuminates.

- If the engine could overheat because of a temperature increase of the engine coolant, it may not be possible to activate X-MODE. Even while X-MODE is activated, X-MODE will be deactivated when the engine coolant temperature increases.

Models with 2 modes:

• SNOW/DIRT is suitable for driving on a snow-covered road where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are visible, or for driving on an unpaved road.
• DEEP SNOW/MUD is suitable for driving on a road covered with deep snow where the points of contact between the tires and road surface are not visible, or for driving on a muddy road.
• If cruise control is used after automatic deactivation of the X-MODE, the system will not switch to the X-MODE even if the vehicle speed drops below approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).

■ Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be in . standby mode when X-MODE is activated ^• and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill descent control function may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

• Even while the hill descent control function is operating, you can vary the vehicle speed using the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
• During braking by the hill descent control function, the stop light will illuminate.
• The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient of the road.

The hill descent control function _ may be considered normal when the following conditions occur.

• An operating sound is heard briefly from the engine compartment while the hill descent control function is operating.
• The sensation of depressing the brake pedal is different, (harder than usual etc.) when the brake pedal is depressed during hill descent control function operation.

▼ Hill descent control indicator

701931

This indicator appears while the hill descent control function is in the standby

tmode. It flashes while the function is operating. It will disappear when the function is in the disabled mode. When this function is changed from operational to non-operational, it will disappear when the vehicle speed reaches more than approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-14. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

702350

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe location.
(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a very short distance, the tires get warm and their pressures increase accordingly. Be sure to let the tires cool thoroughly before adjusting their pressures to the standard values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Refer to "Tires and wheels" P495.

The tire pressure monitoring system does not function when the vehicle is stationary. After adjusting the tire pressures, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMS rechecking of the tire inflation pressures. If the tire pressures are now above the severe low pressure threshold, the low tire pressure warning light should turn off a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace with a spare tire as soon as possible.

- When a spare tire is mounted of a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low-tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or sys-

- CONTINUED -

tem resetting.
- When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if sealant residue is properly cleaned off. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any me parts in the cargo area. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the tire pressure monitoring system will not function properly.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

7-15. Parking your vehicle

Electronic parking brake

the ne 1 2 3 4 703048

1 Parking brake switch
2 Indicator light
3 Release the electronic parking brake
4 Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that you turn off the engine. Otherwise, the parking brake may be released and an accident may occur.
• If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving and contact your SUBARU dealer.

- If you operate the electronic parking brake when the brake is over heated or the vehicle is on a slope, the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In this case, the vehicle may sit to move and it may lead to an accident. Always use the tire stops.

CAUTION

- When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction and the parking brake cannot be applied, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately for an inspection. If you have to park your vehicle in such conditions, perform the following procedure.

• Stop your vehicle in a flat location.
• Shift the select lever in the position. When the select lever cannot be shifted into "P" position, you must release shift lock. Refer to "Shift lock

ire function" P361.

- Use tire stops under the tire to prevent the vehicle from moving.

- Never drive with the parking brake applied. Doing so will cause unnecessary wear on the brake pads. Before driving off, always make sure that the parking brake has been released and the brake system warning light has turned off.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic parking brake. You can apply/release the parking brake by operating the parking brake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal and pull up the parking brake switch. To release: Press the parking brake switch firmly while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position and the brake pedal is depressed.

When the parking brake is applied while the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate. Refer to "Brake system warning light" P181.

NOTE

- If you press the parking brake switch under the following conditions, the parking brake will not be released.

- The ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position. - You are not depressing the brake pedal.

- The electronic parking brake system uses motors to apply the parking brake. Therefore, operating sounds from the motors will be heard when alic applying or releasing the parking brake. Make sure that the motor sounds are heard when applying or releasing the parking brake.

- If you operate the parking brake switch under the following conditions, a chirp will sound and the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash.

- When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction. - When the electronic parking brake operation is prohibited temporarily.

When you cannot release the parking brake due to, for example, a system malfunction, contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the parking

- CONTINUED -

brake.

• If you stop operating the electronic parking brake switch midway or operate extremely slowly, the system may detect an error and turn the brake system warning light. However, this does not indicate a malfunction if the brake system warning light turns off after operating the switch.
• When the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long period of time, the electronic parking brake may operate automatically after the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. This occurs due to checking the proper operation of the electronic parking brake and does not indicate a main function.
• If you cannot release the electronic parking brake due to the switch malfunction, refer to the instruction described in "Automatic release function by accelerator pedal" P376.

After activating the electronic parking brake, you may hear a short sound several minutes after the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates as the system confirms proper engagement. This sound is different

from the apply and release sound. This can occur:

• If the brakes are extremely hot.
• If the car is parked on a steep on incline.
• If the electronic parking brake is applied after the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.

This is a normal operating sound under any of these conditions.

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal

The parking brake will be automatically released by depressing the accelerator pedal. However, the automatic release function does not operate under the following conditions.

• Any door is open.
• The driver's seatbelt is not fastened.
  The select lever is in the "P" or "N" position.

If the parking brake is automatically released, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch turn off.

▼ Auto Vehicle Hold function

The Auto Vehicle Hold function will automatically keep the vehicle held even after releasing the brake pedal when the vehicle

is at a complete stop, such as at traffic signals.

WARNING

• Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function on a steep hill or slippery road. The vehicle may move even when using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, causing serious injury or accidents.
• Do not use the Auto Vehicle Hold function to park the vehicle. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents. Make sure to shift the select lever to the "P" position and apply the electronic parking brake in the following cases.

- When you are going to park your vehicle

- When passengers are getting in or out of the vehicle

- When you are loading or un- loading

- When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, do not release the brake pedal before the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light illuminates. The vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious

injury or accidents.

- Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function in the following cases. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly, causing serious injury or accidents.

- When washing your vehicle in an automatic car wash

- When being towed

CAUTION

- When stopping on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function turned on, the electronic parking brake may be automatically applied. Then the electronic parking brake indicator light will flash. In such a case, depress a hold the brake pedal while stopping. Otherwise, the vehicle may move.

- When being towed, turn off the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTE

We recommend turning on the Auto Vehicle Hold function when stopping on an incline. If the Auto Vehicle H function is turned off, the vehicle m

roll backward when driving off.

∇ To turn on/off the Auto Vehicle Hold function

AVH 703017

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

To turn the Auto Vehicle Hold function on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P215.

NOTE

- When the electronic parking brake system has a malfunction while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is turned on, a chirp will sound, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off and the brake system warning V light will turn on.

9 Every time when starting the engine, Hold the Auto Vehicle Hold function will may

be set to off.

∇ To operate the Auto Vehicle Hold function

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal when all of the following conditions are met. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold function will operate.

• The driver's door is closed.
• The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
• The select lever is in a position other than the "P" position.

AVH 703017

Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light

While the vehicle is kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will flash.

∇ To release the Auto Vehicle function

Perform any of the following operations release the Auto Vehicle Hold function.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.
• Depress the brake pedal again.
• Apply the electronic parking brake.
• Shift the select lever to the "P" position with the brake pedal pressed.
• Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Hold function operating with the center information display while depressing the brake pedal.

When the Auto Vehicle Hold function is released, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will change from flashing to illuminated.

Under any of the following conditions, the Auto Vehicle Hold function will be automatically released and the electronic parking brake will be automatically applied.

• The Auto Vehicle Hold function has been in operation for 10 minutes.
• The driver's seatbelt is unfastened.
• The ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position.
• The vehicle is stopped on a steep slope.

Hold The Auto Vehicle Hold function is malfunctioning.

^t qn such cases, the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light will turn off and the electronic parking brake indicator light will illuminate.

▼ Tips

- When the electronic parking brake is automatically applied with the vehicle kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, release the electronic parking brake by either of the following operations before starting off. Then make sure that the electronic parking brake indicator light is off.

• Depress the accelerator pedal with the driver's seatbelt fastened and with the doors closed.

• Press the electronic parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.

• Under certain conditions, including a malfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, a warning buzzer will sound and a warning message will appear on the combination meter display (color LCD). All warning messages should be strictly observed.

• On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot be kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal.

• When holding on a steep slope with the Auto Vehicle Hold function activated, the electronic parking brake may automatically applied after stopping, then the electronic parking brake indicator light may flash. In such a case, depress and hold the brake pedal while stopped. Otherwise, the vehicle may move. When getting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicle on a flat surface, then apply the electronic parking brake.

• If the Auto Vehicle Hold indicator light does not illuminates even after touching "Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)" with the operating conditions met, the function may have a malfunction. Contact your SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
• You may hear a sound while the Auto Vehicle Hold function is keeping your vehicle stopped. This is normal, and does not represent a malfunction.
  ● While the vehicle is kept held by the Auto Vehicle Hold function, the brake pedal may feel stiff. However, this is not a malfunction.
• When using the Auto Vehicle Hold function, depress the brake pedal firmly. Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may not operate.

▼ Emergency brake

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only in case of an emergency. If the emergency brake is excessively used, the brake parts will wear down faster of the brake may not work sufficiently due to brake overheating.

NOTE

While using the emergency brake:

• The electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light or parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
• A sound may be heard from the engine compartment. This is the operating sound of the brake that activated by the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, and does not indicate a malfunction.

If the foot brake has a malfunction, you stop the vehicle by pulling the parking brake switch continuously.

While applying the emergency brake, the electronic parking brake indicator light and the indicator light on the parking brake switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.

▼ Electronic parking brake system warning

CAUTION

If the brake system warning light turns on, the electronic parking or brake system may be malfunctioning. Immediately stop your vehicle the nearest safe location and contact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system, the brake system warning light turns on. Refer to "Electro parking brake indicator light" P181.

Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always perform the following items.

• Apply the parking brake firmly.
- Put the select lever in the "P" position

Never rely on the mechanical friction of transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

Diagram showing a car parked near two pine trees and a side view of a parked car with a brick wall (no text or symbols)

When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the curb.

Top-down line drawing of a car parked on a tree-lined road next to a brick wall and a side view (no text or symbols)

When facing downhill, the front wheels should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

• Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the temperature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people.
• Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
• Be sure to stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If engine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in the exhaust gas.

CAUTION

- If your vehicle has a bumper under guard (optional), pay attention to blocks and other obstruc-

tions on the ground when parking. The underspoiler could be damaged by contact with them.

The braking power of the parking brake may not be sufficient when stronger braking power is needed (e.g., when parking on a steep slope while towing a trailer).

7-16. Hill start assist system

WARNING

● The Hill start assist system is a device only for helping the driver to START the vehicle on an uphill grade. To prevent accidents when the vehicle is parked on a slope, be sure to firmly set the parking brake. When setting the parking brake, make sure that the vehicle remains stationary when the brake pedal is released.
- Do not turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the Hill start assist system is operating. The Hill start assist system will be deactivated and may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to make the following vehicle operations easier.

1 A 2 701994

1 Starting forward facing uphill
2 Starting backward facing downhill
A Brake pedal

When the vehicle has stopped with the brake pedal depressed, the Hill start assist system operates.

Braking power is maintained temporarily (for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill start assist system after the brake pedal released. The driver is therefore able to start the vehicle in the same way as on level grade, just using the accelerator pedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assist system is insufficient after the brake pedal is released, apply more braking power by depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill start assist system does not operate in following cases.

s a st l e 701109

- When starting backward facing uphill

- When starting forward facing downhill

- While the parking brake is applied

- While the ignition switch is in the "ACC" or "LOCK"/"OFF" position

- While the Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light is illuminated. Refer to "Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indicator light" P184.

When using the Hill start assist system, braking effect may be felt even after the brake pedal has been released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start assist system may not be sufficient when strong braking power is needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle begins to move forward after being reversed.

7-17. BSD/RCTA (if equippe

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear corner radars with Blind Spot Detection and Red Cross Traffic Alert.

^a These functions enable the system to detect objects or vehicles to the rear, drawing attention to the driver when changing a lane or when driving in re

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving safely. Always be sure to check the surroundings when changing lanes or reversing the vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the driver to change lanes or reverse safely by monitoring the rear and side areas of the vehicle. However, you cannot rely on this system also in assuring the safety during a lane change or reversing. Overconfidence in this system could result in an accident and lead to serious injury or death. Since the system operation has various limitations, the flashing or illumination of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may be delayed or it may not operate at all even when a vehicle is pres

d) in a neighboring lane or approaching from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying attention to the rear and side areas of the vehicle.

■ System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following functions.

- To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at high speeds (Blind Spot Detection)

- To detect a vehicle approaching from the right or left while reversing the vehicle (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

he The system uses radar sensors for the above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been certified by the radio wave related laws of the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries and Canada. When driving in other countries, certification of the country where the vehicle is driven must be obtained. For certification in the U.S. and other FCC compliant countries and Canada, refer to "Certification for the BSD/RCTA" P389.

▼ Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

701459

1 Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers follows.

- If the system detects a vehicle in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror (s) will illuminate.

Diagram showing car wheel positioning with two labeled parts, no text or symbols present

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

- If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will flash.

▽ Lane Change Assist (LCA)

701406

1 Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as follows.

• If the system detects a vehicle approaching at a high speed in the neighboring lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will illuminate.
• If the driver operates the turn signal lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light is illuminating, the corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will flash.

▼ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

701460

1 Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another vehicle approaching from either side when driving in reverse. This feature helps the driver check the rear and side areas of the vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side while moving backward, it warns the driver of dangers in the following way.

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
• A warning buzzer sounds.
• An icon appears on the rear view camera screen (audio/navigation monitor).

Limitations of the detectability RCTA

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited, the RCTA may not operate properly in angled parking.

A 2 B 1 701818

the Example 1

1 The detection range of the radar sensors 2 Area out of detection range of the radar sensors
A Vehicle that may not be detected B Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not be detected because the detection range is limited by the parked vehicle (B). Always be sure to check the surroundings when reversing the vehicle.

C 1 701819

Example 2

1 The detection range of the radar sensors C Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle (C) is passing in front of your vehicle. Always be sure to check the surroundings when reversing the vehicle.

■ System operation

▼ Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of following conditions are met.

• The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.
• The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
• The vehicle is driven at speeds above mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
• The select lever is in the "R" position (RCTA only).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the following situations.

- The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.

- The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator remains off (except when reversing).

NOTE

- In the following case, the BSD/RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will appear. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears, have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealer as so as possible.

- When a malfunction occurs in the comes overvoltage system, including the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light When the above condit

In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating (or may stop operating) and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
- When the radar sensor become significantly misaligned (If the orientation of the radar sensor shifted for any reason, readjustment is required. Have the sen adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
- When a large amount of snow ice sticks to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensor
- When the vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road or in an environment in which there are no objects around (such as in a desert) for a long time
- When the temperature around radar sensors increased excessively due to long driving on uphill grades in summer, etc.
- When the temperature around radar sensors becomes extremely low
- When the vehicle battery voltage soon lowers
- When the vehicle battery be-

When the above conditions are corrected, the BSD/RCTA will resume operation and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator has appeared for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

Is The detectability of the radar sensors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA sor detection may be impaired and the system may not operate properly or under the following conditions.

• When the rear bumper around the radar sensors is distorted
• When ice, snow or mud adheres to the rear bumper surface, around the radar sensors
• When stickers, etc. are affixed on the areas of the radar sensors on the rear bumper
• During adverse weather conditions such as rain, snow or fog
• When driving on wet roads such as snow-covered roads or through puddles

- The radar sensors may not detect or may have difficulty detecting the following.

- Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

- CONTINUED -

destrians, stationary objects on the road or road side, etc.

• Vehicles with body shapes that the radar may not reflect (vehicles with a low body height su as sports cars or a trailer with cargo)
• Vehicles that are not approaching your vehicle even though they are in the detection area (either on a neighboring lane to the r or beside your vehicle when reversing) (The system determines the presence of approaching vehicles based on data detected by the radar sensors.)
• Vehicles traveling at significantly different speeds
• Vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle at almost the same spec for a prolonged time
• Oncoming vehicles
• Vehicles in a lane beyond the neighboring lane
• Vehicles travelling at a significantly lower speed that you are trying to overtake

- On a road with extremely narrow lanes, the system may detect vehicles driving in a lane next to the neighboring lane.

■ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will operate to alert the driver when there are vehicles in the neighboring lanes. When reversing the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and warning buzzer will operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side.

▼ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

ed 701784

e BSD/RCTA approach indicator light It is mounted in each side of the outside mirrors.

-The indicator light will illuminate when a vehicle approaching from behind is detected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following conditions.

• While the indicator light illuminates, if you operate the turn signal lever toward the side in which this light turned on.
• When reversing the vehicle while the system detects a vehicle approaching from either side.

is ▽ BSD/RCTA approach indicator light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

• You may have difficulty recognizing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light under the following conditions.
• When affected by direct sunlight
• When affected by the headlight beams from the vehicles behind
• While the illumination brightness control dial is in the fully upward position, even if the headlights are turned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will not be reduced. For details about the illumination brightness control dial, refer to “Illumination brightness control” P171.

▼ BSD/RCTA approach warning buzzer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume can be changed by operating the center information display. For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

▼ Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning buzzer

- In the following cases, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings.

• When a vehicle moves to the neighboring lane from a lane next to the neighboring lane
• When driving on a steep incline or on repeated sharp uphill and downhill grades
• When going beyond a pass
• When both your vehicle and a vehicle driving on a neighboring lane are driving on the far side of each lane

• When several narrowly-spaced vehicles are approaching in a row

• In low radius bends (tight bends or when making turns at an intersection)

• When there is a difference in height between your lane and the neighboring lane
• Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is activated by touching "BSD/RCTA"
• Immediately after the select lever is shifted to the "R" position
• When extremely heavy cargo is loaded in the cargo area

- During reversing, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and the warning buzzer may be delayed or the system may fail to issue these warnings under the following conditions.

• When backing out of an angled parking space
• When a large-sized vehicle is parked next to your vehicle (That vehicle prevents the propagation of radar waves.)
• When reversing on sloped roads
• When reversing at a high speed

Line drawing of a car on an elevated track with a magnified inset showing a close-up of the rear wheel (no text or symbols)

- The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may illuminate when driving close to solid objects on the road or road side (such as guardrails, tunnels or sidewalls).

• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash when turning at an intersection in urban areas or a multi-lane intersection.
• The BSD/RCTA approach indicator light may flash and the warning buzzer may sound if a building or a wall exists in the reversing direction.
• In the following cases, the system may detect a vehicle driving two lanes away from your vehicle.

- When you are driving on the near side of its lane from the corresponding vehicle

- CONTINUED -

- When the vehicle driving two lane away is driving on the near side lane from your vehicle

■ BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

▼ System temporary stops

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled OFF 2 OFF R 图 842.0 7452 mi 702219

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the system used under the following conditions.

• Extremely high or low temperatures
• When abnormal voltage exists for the vehicle battery
• When the radar sensor is significantly misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected, the system will recover from the temporary

s stop condition and the indicator will dis- of appear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

▼ System temporary stops due to reduced radar sensitivity

MPG 1 BSD/RCTA Disabled Sensor Blocked OFF 2 OFF R 图 842.0 7452 mi 702220

1 BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due to reduced radar sensitivity
2 BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

This display appears when the detectability of the radar sensors is reduced. Once the condition is corrected, the system will recover from the temporary stop condition and the indicator will disappear. If the indicator remains displayed for a prolonged time, have the system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

■ BSD/RCTA warning indicator

▼ System malfunction

MPG 1 2 BSD/RCTA Disabled Check 3 Owner's Manual 4 R 842.0 7452 mi 702221

1 BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2 At first, this message will appear
3 Then this message will appear
4 BSD/RCTA warning indicator

This display appears when a malfunction occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU dealer and have the system inspected.

■ To turn on/off the BSD/RCTA

OFF 701821

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator

To turn the BSD/RCTA system on and operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" &P215.

When the BSD/RCTA system is turned OFF, the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator on combination meter display (color LCD) to illuminate.

NOTE

- In the following cases, turn off the BSD/RCTA system. The system may not operate properly due to blocker radar waves.

• When towing a trailer
• When a bicycle carrier or other item is fitted to the rear of the vehicle

TA - When using a chassis dynamometer or free roller device, et

- When running the engine and making the wheels rotate while lifting up the vehicle

- If the ignition switch is turned to "LOCK"/"OFF" position, the last known status of the system is m tained. For example, if the ignition switch is turned to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position with the BSD/RCT, deactivated, the BSD/RCTA remain deactivated the next time the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

■ Certification for the BSD/RCTA

The U.S. and other FCC compliant countries

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

▼ Canada-spec. models

NOTE

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

702692

REMARQUE

■ Handling of radar sensors

Line drawing of a car rear view showing structural components and roof details (no text or symbols)

1 Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following precautions.

● Always keep the bumper surface near the radar sensors clean.
- Do not affix any stickers or other items on the bumper surface near the radar sensors.
- Do not modify the bumper near the radar sensors.
- Do not paint the bumper near the radar sensors.
- Do not expose the bumper near the radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including the inability to detect vehicles entering the detection areas. If any strong shock applied to the bumper, be sure to contact your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

- Do not disassemble the radar sensors

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair replacement, or the bumper area around the radar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, co tact your SUBARU dealer for assistance.

7-18. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is a system designed to help avoid collisions reduce collision damage when reversing the vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected in the reversing direction, the system will notify the driver with a warr sound and may activate the vehicle's brakes automatically.

WARNING

• Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is not a system intended to replace the driver's responsibility to check their surroundings for vehicles or obstacles to avoid a collision.
• The driver is responsible for driving safely. Before reversing, be sure to first depress the brake pedal and visually check the surroundings.
• There are some cases in which the vehicle cannot avoid collision, because the system operation has limitations. The warning sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at all even when an obstacle is present.

• Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when the vehicle is on the free roller or on the chassis dynamometer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.
  • Make sure to set the Automatic Braking function to OFF when towing a trailer. Otherwise, the vehicle may move and it may cause an accident.
• The system is not designed to detect people (including children), animals or other moving objects.
• Depending on the vehicle condition or the surrounding environment, the sonar sensor's ability to detect objects may become unstable.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system records and stores the following data when automatic braking operates. It does not record conversations, personal information or other audio

data.

• Distance from the object
- Vehicle speed
- Accelerator pedal operation status
- Brake pedal operation status
- Select lever position
• Outside temperature
- The sensitivity setting of the sonar sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU may acquire and use the recorded data for the purpose of vehicle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted by SUBARU will not disclose or pro the acquired data to any other third party except under the following conditions.

• The vehicle owner has given his/her consent.
• The disclosure/provision is based on a court order or other legally enforceable request.
• Data that has been modified so that the user and vehicle cannot be identified is provided to a research institution for statistical processing or similar purposes.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system overview

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate the following 2 functions using 4 sonar sensors.

- Sonar Audible Alarm function

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system detects objects rearward and warns the driver by warning message on the center information display and warning beeps.

hi-Automatic Braking function

The Automatic Braking function detects objects rearward and if there is a high risk of a collision, the system decelerates the vehicle and controls the braking to reduce damage.

graph TD
    A["1: Object Close Behind"] --> B["2: Apply Brake To Hold Position"]
    B --> C["3: 4: 4"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

1 When reversing

2 When either strong automatic braking or torque control is applied to prevent collision (in this case, short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound)

3 When the vehicle is stopped by the system (in this case, the continuous beep will remain sounding)

4 Object (e.g., a wall)

▼ Detecting range

1 2 3 701721

1 Detecting range (width): Approximately 6 in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2 Range that the system cannot detect: Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the rear of the vehicle
3 Detecting range (length): Approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

If your vehicle is trapped on a ramp road crossing and you are trying to escape by reversing through the crossing gate, the system may recognize the crossing gate as an obstacle and brake may activate. In this case, remain calm and either continue to depress the accelerator pedal or cancel the system. To

- CONTINUED -

cancel the system, refer to "Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system operation" P400.

■ Operating conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will operate when all of the following conditions are met.

graph TD
    A["Central Display Unit"] --> B["1 Eye Sight"]
    A --> C["RAB OFF"]
    A --> D["RAB"]

1 EyeSight warning indicator
2 RAB warning indicator
3 RAB OFF indicator

- The ignition switch is in the "ON" position.

• The EyeSight warning indicator is off.
• The RAB warning indicator is off.
• The RAB OFF indicator is off.
• The select lever is in the "R" position.

| Sonar Audible Alarm function

• The Sonar Audible Alarm is set to "ON"
• The vehicle speed is from 0 to 9 mph to 15 km/h).

Automatic Braking function

- The Automatic Braking is set to "ON".

w The vehicle speed is from 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE

- In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system will not operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

• The EyeSight warning indicator is illuminated.
• The RAB warning indicator is illuminated.

- In the following cases, the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system cannot be operated.

- The (EyeSight Temporary Stop indicator: White) is illuminated, and the messages corresponding to the EyeSight temporary stop are displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD). For details, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

- The RAB OFF indicator is illuminated.

- In the following cases, the functions may not be able to properly work. Promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

• A sticker, paint, or a chemical is applied to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
• The rear bumper is modified.
• The rear bumper has been removed and attached.
• The ground clearance is changed due to the vehicle's loading condition or modification.
• There is damage to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
• The rear bumper is exposed to strong impact, or the rear bumper is deformed.

- On a steep hill, the system's automatic braking ability will be reduced.

- The system is designed to avoid collisions by automatic hard braking when the vehicle's reversing speed is less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). However, the system does not guarantee that the vehicle will be able to avoid collisions in any situation.

- If the vehicle is reversed at an extremely slow speed, the driver's operation may be prioritized. In this case, automatic braking will not operate.

- The system may not be able to detect and apply the brake with the following objects.

- Sharp or thin objects such as poles, fences and ropes which may not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor.

- Objects that are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is set to the "R" position.

- Objects with a surface which not reflect the sound wave emitted from the sonar sensor such as a chain link fence.

- Objects the system is not designed to detect and apply brake.

- Pedestrians.

- Moving objects including moving vehicles.

- Objects which absorbs sound waves such as cloth or snow.

- Objects whose surface has a diagonal angle.

- Objects that are low to the ground such as parking blocks.

- Objects that are high above the ground such as objects hanging

from above.

- Objects that are out of range of the center of the vehicle in the horizontal direction.

Objects that are not perpendicular to the ground.

- The surface of the object is uneven or wavy.

- When reversing the vehicle, the functions may not be able to work properly or may cause a system malfunction if the following conditions exist.

n. High frequency sound from other may sources are nearby:

- Horn sound from another vehicle.

- Engine sound from other vehicles.

- Sound of an air brake.

- Vehicle detection equipment or a sonar from another vehicle.

- A sound wave with a frequency similar to the vehicle's system is transmitted near by.

- A vehicle equipped with the same system is reversing toward your reversing direction.

Weather conditions:

• Extremely high or extremely low temperatures in which the area near the sonar sensor becomes too hot or too cold to operate.
• The sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensors are exposed to heavy rain or a significant amount of water.
• Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
• Air is moving rapidly such as when a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumper near the sonar sensor:

• Commercial electronic parts (fog light, fender pole, radio antenna) or commercial attachment parts (trailer hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper guard) are attached.
• Parts that emit high frequency sound, such as a horn or speaker are attached.

Vehicle conditions:

• Ice, snow or mud is adhered to the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor.
• The vehicle is significantly inclined.
• The ground clearance is significantly reduced due to the vehi-

cle's loading condition, etc. - When the sonar sensor is mis- aligned due to a collision or an accident.

Surrounding environment:

• A cloth banner, flag, hanging branch or railroad crossing bars are present in the reversing direction.
• When reversing on a gravel or grassy area.
• When reversing in an area where objects or walls are adjacent to the vehicle such as narrow tunnels, narrow bridges, narrow roads or narrow garages.
• Wheel track or hole is present in the ground of the reversing direction.
• When reversing over a drainage cover (grating cover).

Diagram showing a car approaching a curved road with directional arrows, no text or symbols present

in c- 702036

Simple line drawing of a car on a road with a right-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car on a road with a directional arrow indicating left motion (no text or symbols)

• The path of the reversing direction is inclined such as on a uphill.
• When reversing downhill.

c- - A curb or step is present in the steep reversing direction.

• Reversing in a garage with a low ceiling or a tunnel.

• There is a patch of snow rearward.

• There is a puddle of water. ■ Sonar Audible Alarm function

• There is an obstacle that is next to an object. When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is in operation, an audible warning
• Going back along a wall.
• The area where the road starts touching dirt and snow
• When reversing on an uneven road.
  When Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system is in operation, an audible warning beeps will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of a potential collision.

- In circumstances such as the following, sound warning beeps after the object is recognized by the Sonar Audible, it may not be possible to avoid a collision even when the system operates normally.

• Roads are slippery.
• The tire air pressure is not correct.
• The tires have become worn.
• Tire chains are installed.
• Tires which are not the designated size are installed.
• Emergency repairs were performed using a puncture repair kit.
• The suspension was modified.
• Vehicle driving is unstable due to accident or malfunction.
• The brake warning light is illuminated.

NOTE

It may take time to display the wall and sound warning beeps after the object was recognized by the Sonar Audible Alarm.

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (object detected)	35 in (90 cm) or more	Green No warning sound
Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)	28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)	Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert (approaching closer to the object)	20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)	Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity alert (too close to the object)	20 in (50 cm) or less Red		Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

▼ Obstacle detected and alert level

1 RAB Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701825

Long proximity alert (object detected) 1 35 in (90 cm) or more

1 RAB ON Check Surroundings Before Backing Up Put ON 701826

Medium proximity alert (approaching the object)
1 Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)

1 RAB Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701827

Short proximity alert (approaching the object closer)
1 Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

1 RAB Check Surroundings Before Backing Up 701921

Closest proximity alert (too close to object)
1 Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever sing direction, the range of detected obj will be shown on the center information display.

A warning alarm will sound and, depending on the speed, either torque control to generate engine braking or automatic braking will be applied.

■ Automatic Braking function operation

▼ Object close behind warning

RAB Object Close Behind Pd 701828

Automatic braking warning
1 Warning message
If the system determine the risk of collision with the object. Short warning beeps or continuous warning beeps will sound and either strong automatic braking or torque

control will be applied to prevent collision. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

RAB ON Apply Brake To Hold Position PBT 701923

Depress brake pedal warning
1 Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal once the vehicle has been stopped by automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is depressed, a message will be displayed on the center information display and the continuous beep will remain sounding. At this time, a warning message is also displayed on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

The Sonar Audible Alarm function and Automatic Braking function are different in operation conditions. Therefore there are cases in which only one of these functions will activate.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immediately after the system stops the vehicle by automatic braking. Depending on the conditions of the road surface and tires, the vehicle may not remain stopped, possibly leading to an accident.

▼ After the vehicle is stopped by the system

MPG RAB OFF R 图 842.0 7452 ml

702064

After the brake pedal is depressed, the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate and the system will temporarily stop operating.

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the select lever is shifted to a position of than the "R" position.

The system will operate again the next time the select lever is shifted to the "R" position.

NOTE

- In the following cases, after the vehicle has been stopped by the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, brake control is released and the electronic parking brake operates. For details about releases the parking brake, refer to "Electonic parking brake" P374.

- When 2 minutes pass after the vehicle is stopped

- When any door is opened

- The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system may stop operating temporarily in the following cases and the RAB OFF indicator will illuminate.

- Ice, snow or mud is adhered the sonar sensors or the rear bumper near the sonar sensor

- Objects are too close to the rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the "R" position - The system detects sounds of a similar frequency to the RAB sonar

■ Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system operation

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be temporarily canceled by any of the following operation.

• While the vehicle is stopped by the operation of automatic braking, the brake pedal is depressed.
• While the vehicle is stopped by the 19 operation of automatic braking, the 0- accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed continuously (In this case, limited acceleration will be canceled and the vehicle will continue reversing.)
• The select lever is shifted to a position other than the "R" position.

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the object is no longer detected.

■ Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system ON/OFF sett

While the select lever is shifted to the position, the below functions of the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system can be set by operating the center information display.

graph TD
    A["1 RAB ON"] --> B["+"]
    C["2 RAB OFF"] --> B
    D["3 PON"] --> E["+"]
    F["4 POFF"] --> E
    G["Check Surroundings Before Backing Up"] --> H["701831"]

1 ON setting key of Automatic Braking function
2 OFF setting key of Automatic Braking function
3 ON setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm function
4 OFF setting key of the Sonar Audible Alarm function

When the ON setting key is shown, the corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the corresponding setting is OFF. Touch and hold the OFF setting key to the setting ON.

When the Automatic Braking function are turned OFF, the following indicator(s) will illuminate.

MPG RAB OFF R 图 842.0 7452 ml 702064

The RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the corresponding function is turned ON

NOTE

When the settings cannot be changed, the ON/OFF setting key will be grayed out.

Also, the following settings can be changed by operating the center information display.

- Warning Volume

- Sonar Audible Alarm For details, refer to "Car settings" P215.

■ RAB warning indicator

MPG 1 RAB RAB Disabled 2 RAB R 842.0 7452 ml 702686

1 RAB malfunction message
2 RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions, the above indicator illuminates on the combination meter. Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Handling of the sonar sensors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the bumper. To ensure the proper operation the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, observe the following precautions.

Line drawing of a car rear view showing front and side views (no text or symbols)

• Do not affix any stickers or other items on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface near the sonar sensors.
  ● Always keep the rear bumper surface near the sonar sensors clean.
• Do not modify the rear bumper.
• Do not paint the bumper near the sonar sensors.

• Do not apply high pressure water to the sonar sensors with a high pressure carwashing machine.

• Do not apply strong impacts to the rear bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor becomes misaligned, a system malfunction may occur, including inability to detect objects in the reversi direction. If any strong impact is applied to the rear bumper, contact a SUBAF dealer to have the system inspected.

• Do not disassemble the sonar sensors

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair replacement, or if the area of the bumper near the sonar sensors requires repair, paintwork or replacement, contact your SUBARU dealer assistance.

7-19. Driver Monitoring System (if equipped)

Driver Monitoring System is introduced as driverFocus in some countries. The Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases when the driver is not paying attention to the forward direction, and also recognizes individual users. This system warns the driver of inattentive/odrowsy driving, and can support safe and uncomfortable driving by automatically retrieving the following settings.

– Driver's position
or Climate control setting
- Meter setting
– Center information display setting

When a user is registered, various settings are automatically retrieved when the user enters the vehicle.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with mounting holes and a central housing (no text or symbols)

1 Camera

CAUTION

• Always use the utmost care in driving
- Overconfidence because you are driving a vehicle with the Driver Monitoring System could easily lead to a serious accident.
- This system cannot detect if the driver is feeling drowsy or is concentrating on safe driving.
- It cannot judge if the driver is awake or asleep, if their driving abilities have diminished, or if they are concentrating on safe

driving.

- In some circumstances, the system may not be able to correctly detect the driver state.

NOTE

• The user recognition camera does not save images, audio, or video.
• The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when sunlight is shining into the vehicle in the following ways.

- Sunlight is shining directly (or through glass) onto the user recognition camera.

• There are shadows on the driver's face caused by sunlight any light with a strong infrared component).
• There are large momentary fluctuations in the strength of the sunlight (or any light with a strong infrared component) shining on the face.

- Correct detection may not be possible when a device that includes an infrared light source (such as a commercially available Driver Monitoring System) is installed in the vehicle interior.

• The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly at the following times when the driver is wearing glasses or sunglasses.
• The sunglasses do not allow the easy passage of infrared light.
• The surrounding scenery is reflected strongly in the lenses of the glasses or sunglasses.
• The eyes are hidden by the frame of the glasses and the user recognition camera cannot detect the eyes.
• The light from an infrared light source (LED) is reflected in the lenses of the glasses or sun-glasses.
• The driver is wearing an eye patch.
• The driver is wearing a hat set deeply over the eyes.
• Depending on the type of mask, o correct detection of inattentive/ drowsy driving may not be possible.
• Correct user recognition is not possible if the eyes, nose, or mouth is covered with a mask, muffler, sun-glasses, or other item.
• The Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly when the eyebrows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hidden due to item that is between

the face and the system.

• If a thick cover is attached to the steering wheel, then depending on the position set for the tilt/telescope steering wheel, the cover may block the system's view of the face, and the system and the Driver Monitoring System may not operate correctly.
• Do not attach any stickers to the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED). If the user recognition camera or infrared light source (LED) is covered by an obstruction, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver.
• If an accessory is hung from the inside mirror, correct detection may not be possible.
• Do not touch the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) directly with your fingers. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on the parts, it will not be possible to correctly monitor the driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprint on these pa either wipe them with a soft dry cloth, or wipe gently with a damp cloth after first firmly wringing the water out.
• If the surface of the user recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED) becomes scratched, correct

detection may not be possible. Be careful that hard objects do not contact these parts.

pidf there is condensation on the user ck recognition camera or the infrared light source (LED), correct detection - may not be possible. If there is - condensation on these parts, wipe it away with a soft dry cloth.
- When registering a user for user fra-recognition, avoid closing your eyes as much as possible.
- If the user recognition success rate is low, it is possible that the user not correctly registered. Delete the registered data and perform registration again.
If a user frequently drives both with glasses and contact lenses, it is recommended that registration be performed both when wearing glasses and when wearing contact lenses.
- User recognition starts immediately after entering the vehicle, however if starts the user looks downward or at the driver side mirror for a long time, the user may not be recognized.
- When one person among twins or another pair of persons with similar facial features is registered, the other person may be incorrectly recognized as the registered user

when entering the vehicle.

• If the person in the passenger's seat leans into the driver's seat, or in other cases when there are two or more faces near the driver's seat, the system may not operate correctly.
• There are cases when the system concludes that the user's eyes are closed when the user is looking downward during driving, such as when checking instruments or the navigation screen. In such cases, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
• If the eyes are narrowed when laughing or when there is a dazzling h outside light, the system may judge that the eyes are closed and the drowsy driving warning buzzer may sound or the system may otherwise not operate correctly.
• The drowsy driving or asleep warning states are recognized from the length of time and percentage of the time that the eyes are closed. The drowsy driving warning buzzer will not sound simply when the driver feels sleepy or yawns.

Even when the driver does not feel sleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or if he or she blinks frequently, the drowsy driving warning buzzer may

sound.

• The inattentive driving warning buzzer may sound if the driver leans forward or puts his or her head the window while driving.
• The inattentive driving warning buzzer will not sound when the vehicle is stopped or travelling at slow speed even if the driver is not looking ahead.
• The Driver Monitoring System collects and stores data regarding drivers' facial features. Facial recognition data is stored locally and does not leave the vehicle. It is not transmitted to or stored by SUBARU or anyone else. The Driver Monitoring System may be disabled and any stored driver data may be deleted by following the instructions below. If the Driver Monitoring System is disabled, it will be unable to provide any of its safety or convenience functions.

The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring System setting and the user recognition function setting.

available functions

cle			Driver Monitoring System*
			ON OFF
User recognition function*2g-does	ON	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available Not available
		User recognition function	Available Not available
	OFF	Inattentive/drowsy driving warning	Available Not available
		User recognition function	Not available	Not available

Available function items

			Driver Monitoring System*
			ON OFF
User recognition function*2	ON	Register User Available Not available
		Delete User Available Not available
		Delete All Users Available Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Available Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Available Not available
	OFF	Register User Not available Not available
		Delete User Available Not available
		Delete All Users Available Not available
		Update Seat and Mirror Position	Not available Not available
		Delete Driver Position	Not available	Not available

*1: The system can be turned ON/OFF with the center information display. Refer settings" P215.
*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the center information display customization setti Refer to Car settings" P215.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user is registered.

Available functions

	The user is registered.	The user is not registered.
User recognition function Available		Not available

■ User recognition function

WARNING

Perform registration, retrieving, or delete of the seat position and outside mirror angle before beginning driving. There is the risk of an accident if registration, retrieving, or delete is performed while driving.

When a user is registered, it is possible to retrieve the following settings.

▼ Driver position personalization

• Seat position and outside mirror angle
  Retrieves the registered seat position and outside mirror angle.
• Reverse tilt angle
  Retrieves the registered reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle.

▼ Meter personalization

- Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

▼ Center information display personalization
- Center information display basic screen

Displays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

- Fuel consumption screen

Displays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user.

▼ Climate control personalization

• Climate control settings

Retrieves the preferred setting temperature, airflow mode selection and other settings which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

NOTE

When a recognized user exits the vehicle while the Max A/C mode is on and the push engine switch is turned off, the system stores the setting configured before Max A/C mode was turned on.

▼ Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

Retrieves the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited the vehicle.

▼ Changing the personalization settings

Item
Driver's position personalization	Seat position/outside mirror angle	Change the setting by using center information display customization function. Refer to "Car settings" P215.
	Reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle
Meter personalization*	Combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen	When the customization screen linked with the synchronized user function is selected and the setting is changed, it is automatically stored.
Center information display personalization*	Center information display basic screen
Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store the conditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if the screen was selected and the setting was changed.

■ Inattentive/drowsy driving warning

While driving, the Driver Monitoring System monitors possible cases of driver inattention or drowsiness and warns the driver.

When the inattentive/drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt display appears.

NOTE

• The inattentive/drowsy driving warning operates regardless of the status of the user recognition function.
• The inattentive driving warning does not activate when the turn signal operating or when the select level in the "R" position.
• When the pre-collision brake system display appears on the combination meter OFF indicator is illuminated on the display (color LCD). combination meter display (color LCD), the inattentive driving warning activates at the same timing as usual even when a vehicle ahead or obstacle is detected. For details about the EyeSight system, refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system. When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward direction, the inattentive driving warning may activate at earlier timing than usual. Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
  702304
  When the system monitors that the driver is may be inattentive, it warns the driver.
  When the inattentive driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds and an interrupt
  display appears on the combination meter display (color LCD).
  When the EyeSight system has detected a vehicle ahead or obstacle in the forward election, the inattentive driving warning may activate at earlier timing than usual. Refer to the Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.
  Owner's Manual supplement for the EyeSight system.

▼ Inattentive driving warning

Keep Eyes on Road

▼ Drowsy driving warning

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a is given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer so an interrupt display appears.

	Combination meter display (color LCD)	Center information display	Warning chime
Drowsy driving			Beep, beep... (Continues until the driver's eyes open.)
Very drowsy			Beep, beep, beep, beep, beep (5 times)
Slightly drowsy		— Beep
Not drowsy — —			—

■ Driver Monitoring System in- warning indicator/warning

ds and 1 2 3 4 OFF 305828

1 Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)
2 Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light
3 Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light
4 Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning indicates the status of the Driv Monitoring System on the combination meter display (color LCD).

NOTE

When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illumi-

- CONTINUED -

nated, the Driver Monitoring System function cannot be used. In addition the following items cannot be select

• Register User
• Delete User
• Delete All Users
• Update Seat and Mirror Position
• Delete Driver Position
  • Automatically Retract Seat on Entry

▼ Driver Monitoring System operation indicator light (green)

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is operating.

▼ Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light

This indicator illuminates when the user has turned off the Driver Monitoring System and the Driver Monitoring System is not operating.

▼ Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator light

This indicator illuminates when the Driver Monitoring System is temporarily stopped

NOTE

The Driver Monitoring System stops temporarily in the following circumstances.

- When the temperature of the main unit of the Driver Monitoring System

is high or low.

- When the Driver Monitoring System ed. cannot monitor the driver's eye movement.

• When the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver's eyebrows, eyes, nose or mouth.
• When the camera and the infrared light source (LED) are covered and the Driver Monitoring System cannot monitor the driver correctly.

▼ Driver Monitoring System warning light (yellow)

This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the Driver Monitoring System. Contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

■ Using the Driver Monitoring System

▼ User recognition

When a user is registered with the user recognition function, the Driver Monitoring System performs the following.

Driver Monitoring System SCAN PROCESS

702400

1. When the door is opened and the push-button ignition switch is OFF, the user recognition screen appears and the Driver Monitoring system starts user recognition. The user recognition screen may not appear when the door is opened in some cases, such as when only a short time has passed after the push-button ignition switch was turned OFF. In such cases, user recognition starts when the door is closed however the user recognition screen does not appear.

Welcome,

702401

1. Sit in the driver's seat and face forward for a few moments.
2. When user recognition is completed, the Hello screen appears on the cer information display.

At this time, the seat position, outside mirror angle, climate control settings, combination meter display (color LCD) basic screen and center information display basic screen will all change based the user information.

NOTE

- When a center information display operation switch is pressed, the user recognition screen is canceled, however user recognition continues.

• When the select lever is not in the "P" position, the seat position will not change even when user recognition is completed.
• If user recognition fails, perform recognition again following the instructions, refer to "When a user not recognized" -P411.
• User recognition is not performed while driving.
• If the seat position or outside mirror angle are in motion at the time w user recognition is completed, then it is not possible to retrieve the s position, outside mirror angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror an gle.

- If any of the following operations is performed while retrieving of the seat position or outside mirror angle, retrieving of the seat position and outside mirror angle is canceled.

on - The power seat adjustment switch was operated.
- The outside mirror adjustment switch was operated.
- The "SET" button was pressed.
- The "1" or "2" button was pressed.
- The select lever was moved to position other than "P" position.

When a user is not recognized In the following case, user recognition may not be possible and "User recognition stopped" may be displayed.
- There is an object blocking the camera.

is Remove the obstacle and follow the reference procedure to perform user recognition again. Refer to "Driver Monitoring System" P222.

of when seat s 1 703018

1 Camera

NOTE

- User recognition may not be possible when there is dirt or fingerprints on the user recognition camera. To clean, either wipe using a soft cloth or else wipe gently using a moistened cloth that has been thoroughly

- CONTINUED -

wrung out.

- When the synchronized user function is turned OFF, manual repeat facial scan is not possible.

■ Registering and deleting a user

Users can be registered in the Driver Monitoring System, and registered users can be deleted. For the user registration and delete procedures, refer to "Driver Monitoring System" OF P222.

NOTE

- When the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.

• Register User
• Delete User
• Delete All Users

- User information can also be deleted by resetting the center information display to the factory default settings. When the settings are reset t

the factory default settings, all user. When the user recognition setting is information is deleted. The settings OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring cannot be reset to the factory default system OFF indicator, Driver Monsettings when the Driver Monitoring itoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System is OFF.

■ Registering and deleting driver position personalization

At the time when a user is registered, t seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle are registered at the same time. To change setting for the seat position, outside mir angle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle, refer to "Driver Monitoring System P222.

NOTE

• Start the user registration after adjusting the seat position, outside mirror angles, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle. If they are adjusted during user registration, it may be disrupted. Refer to "Power seat" P34 or "Outside mirrors" P269.
• If the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position before user registration is complete, the information of the adjusted seat position, outside mirror angle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirror angle will not be to saved.

When the user recognition setting is OFF, or when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System

warning is illuminated, the following items cannot be selected.

- Update Seat and Mirror Position - Delete Driver Position

- The driver position can be registered or deleted only when a registered user is sitting in the driver's seat and user recognition is completed.

■ Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF settings

NOTE

• When the Driver Monitoring System is turned OFF after user recognition was completed, the user recognition function stores the Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF state.
• Even when the Driver Monitoring System is set to OFF, the Driver the Monitoring System automatically a- turns ON once the driver's door is of opened and closed while the vehicle is stopped. This only occurs when the user recognition setting is ON. The system then reverts automatically to the OFF state.
  After the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF, if the Driver Monitoring System is turned ON while the driver's door is open, user recognition may not occur correctly.

▼ To turn on/off the Driver Monitoring System

To turn the Driver Monitoring System on and off, operate the center information display. Refer to "Car settings" P215. When the Driver Monitoring System is turned OFF, the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator on the combination meter display (color LCD) will illuminate.

NOTE

Even when the Driver Monitoring System is turned off, the user recognit and automatically retract seat on end functions do not switch on or off automatically.

▼ User recognition settings

The Driver Monitoring System User recognition function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car settings" P215.

NOTE

• The user recognition function setting cannot be changed for each individual user.
• The default setting for the user recognition function is ON.

• When the user recognition function is turned OFF, the following items cannot be selected.

• Repeat Facial Scan

• Register User
• Update Seat and Mirror Position
• Delete Driver Position

▼ Automatically retract seat on entry

The automatically retract seat on entry which automatically slides back the driver's seat when the driver's door is unlocked and opened.

This function can be turned ON/OFF. For the setting procedure, refer to "Car set-dings" P215.

CAUTION

Sit in the seat after the power's movement backward has been completed. Not doing so could result in injury.

NOTE

• If the seat position is not registered in the access key fob memory, the ch automatically retract seat on entry function can be used.

• Even when the automatically retract seat on entry setting is ON, the automatically retract seat on entry function automatically turns OFF when the user recognition function is OFF.

• Automatically retract seat on entry cannot be selected when the Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator, Driver Monitoring System temporary stop indicator, or Driver Monitoring System warning is illuminated.

• This function will operate if the seat is in front of the center of the seat sliding mechanism.

■ How to get the source code using the Open Source

This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL.

http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0101/

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Driving tips

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) 416

8-2. Fuel economy hints...... 416

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)..... 416

8-4. Catalytic converter 417

8-5. Periodic inspections.... 418

8-6. Driving in foreign countries.... 418

8-7. Driving tips for AWD models 4

8-8. On-road and off-road driving.... 420

Before driving.... 421

During driving 421

After driving 421

8-9. Winter driving 422

Operation during cold weather.... 422

Driving on snowy and icy roads.... 424

Corrosion protection....425

Snow tires 425

Tire chains.... 425

Rocking the vehicle.... 426

8-10. Loading your vehicle 426

Vehicle capacity weight 427

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)...... 428

Roof rails 428

Roof tent.... 429

3-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) .....431

Connecting a trailer.... 432

If not towing a trailer 434

8-12. Trailer towing 434

Warranties and maintenance 435

Maximum load limits 435

Trailer Hitches 438

When you do not tow a trailer ....

Connecting a trailer.... 439

Trailer towing tips 440

8-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):

• Do not race the engine. And do not allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm except in an emergency.
• Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed, either fast or slow.
• Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency.
• Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads are replaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel economy hints es

The following suggestions will help to save fuel.
- Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
- Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as long as possible.
- Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
- Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
- Keep the engine properly tuned.
- Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side. Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
- Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
- Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
- Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
  ● Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to prevent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
• Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, except for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
• Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventilation fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.

• Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow, leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system always works properly.

• If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as possible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all windows fully open.

• Keep the rear gate closed while driving to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear The catalytic converter is installed in the crackling sound coming from the ex-exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst tohaust system for a short time after reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, engine has been shut off. This sound thus providing cleaner exhaust. normal. To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

8-4. Catalytic converter

Technical diagram of an automotive engine assembly showing internal components and structural elements (no text or labels)

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

• Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter.
• Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
• Avoid racing the engine.
• Never turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position while the vehicle is moving.
• Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (misfiring,

backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

• Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system.
• Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level.

WARNING

• Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere near flammable materials (e.g., grass, paper, rags or leaves), because the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
• Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very hot.

8-5. Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condit at all times, always have the recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet" performed at the specified time or mileage intervals.

8-6. Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country:

• Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. Refer to "Fuel requirements" P337.
• Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.

8-7. Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

• Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easily lead to a serious accident.
• When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire replace a flat tire, be sure to use original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes m result in severe mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

Line drawing of a car with four wheels and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD models provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand shifting power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force during deceleration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD system, you should keep the following tips in mind.

• An AWD model is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little difference in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden braking. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
• Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The recommended tire pressure is provided on the tire inflation pressure label, which is located under the door latch on the driver's side.

- Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle

By under hard-driving conditions such as steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following items than that specified in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

• Engine oil
• Brake fluid
• Rear differential gear oil
• Continuously variable transmission fluid

he - Front differential gear oil

- There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your vehicle. For detailed information, refer to "Towing" or P460.

8-8. On-road and off-road driving

WARNING

• Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar conditions.
• Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because you are driving an All-Wheel Drive model could easily lead to a serious accident.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. The driver and all passengers should fasten their seatbelts before starting to drive in order to minimize the chance of serious injury or death.
• Do not make sharp turns or quick maneuvers unless absolutely unavoidable. Such actions are dangerous, as you may lose control, possibly resulting in a rollover which could cause death or ser-

ious injury.

• Whenever strong crosswinds are present, slow down sufficiently to maintain control of your vehicle. Remember that your vehicle, with its higher profile and center of gravity, is more likely to be affected by crosswinds than ordinary passenger cars.
• Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. In this case, contact your SUBARU dealer immediately. Regardless of its depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and even vehicle roll-over.

CAUTION

- Frequent driving of an AWD model under hard-driving conditions such as rough roads or off road will necessitate more frequent replacement of the following

items than that specified in the maintenance schedule described in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

• Engine oil
• Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to your SUBARU while operating it off-road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed here is not eligible for warranty coverage.

- After driving on gravel roads or rough roads, check the undercarriage of the vehicle body for any damage, deformation, or paint removal. If you notice any irregularities, contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon as possible.

Your vehicle is classified as a utility vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher ground clearance which enables them to be used for wide applications including off-road driving. However, please keep in mind that your vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A higher center of gravity in relation to the tread width as compared with ordinary passenger cars makes ve-

hicles of this type more likely to roll over reality, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. The high ground clearance of the vehicle is a real advantage, giving you a better view of the road and allowing you anticipate problems earlier. However, re- member that your utility vehicle is not designed for high-speed cornering com- parable to ordinary passenger cars and that your vehicle could roll over if you m a sharp turn at a high speed. If you take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautions such as those in the following list should be taken.

■ Before driving

• Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seatbelts.
• Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or citizens band radio.
• Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

er Never equip your vehicle with tires y larger than those specified in this manual.

a ■ During driving

General precautions:

• Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous a or over rough terrain.
  make Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and the like.
• Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down slopes that are too steep.
• Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
• Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead, drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
• Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn

easily. The exhaust system is very hot while the engine is running and right after the engine stops. This could create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under especially dangerous situations:

• If you must rock the vehicle to free it as from sand or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between will "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
• When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the trans-ys mission in 2nd than 1st. Refer to "Selection of manual mode" P359.

■ After driving

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake discs and brake pads.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off a such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.

- Wash the vehicle's underbody after off road driving. Suspension components are particularly prone to dirt buildup, they need to be washed thoroughly.

8-9. Winter driving

■ Operation during cold weather

▼ Maintenance

- Carry some emergency equipment, such as a window scraper, a bag of sand, fl sa small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for cold winter starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine in very cold weather conditions. Use an engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil will make it harder to start the engine. Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, us hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze in the reservoir tank.
• State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

▼ Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes because that could make the pedals slippery and driving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelerator pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders periodically.

▼ Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe a from around your vehicle if you the vehicle in snow with the eng running.

CAUTION

• Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods cold weather since it could fr in that position.
• When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise wiper blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
• When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavy covered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking action. Check for snow ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. If there is caked snow or ice, remove it being careful not to damage the disc brakes, brake hoses or ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold weather, you should observe the following ps.

1. Place the select lever in the "P" position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.

▼ Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. When an anti-freeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.

▼ Opening rear gate (models with power rear gate)

CAUTION

Before operating the power rear gate, check that there is no frost or snow between the power rear gate and the vehicle body. If you notice frost or snow on the power rear gate remove it. If you forcibly operate the power rear gate with frost or snow, it may cause a malfunction.

■ Driving on snowy and icy roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheels to lock, poss leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) enhances your vehicle's braking performance on snowy and icy roads. For information on braking on slippery surfaces, refer to "ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)" P365 and "Vehicle Dynamics Control system" P367.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving in snowstorms. Snow will enter the engine's intake system and may hinder the airflow, which could result in engine shutdown or even breakdown.

▼ Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make su the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to windshield or rear window, perform the following procedure.

- To thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow selection in 📋 and the temperature set for maximum warmth until the wiper blade rubbers are complete thawed. Refer to "Climate control" P277.

- If your vehicle is equipped with a wipe deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to "Defogger and deicer" P273.

To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers, use the rear window defogger. Refer "Defogger and deicer" P273.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the airflow selection in and the temperature set for maximum warmth. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer. Refer to "Windshield washer" P245.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effectively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the vehicle at road side, use the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer to "Hazard warning flasher" P168.

We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades (winter blades) during the seasons you could have snow and freezing temperatures. Blades of this type give superior wiping performance in snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades that are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may not perform as well as standard wiper to blades. If this happens, reduce the vehicle speed.

NOTE

When the season requiring non-freezing type wiper blades is over, replace them with standard wiper blades.

Corrosion protection

Refer to "Corrosion protection" P474.

Snow tires

WARNING

- When replacing or installing winter tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serio mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
• Clearance between the body and tires

It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

- Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with "all season tires" as original equipment, which are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dangerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.

Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on your vehicle.

Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if used on your vehicle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's in-

- CONTINUED -

structions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed. To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the front wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Overconfidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

■ Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress the accelerator pedal slightly and move the select lever back and forth between "D" and "R" repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle. When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st.

For information about holding the transmission in the 2nd position, refer to "Selection of manual mode" P359.

8-10. Loading your vehicle

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to ride on a folded rear seatback in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.
• Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo low, as close to the floor as possible.

Simple line drawing of a person sitting on the ground next to stacked boxes, with a no-rope symbol in the background (no text or symbols present)

100094

WARNING

• When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
• Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the vehicle's center of gravity and make more prone to tip over.
• Secure lengthy items properly to prevent them from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sudden stop.
• Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
• Do not place anything on the extended cargo area cover. Such items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry upneeded cargo.

■ Vehicle capacity weight

Line drawing of a car with two drivers inside, showing no text or symbols

Line drawing of a car interior with cable routing and a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. It includes the total weight of the driver and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

■ GVWR and GAWR (Gross hicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the bottom of driver's side door pillar shows GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

(assembly) plus the vehicle capacity weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating luggage inside the vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on the distribution of the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, should confirm that GVW and front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a low load range than the originals because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher lo-range than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

■ Roof rails

ch is 801157

1 Roof rails

Yourgo can be carried on the roof after securing the roof crossbars to the roof rails and installing the appropriate carrying attachments. When installing the roof crossbars and the carrying attachments, follow the manufacturer's instructions. The roof rail system is designed to carry loads (cargo, roof crossbars and carrying attachments) of no more than 176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceed your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

- When using the carrying attachments, make sure that the total carrying load of the cargo, roof

crossbars and carrying attachments does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle. Read the manufacturer's instructions and pay attention to not exceed the load limit of the parts.

- For cargo carrying purposes, the roof rails must be used together with the SUBARU recommended roof crossbars and any appropriate carrying attachment that may be needed. The roof rails must never be used alone to carry cargo. Otherwise, damage to the roof or paint, or a dangerous ro hazard due to loss of cargo cou result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity is altered with the weight of load on the roof, thus affecting drivi characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, ha cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswin effects will be increased.

■ Roof tent

Line drawing of a car viewed from the side, showing front and rear views with no text or symbols

road

could

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle's roof can adversely affect handling, braking, and rollover resistance. The vehicle must never be driven with of total roof rail load in excess of 1 of the (80 kg).

CAUTION

d. The roof rail load limit for stationary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg) applies only when the vehicle is parked and the load is evenly distributed left/right and front/rear and the roof crossbars and

roof tent are tightly secured to the vehicle. If these conditions are not met, the load limit will be lower.

- The maximum load limit of the roof crossbars must be obtained from the manufacturer or retailer of the roof rack. When driving the vehicle, the maximum roof rail load is 176 lbs (80 kg) or the crossbar load limit (whichever is lower).

Roof tents may be used under certain conditions at your own risk.

▼ When driving the vehicle

The total weight on the roof rails, including the roof crossbars and roof tent, must not exceed the vehicle's roof rail load of 175 abs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

tips

C B A 801173

A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

▼ When the vehicle is parked on ground

D C B A 801174

A: Roof rails
B: Roof crossbars
C: Roof tent
D: Occupants in the roof tent

The total weight on the roof rails – including the roof crossbars, roof tent, and all occupants and contents in the roof tent – must not exceed either the vehicle's roof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg)), evenly distributed, or the load limit of the roof crossbars, whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A).

B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could cause damage to the vehicle or racking system. The vehicle must never be driven with occupants in the roof tent. Before the vehicle is driven, occupants and cargo must be removed from the roof tent and the roof rail load must be restored to within the roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg). Refer to the user manual that accompanied the roof tent for important safety information and instructions on the proper installation and use of the tent.

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer tion)

WARNING

• Never exceed the maximum weight specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight could cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries. Permissible trailer weight changes depending on the situation. For possible recommendations and limitations, refer to "Trailer towing" P434.
• Trailer brakes are required when the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer has safety chains and that each chain will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. Towing trailers without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.
• Be sure to check the hitch pin and safety pin for positive locking placement before towing a trailer. If the ball mount comes off the hitch receiver, the trailer could

op- get loose and create a traffic safety hazard.

• Although towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles vary by state/region, all regulations agree that specifications such as the maximum gross trailer weight must not exceed the lesser of the following:
• Maximum gross trailer weight
• Maximum gross tongue weight
• GVWR
• GAWR

● Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.

- Use only the ball mount supplied with this hitch. Use the hitch or as a weight carrying hitch. Do use with any type of weight distributing hitch.

- The standard bumper beam must be installed after you remove the trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have the original.

- Safety performance is decreased and there is increased risk of injury to passengers in the case of an accident if the trailer hitch or a standard bumper beam is not installed. One of them must always be installed on the vehicle.

- If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not possible to install the rear towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and maximum gross tongue weight are indicated in the following table. Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler.

Maximum gross trailer weight	Maximum gross tongue weight
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)	500 lbs (227 kg)

Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler.

Maximum gross trai-otler weight	Maximum gross tongue weight
2,000 lbs (907 kg)	200 lbs (91 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification"

- CONTINUED -

P531.)

*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P531.)

When towing a trailer, refer to "Trailer towing" P434.

■ Connecting a trailer

801467

Diagram showing car seatbelting technique with magnified detail view

1. Remove the 2 clips from the bottom the cover.

NOTE

Looking under the cover from bottom there are 2 clips fixed under the co fastened on each side.

Remove the clips one by one that are fastened under the vehicle.

Diagram of a car's side profile showing airflow or flow direction (no text or symbols)

d. Remove the cover.

NOTE

Pull the bottom of the cover from where

the triangle mark▲“▲▲” is located to overmove it.

are

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and a vehicle body section view

1 Ball mount
2 Hitch pin
3 Safety clip
A Hitch receiver tube
3. Insert the ball mount into the hitch receiver tube.

1. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes through the ball mount.
2. Insert the safety clip to the groove on the hitch pin securely.
3. Check the ball mount assembly by pulling on it to make sure it does not come off the hitch receiver.

1 2 801164

1 Hitch ball installation point
2 Hooks for safety chains

1. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch that is appropriate for the ball mount and your trailer. The hitch ball must securely installed on the ball mount.

2. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

3. Connect the trailer and the hitch with safety chains that will hold the trailer's maximum gross weight. The chains

should cross under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping onto the ground in case it should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any part of the vehicle other than the safety chain hooks.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Hitch harness connector (7-pin type)

Technical line drawing of a vehicle chassis frame with mounting brackets and structural components (no text or symbols)

Hitch harness connector (4-pin type)

1. Connect the hitch wire harness's black 4-pin or 7-pin wire connector to the towing trailer's wire harness.
2. Confirm proper function of the hitch wire harness by individually activating the brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire harness before launching or retrieving a watercraft.

■ If not towing a trailer

• Remove the ball mount from the hitch receiver tube and insert the receiver cover onto the hitch receiver tube an or install bumper cover.
• Place the dust cap over the 4-pin or pin connector of the hitch wire harne to protect against possible damage.
• Occasionally lubricate terminals of the 4-pin or 7-pin connector using terminal grease.

8-12. Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your vehicle.

Drive carefully when towing a trailer, and always consider the following conditions.

• Road conditions
• Weather conditions
• Vehicle load weight
• Trailer load weight

Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer to assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment appropriate for your vehicle. Do not use towing equipment other than genuine SUBARU towing equipment. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions for proper installation and use provided by the trailer or caravan's manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that result from trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to follow the proper instructions. Regularly check that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

■ Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to a trailer, more frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load. (Refer to "Maintenance schedule under severe driving conditions" in the "Warrant and Maintenance Booklet".)

Under no circumstances should a trailer towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle v any new powertrain component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) driving.

■ Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum load limits explained in the following. Exceeding the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage.

tow

CAUTION

• Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
  Before towing a trailer, check the trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load. Make sure the load and its distribution in your vehicle and trailer are acceptable

▼ Total trailer weight

Simple line drawing of a vehicle on a platform with a wall-mounted analog clock (no text or symbols)

Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo load) must never exceed the maximum total trailer weight in the following table.

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000	Ibs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes.	Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler*: 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg)Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler*: 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

*1: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label continuously variable transmission type, refer Vehicle identification" P531.)

*2: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label continuously variable transmission type, refer vehicle identification" P531.)

▼ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

for the for the 800368

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the combined total of the weight of the vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment installed on your vehicle. Therefore, the GVW changes depending on the situation. Determine the GVW each time before going on a trip by putting your vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a bracket and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by SUBARU is shown on the certification label located at the bottom of driver's door pillar of your vehicle.

▼ Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

800369

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never exceed the Gross A Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating passengers and luggage inside the vehicle. The front and rear GAWR of your vehicle that is given by SUBARU are a shown on the certification label located the bottom of driver's side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

▼ Tongue load

Diagram showing a vehicle with a valve and a stopwatch, no text or symbols present

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailertongue load is from 8 reas 11 percent of the total trailer weight and does not exceed the maximum value of the following.

• Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 500 lbs (227 kg)
• Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 200 lbs (91 kg)

1 2 800370

1 Jack
2 Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a bathroom scale as shown in the illustrati above. When weighing the tongue load, sure to position the towing coupler at the height at which it would be during actua towing, using a jack as shown.

F 60% 40% 50% 50% 800216

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by product distribution of the load in the trailer. New load the trailer with more weight in the stack than in the front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly possible on both the left and right sides. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured prevent a change in weight distribution while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more weight in the back of trailer's axle than in the front, the load is taken the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to skid, especially during braking or when vehicle speed is reduced during cornering, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

■ Trailer Hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also, drilling the frame or underbody of your vehicle could cause deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around the drilled hole.

CAUTION

- Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or other systems when installing a hitch or other trailer towing off

equipment.

- Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause damage to axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than a genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine SUBARU trailer hitch is available from your SUBARU dealer.

■ When you do not tow a

CAUTION

• The housing should be kept dirt and corrosion-free at the points of contact. The surfaces only require cleaning with a cloth. Grease or other lubricants should never be used.
• If the ball is not installed, the plastic insert and/or bumper cover should then be installed for protection and to prevent it from getting dirty.

When the ball is not used, place the cap and store securely.

■ Connecting a trailer

the▼ Trailer brakes

WARNING

• Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and its cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) total weight.
• Do not directly connect your trailer's hydraulic brake system to the hydraulic brake system in your vehicle. Direct connection would cause the vehicle's brake performance to deteriorate and could lead to an accident.

If your trailer's total weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs (453 kg), the trailer is required to be equipped with its own brake system. Electric brakes or surge brakes are recommended, and must be installed properly. Check that your trailer's brakes conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. Your SUBARU's brake system is not designed to be tapped into the trailer's hydraulic brake system. Please ask your SUBARU dealer and professional trailer supplier for more information about the trailer's brake system.

▼ Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. Towing trailer without safety chains could create a traffic safety hazard if the trailer separates from the hitch due to coupling damage or hitch ball damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch ball should break or become disconnected, the trailer could get loose and create a traffic safety hazard. For safety, always connect the towing vehicle and trailer with trailer safety chains. Two chains should be used in total, one to the right side and the other of the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains crossing each other under the trailer tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping onto the ground in case the trailer tongue should disconnect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking tight turn situations into account; however, be careful not to let them drag on the ground.

▼ Side mirrors

Top-down diagram of a car with a vehicle-mounted sensor array, no text or symbols present

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle's standard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.

▼ Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper connection of trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction your vehicle's lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle electrical system requires modifications to the vehicle's lighting circuit to increase its capacity and accommodate wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights are connected properly, please consult your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper operation of the turn signals and the brake line each time you connect a trailer to your vehicle.

▼ Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated. Refer to "Tires" P526.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer manufacturer's specifications. Also check federal, state, province and/or other applicable regulations.

cle's the event your vehicle gets a flat tire to when towing a trailer, ask a commercial its road service representative or professional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precaution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.

■ Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

• For models equipped with the BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) driving support systems, when towing a trailer, touch "BSD/RCTA" to deactivate the system. The system may not operate properly due to the blocked radar waves. For details about how to turn on/off the BSD/RCTA, refer to "Car settings" P215.
• For models equipped with Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system, consult your SUBARU dealer for additional information about towing a trailer.
• Towing a trailer in high temperatures, or on long or steep grades,

may cause the vehicle to overheat. Refer to "Engine overheating" P459.

• When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking performance will be different when compared to normal operation. For safety's sake, you should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should never drive at excessive speeds. You should also keep the following tips in mind:
• When parking on a steep slope with a trailer attached to your vehicle, the braking power of the electronic parking brake may not be sufficient since strong braking power is needed.

▼ Before starting out on a trip

• Check the towing regulations for trailer or caravan vehicles that vary by state/region. Failure to comply with the procedures set forth will not only compromise your safety, but will also negate your insurance coverage and/or may violate the state road and traffic acts and regulations.
• Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good condition.

any problems are apparent, do not tow the trailer.

• Check that the vehicle rests horizontally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is tipped sharply up at the front and down at the rear, check the total trailer weight, GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then confirm that the load and its distribution are acceptable.
• Check that the tire rating and pressures are correct.
  the Check that the vehicle and trailer are connected properly. Confirm that:

- The trailer tongue is connected properly to the hitch ball.

• The trailer lights connector is connected properly and trailer's brake lights illuminate when the vehicle's brake pedal is pressed, and that the trailer's turn signal lights flash when the vehicle's turn signal lever is operated.
• The safety chains are connected properly.
• All cargo in the trailer is secured safely in position.
• The side mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without a significant blind spot.

- Sufficient time should be taken to learn the "feel" of the vehicle/trailer combination before starting out on a trip. In an

area free of traffic, practice turning, stopping and backing up.

▼ Driving with a trailer

You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of control.

• Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
• Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
• Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel and promptly begin decelerating your vehicle at a gradual pace.
• When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because of the added weight and length caused by attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
• Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can be difficult and requires experience.
• Never accelerate or steer rapidly, and

grip the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Diagram illustrating car steering and steering wheel movement, showing hand positions and gear shift steps

To reverse around a corner, perform the following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the opposite direction to the way you want to

turn.

1. Once the trailer begins to swing around, straighten the steering wheel
2. Turn the wheel in the opposite direction.
3. Steer the vehicle around to be in line with the trailer, then straighten the steering again.
4. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing the trailer and have repairs performed immediately by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

! Driving on grades

• Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear (if necessary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your vehicle's brakes. Do not make sudden down-shifts.
• When driving uphill in hot weather, the air conditioner may turn off automatically to protect the engine from overheating.
• When driving uphill in hot weather, pay attention to the following items because the engine and transmission are relatively prone to overheating.

Temperature gauge

AT OILTEMP warning light

Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped)

If any of the following conditions occur, immediately turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the nearest safe location. For further instructions and additional information, refer to the following sections.

• "If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency" P446
• "Engine overheating" P459
• Temperature gauge needle approaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer to "Engine coolant temperature gauge" P170.
• AT OIL TEMP warning light illuminates. Refer to "AT OIL TEMP warning light" P178.
• Rear differential oil temperature warning light (if equipped) illuminate. Refer to "Rear differential oil temperature warning light" P178.

- Avoid using the accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the parking brake or foot brake. That may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

▼ Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into "P" position and shut off the engine.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

In case of emergency

9-1. If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency.... 446
9-2. Maintenance tools .... 446 Jack and jack handle .... 447
9-3. Spare tire.... 447 Removing the spare tire....447 Re-storage of spare tire ....450
9-4. Temporary spare tire 451
9-5. Flat tires .... 452 Changing a flat tire .... 452 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models).... 455
9-6. Jump starting.... 457 How to jump start .... 457
9-7. Engine overheating 459 If steam is coming from the engine compartment 459 If no steam is coming from the engine compartment 459
9-8. Towing 460 Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes 460

Using a flat-bed truck.... 462

Towing with all wheels on the ground.... 463

9-9. Electronic parking brake - if the electronic parking brake cannot be released .....464
9-10. Access key fob - if access key fob does not operate properly ....464 Locking and unlocking.... 464 Switching power status .... 465 Starting engine .... 465
9-11. Rear gate - if the rear gate cannot be opened 466
9-12. Malfunctions of the center information display....467
9-13. Moonroof (if equipped) - if the moonroof does not close....468
9-14. If your vehicle is involved in an accident ...4 To restart the engine when involved in an accident .... 468 Automatic door locking/unlocking operation when involved in an accident .... 469

9-1. If you park your vehicleNOTE case of an emergency When

204313

The hazard warning flasher should be used in day or night to warn other drivers when you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be activated regardless of the ignition switch position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.

When the hazard warning flasher is the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Maintenance tools

on,

1 2 3 1 4 5 6 901275

Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools.

1 Extension × 2
2 Wheel nut wrench
3 Jack handle

4 Jack
5 Screwdriver
6 Towing hook (eye bolt)

Jack and jack handle

Line drawing of a car interior showing the door, drawer, and window (no text or symbols)

The jack and jack handle is stored under the cargo area.

For how to use the jack, refer to "Flat P452.

9-3. Spare tire

Line drawing of a car rear view and side profile details (no text or symbols)

The spare tire is stored in the spare tire holder located under the cargo area.

The spare tire holder has a hoist mechanism that can lower and raise the spare tire easily.

The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires.

• The temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle
  • A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the full-size flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire, carefully read "Temporary spare tire" P451 for instructions and precautions.

Removing the spare tire

1. Take the wheel nut wrench, screwdriver, and extension out of the tool box. Refer to "Maintenance tools" P446.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's side panel with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the subfloor storage lid in cargo area.
2. Take out the jack.

三

tBe

of emergency

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

1. Open the cover located at the center the luggage floor by screwdriver.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with a central shaft and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

6f Fit the two extensions onto the hex-head hoist shaft end.

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a highlighted component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the rubber cap.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with no visible text or symbols

1. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the extension.
2. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench until

the cable is extracted fully.

CAUTION

• Be sure to remove (not simply keep it open) the subfloor storage lid before turning the wheel nut wrench, otherwise the lid may be damaged.
• Do not put your fingers into the center hole of the temporary spare tire while pulling it out, because they might be pinched in between the wheel and the retainer.

Technical illustration showing car wheel assembly and tire treading technique (no text or symbols)

1. Tilt up the spare tire, then remove the tire retainer as showing in the figure.
2. After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, the cable must be wound up completely by turning the hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear

a clicking sound. Also visually inspect the cable to make certain that there is no longer any slack present.

Mechanical diagram showing a car wheel and suspension rod assembly (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Do not use the extension when turning the wheel nuts. If you did, you would not be able to achieve sufficient tightening torque. The wheel nuts could then come loose, resulting in a serious accident.
• When using the spare tire hoist: After the temporary spare tire is removed from the cable, wind the cable up completely until the retainer at end of the cable sits against the underside of the ve-

hicle. Driving with the cable not retracted fully could result in damage to the adjacent under floor parts and lead to a serious accident.

- The spare tire holder is designed to carry only the following kinds of tires.

• The temporary spare tire that came with your vehicle
• A full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the full-size flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that is not flat in the spare tire holder. Doing so can result in damage to adjacent under floor parts and can lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

When using the spare tire hoist: Do not use air tools or power tools turn the spare tire hoist shaft end. I you do, it could result in severe mechanical damage to the spare tire hoist.

■ Re-storage of spare tire

1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently enough to allow the cable end retainer go through center hole of the temporary spare tire.

1. Insert the retainer through the center hole of the temporary tire as showing the figure.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle interior showing structural components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up completely until you hear a few clicking sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare tire holding cable has been wound up completely by shaking the temporary tire.

CAUTION

If the temporary spare tire is not stored securely, it could damage adjacent areas of the vehicle and make an abnormal noise.

in

1. Install the rubber cap.
2. Install the cover.
3. Store the wheel nut wrench, two extensions, jack and jack handle in

their storage locations.

1. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

CAUTION

• When stowing a flat tire in the spare tire holder, turn the hoist shaft end only slowly. If it is turned quickly, the wheel disc of the flat tire could be damaged.
• A full-size flat tire should be stowed in the spare tire holder in an emergency only. After having the flat tire repaired, immediately swap it with the temporary spare tire.
• Remember that the tread width of a flat tire is wider than that of temporary spare tire. When carrying a flat tire stowed in the spare tire holder, make sure the tire does not touch any obstacles.

9-4. Temporary spare tire

WARNING

• Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load. Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead to an accident.
• When a spare tire is mounted or wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and or system resetting.

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and lighter than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Remove the temporary spare tire and reinstall the conventional tire as soon as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire periodically to keep the tire ready for use. For the correct tire pressure, refer to "Temporary spare tires" P527.

When using the temporary spare tire, note the following.

• Drive with caution when the temporary spare tire is installed. Avoid hard acceleration and braking, or fast cornering, as control of the vehicle may be lost.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly.

- CONTINUED -

• Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
• Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so road clearance is reduced.

1 2 900231

1 Tread wear indicator bar
2 Indicator location mark

• When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
• The temporary spare tire must be used only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel gets punctured, replace the wheel with a rear wheel and install the temporary spare tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-5. Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place.

■ Changing a flat tire

WARNING

• Use only the jack and the jack handle provided with your vehicle. The jack supplied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never put any part of your body under the vehicle while the vehicle is being supported by the jack. Doing so could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road surface. tire The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the ground and this can result in serious injury or death.

• Before jacking up the vehicle, be sure that there are no occupants or cargo on board.

• Do not jack up the vehicle with an object on or underneath the jack. The jack can be unstable and this can result in a severe accident.
  ● Always turn off the engine before raising the flat tire off the ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle supported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point due to a jolt and this can result in serious injury or death.

• All passengers must exit the vehicle before you raise it with the jack. Raising the vehicle with someone inside of it could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not start the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Doing so could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTE

Contact a SUBARU dealer when jacking up the vehicle using a garage jack.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and shift the select lever to the "P" (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and unload all occupants and luggage from the vehicle.

Diagram of a car with wheels and a ramp, showing motion direction (no text or symbols)

1. Put wheel blocks at the front and rea of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

ng 1 2 3 901274

1 Wheel nut wrench
2 Jack handle
3 Jack
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and wheel nut wrench. The tools are stored under the cargo area. Refer to "Maintenance tools" P446.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubricated before using it.

1. Remove the spare tire. Refer to "Removing the spare tire" P447 and strictly follow the instructions.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your is a temporary spare tire, carefully read "Temporary spare tire" P451 and strictly follow the instructions.

Technical line drawing of a car wheel with spokes and a black arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

900635

- CONTINUED -

1. Place the jack under the side sill at the the wheel nut wrench. front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat tire.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical linkage or bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical clamp or tool with a hook and handle (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the hole of

Line drawing of a person using a tool to lift a car wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Insert the jack handle into the jack-screw, and turn the handle until the clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than necessary.

2. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

Line drawing of a hand adjusting a car brake caliper on a wheel (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a hand pressing a tire onto a circular mechanical component (no text or symbols)

1. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a cloth.
2. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the w studs or nuts when the spare tire installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose and lead to an accident.

1. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.

600192

1. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer to "Tires" P526. Never use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed the specified torque. Have

the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility.

wheel

Technical illustration of a car wheel assembly with a tool, showing no text or symbols

WARNING

Do not use the extension when turning the wheel nuts. If you did, you would not be able to achieve sufficient tightening torque. The wheel nuts could then come loose, resulting in a serious accident.

. Store the flat tire in the spare tire holder.

Refer to "Removing the spare tire" P447 for its location, instructions and precautions.

Store the jack, jack handle and whe nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury. Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.

■ Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

702350

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with the warning message indicated by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (example, a blow-out caused running over a sharp object).

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, never brake suddenly. Instead, perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four tires and adjust the pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the tire inflation pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace with a spare tire as soon as possible.

(for) When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately one minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

- When a tire is repaired with liquid sealant, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. You may reuse the wheel if there is no damage to it and if the sealant residue is properly cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

9-6. Jump starting

WARNING

- Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical help.

Keep everyone including children away from the battery.

• The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is brought near it. Do not smoke light a match while jump startir
• Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen. It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
• Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings, bands or other metal jewelry.

• Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have loose or missing insulation.
  Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are available.
• A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is advisable.
• Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.

■ How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.

Technical diagram showing automotive engine components with labeled parts and wiring connections

A Booster battery
B Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the discharged battery.
2. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order.

9-7. Engine overheating

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until 2. the engine has been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot, the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which could burn you very seriously.

CAUTION

If the engine overheats, the engine speed or the vehicle speed may be reduced. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately.

■ If steam is coming from engine compartment

• Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" "OFF" position and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down.
• Contact an authorized SUBARU dealer.

■ If no steam is coming from engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the engine compartment. Refer to "Engine hood" P483.
   re. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immediately turn off the engine and contact an authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the engine. If the temperature gauge stays in the overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If the coolant level is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the coolant level or how to add coolant, refer to "Engine coolant" P489.

1. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.

If the remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing down and turning it.

9-8. Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done your SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.

Three flatbed trucks with a diagonal line crossing, each accompanied by a car silhouette (no text or symbols on the vehicles themselves)

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the front wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the ground, or with the rear wheels raised off the ground while the front wheels are on the ground. This would cause the vehicle to spin away due to the operation or deterioration of the center differential.

■ Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes

byThe towing hooks should be used only an emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes. Never use suspension parts or other parts of the body for towing or tie-down purposes.

▼ Front towing hook

The front towing hook is located on the bottom of the body on the front left side the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and side panel (no text or symbols)

▼ Rear towing hook

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle out of the cargo area.

Diagram of a car's side panel showing a lever mechanism (no text or symbols present)

1. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and you will find a threaded hole for attaching the towing hook.

Diagram of a car's side panel with a lever and adjustment knob, no text or symbols present

1. Screw the towing hook into the thread hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
   

Line drawing showing a car interior with tools and a directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Tighten the towing hook securely using the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook from▼ Front tie-down hooks

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

• Do not use the towing hook for purposes other than towing your vehicle.
• Be sure to remove the towing hook after towing. Leaving the towing hook mounted on the vehicle could interfere with proper operation of the fuel pump shut off function when the vehicle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bumper and the towing hook, do not apply an excessive load to the towing hook.

Technical diagram of a vehicle chassis showing front and side views with no visible text or symbols

The front tie-down hooks are located between each of the front tires and the front bumper.

▼ Rear tie-down holes

1 900963

1 Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down h To use the rear tie-down holes, remove

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes3, return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for downward anchoring. If they are used to anchor the vehicle in any other direction, cables may slip out of the holes, possibly causing a dangerous situation.

■ Using a flat-bed truck

Line drawing of a flatbed truck with a car on top, no text or symbols present

This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following procedures to ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select lever into the "P" pole. position.

the Apply the parking brake firmly.

Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

• If your vehicle has a bumper under guard (optional), be careful not to scrape it when placing the vehicle on the carrier and when removing the vehicle from the carrier.
• Transport by flat-bed truck may cause the headlights to become misaligned. In such a case, have the headlight alignment checked by a SUBARU dealer after transporting the vehicle by flat-bed truck.

■ Towing with all wheels on ground

Line drawing of a truck and a car on a road, no text or symbols present

1. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in the neutral position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the "ON" position while the vehicle is being towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

- Never turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position while the vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direction of the wheels will be locked.

the Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel.

CAUTION

• If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
• Sometime damaged vehicles cannot be towed because of their damaged condition. In that case, use a flat-bed truck for transportation.
• The traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (32 km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
• Use a flat-bed truck if there are long distance downgrades or steep slopes. However, do not apply the brake pedal for a long time because the engine braking will not work while towing. Doing

so could overheat the brake.

• Drive carefully and do not make an impact on the towing rope by suddenly starting.
• Use a specific towing rope for towing. If wire ropes and metal chains are needed to be used for towing, wrap the contact portion of the bumper with cloth to protect it from damage.

For

9-9. Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released

Contact your SUBARU dealer and have your SUBARU dealer release the electronic parking brake.

e9-10. Access key fob - if a-Lcess key fob does not operate properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic sources and signal transmitters away from the area between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch. They may interfere with the communication between the access key fob and the push-button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable because of strong radio signals in the surrounding area or a low battery condition of the access key fob.

• Locking/unlocking doors (including the rear gate)
• Switching power status
• Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following procedure. When the battery of the acc key fob is discharged, replace it with a one. Refer to "Replacing battery of acc key fob" or P517.

a-Locking and unlocking

rate 1 2 202500

1 Release button
2 Emergency key

^a While pressing the release button of the access key fob, take out the emergency ^b Key.

Lock or unlock the driver's door with the emergency key in the procedure described in "Locking and unlocking from the outside" P137.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to attach the emergency key back to the new access key fob.

■ Switching power status

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the "P" (Park) position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the status of the push-button ignition switch changes to either of the following.

2. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated: "ACC"

3. Under other conditions: "ON"

4. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated, press the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal released. The status of the push-button ignition switch then changes to "ON".

NOTE

If the power does not switch even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

■ Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever to the "P" (Park) position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

1. Hold the access key fob with the buttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it. When the communication between the access key fob and the vehicle is completed, a chime (ding) will sound. At the same time, the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
2. After the push-button ignition switch turns to the "ACC" or "ON" position, while depressing the brake pedal, press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though the above procedure was followed precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-11. Rear gate - if the re-gate cannot be opened

In the event that you cannot open the gate by operating the rear gate opener button, you can open it from inside the cargo area.

900949

1. Remove the access cover at the bottom-center of the rear gate trim using a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind the rear gate trim.

ar CAUTION Never operate the rear gate open lever with fingers because doing may cause an injury. Always use flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with a tool inserted, no visible text or symbols

Models without power rear gate

so a 900834

Models with power rear gate

1. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to the right position.

9-12. Malfunctions of the center information display

If the following screens are displayed, temporary errors or malfunctions may occur in the center information display. If they are only temporary errors, the following procedure may help to eliminate them.

- + - 901090

Shutting down the screen

Pure black and white geometric shape with no text or symbols

Freezing the screen

Pure black and white geometric shape with no text or symbols

Blacking out the screen

Diagram showing a cross symbol with plus sign and downward arrow, no readable text or labels present

Error A

901094

Error B

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition switch once to the "LOCK/OFF" position, then start the engine.

- CONTINUED -

1 901377

1 Volume button

1. If the center information display cannot be recovered even though the engine has been restarted, press and hold the volume button for more than 10 seconds. The center information display will start up again.
2. If the center information display is not recovered by restarting it, contact your SUBARU dealer.

9-13. Moonroof (if equipped) 9-14. If your vehicle is in- - if the moonroof does notvolved in an accident close To magnet the engine when

If the moonroof does not close, we recommend that you have the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.

■ To restart the engine when involved in an accident

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in an accident, be sure to inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting the engine. If you find that fuel has leaked on the ground, do not try to restart the engine. The fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Immediately contact the nearest automotive service facility. We recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off system. When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying the fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage. However, depending on the impact conditions at the time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off system may not operate. Perform the following procedures to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK or "ACC" position.
2. Restart the engine.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch the "ACC" or "OFF" position.
2. Restart the engine.

■ Automatic door locking/un-locking operation when involved in an accident

When the automatic door locking/unlocking function is ON, all the doors will be locked automatically while driving. For further details, refer to "Automatic door locking/unlocking" P139.

When the vehicle sustains a strong impa which may trigger the airbags to deploy, the door locks may be unlocked automatically to enable emergency escape. Generally, an impact sustained from a rear e collision does not trigger the airbags to deploy. However if the impact is strong enough to deploy the airbags, it can also trigger the unlocking function.

Under such circumstance, the automatic door locking/unlocking function will be suspended and the doors will remain unlocked.

'Confirm the safety of the surroundings first and carry out the following to retrieve the automatic door locking/unlocking function.'

Models without "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK" position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position.

Models with "keyless access with push-button start system":

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to the "ON" position.

NOTE

Depending on the severity of the impact, the emergency unlocking may not function.

end CAUTION

If the following occur, there may malfunction in the system.

Have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

• The doors unlock automatically while driving.
• With all doors shut, the doors unlock when pressing the lock side of the power door locking switch.
• The automatic door locking/un-locking function does not operate.

be a

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Appearance care

10-1. Exterior care.... 472

Washing 472

Waxing and polishing 473

Cleaning alloy wheels 474

10-2. Corrosion protection 474

Most common causes of corrosion 474

To help prevent corrosion ....475

10-3. Cleaning the interior 475

Seat fabric 475

Leather seat materials 476

Synthetic leather upholstery.... 476

Water repellent seat material (if equipped) 476

Seatbelt 476

Instrument panel, console panel, switches, combination meter, rear climate control panel, and other plastic surfaces 476

Center information display 477

10-1. Exterior care

■ Washing

CAUTION

• When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
• Do not wash the engine compartment and area adjacent to it. If water enters the engine air intake or electrical parts, it will cause engine trouble or a malfunction of electrical equipment.
• When washing inner fenders, underbody, bumpers and protruding objects such as exhaust pipes and exhaust finishers, be careful to prevent injuries from contacting sharp ends.
• Do not use any organic solvents when washing the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a detergent with organic solvents is used to wash the cover surface, completely rinse off the detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be damaged.

• Since your vehicle is equipped with a rear wiper, automatic carwash brushes could become tangled around it, damaging the wiper arm and other components. Ask the automatic carwash operator not to let the brushes touch the wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm on the rear window glass with adhesive tape before operating the machine.
• Models with the automatic rain sensing windshield wipers: When washing the vehicle, turn off the wipers. If the wiper sw is in the "AUTO" position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly while washing the vehicle and cause injury.
• When washing a vehicle equipped with the automatic rain sensing windshield wipers, make sure that the wipers are turned off. If the wiper switch is in the "AUTO" position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly while washing the vehicle and the wiper blades could be damaged.

NOTE

• When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type.
• The rear view camera lens has a hard coating to help prevent scratches. However, when washing the vehicle or cleaning the camera lens, be careful not to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a washing brush directly on the camera lens. The image quality of the rear view camera may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle's beauty is frequent washing. Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap, and bird droppings should be washed off using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent, make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a chamois or soft cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand brush whe washing down underbody, inner fenders and suspension to effectively remove mud and dirt off.

▼ Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are extremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables floor pan and fenders, and suspension. Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody components may accelerate their corrosion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sand roads, wash the mud and sand off the underbody. Carefully flush the suspension A and axle parts, as they are particularly w prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not y a sharp-edged tool to remove caked muda

CAUTION

- Be careful not to damage brake hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus- pension components.

- Be careful not to flush the engin bottom for a long time. It may cause damage of some electrical parts.

▼ Using a warm water washer

- Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm or more between the washer nozzle and the vehicle.

Do not wash the same area continuously.

If a stain will not come out easily, wa by hand. Some warm water washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type, and they can damage or deform the resin parts such as moldings, or cause water to leak into the vehicle.

■ Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.

use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the manufacturer's instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original luster and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the luster or tone cannot be restored, lightly polish the surface with a fine-grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000 grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto-paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic solvents on the surface of the bulb assembly cover. However, if a polish or wax with organic solvents is

- CONTINUED -

applied to the cover surface, completely wipe off the polish or wax. Otherwise, the cover surface may be damaged.

NOTE

• Be careful not to block the windshield washer nozzles with wax when waxing the vehicle.
• Do not wipe the rear view camera with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To remove contamination, wipe the camera with a cloth moistened with diluted neutral detergent and then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
• When waxing the vehicle, be careful not to apply the wax to the rear view camera. If it comes in contact with the camera, moisten a clean cloth with diluted neutral detergent to remove the wax.

■ Cleaning alloy wheels

• Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
• Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thor-

oughly with water. Do not clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose to a high-speed washing device.

- Clean the vehicle (including the alloy wheels) with water as soon as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.

10-2. Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable operation.

■ Most common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion are:

• The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
• Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:

• It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is considerable industrial pollution.

• It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures range just above freezing.

• Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
  ● High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which cannot quickly due to lack of proper ventilati

■ To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent corrosion of the body and suspension components. Also, wash the vehicle promptly after driving on any of the following surfaces.

● Roads that have been salted to prevent them from freezing in winter
- Mud, sand, or gravel
- Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be given a very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint soon as you find them.

d) check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under the floor mat because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle in the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and ho latch should be inspected and lubricated periodically.

10-3. Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches. (Do not use organic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may damage the conductors printed on the window.

e■ Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly if the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

- CONTINUED -

make sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not benzine, paint thinner, or any sin materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color deteriorate.

■ Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high quality natural product which will retain a distinctive appearance and feel for many years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on surface can cause leather to become brittle and wear prematurely. To maintain its resiliency, leather should be cleaned monthly or whenever it becomes soiled. Before cleaning leather upholstery, vacuum it to remove dust. Use a soft and lint-free cloth dampened with lukewarm water and mild soap, taking care not to soak the leather or allow water to penetrate the stitched seams. Use a gentle circular motion while cleaning the leather do not rub or apply extreme pressure. Wipe the leather again with another clea slightly damp cloth to remove soap residue and dry with a soft cloth.

Minor surface blemishes or difficult dirt spots may be treated with a commercial leather spray. Never use alcohol, cleaning solvents, leather oils, varnishes or polishes on your leather as it will dry out the leather finish.

If your SUBARU is to be parked for a lo time in bright sunlight, it is recommended that the seats and headrests be covered, or the windows shaded, to prevent fading or shrinkage.

You will discover that each leather seat section will develop soft folds or wrinkles, which is characteristic of genuine leather.

■ Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wi off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial U foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window

ecleaner or fuel must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

■ Water repellent seat material long (if equipped)

^d The water repellency of the seat fabric will decrease over time. Do not apply additional water repellent coating.

Seatbelt

'For details about how to clean the seatbelt, refer to "Seatbelt maintenance" P61.

■ Instrument panel, console panel, switches, combination meter, rear climate control panel, and other plastic surfaces

| Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate control panel, audio equipment, instrument panel, center console, combination meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

- Do not use organic solvents such as paint thinners or fuel, or

strong cleaning agents that co-tain those solvents. Doing so could damage the surface and cause the color to deteriorate.

- Do not use chemical solvents that contain silicone on the vehicle audio system, electrical components of the air-conditioner or any switches. If silicone adheres to these parts, it may cause damage to electrical components.

contains thinner, fuel, or any other volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid could erase the lettering on the switches at the bottom of the monitor.

■ Center information display

To clean the center information display, wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with neutral detergent then carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

• Do not spray neutral detergent directly onto the monitor. Doing so could damage the monitor's components.
• Do not wipe the monitor with a hard cloth. Doing so could scratch the monitor.
• Do not use cleaning fluid that

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Maintenance and service

11-1. Maintenance schedule.... 481
11-2. Maintenance precautions 481

Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment 482

When checking or servicing in the engine compartment 483

When checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running..... 483

11-3. Engine hood 48\$

11-4. Engine compartment overview 485

11-5. Engine oil.... 486 Engine oil consumption .... 486

Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and oil filter 486

Checking the oil level 486

Changing the oil and oil filter.... 488

Recommended grade and viscosity.... 488

Synthetic oil 488

11-6. Cooling system 489

Safety precautions.... 489

Cooling fan, hose and connections 489

Engine coolant 489

11-7. Air cleaner element.... 491

Replacing the air cleaner element 491

11-8. Spark plugs 492

Recommended spark plugs.... 492

11-9. Drive belt 492
11-10. Continuously variable transmission fluid 493

11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil....493

Recommended grade and viscosity 493

11-12. Brake fluid....493

Checking the fluid level.... 493

Recommended brake fluid.... 494

11-13. Brake pedal 494

11-14. Replacement of brake pad .....495

Breaking-in of new brake pads 495

11-15. Tires and wheels....495

Types of tires 495

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped) 496

Tire inspection 497

Tire pressures and wear.... 498

Wheel balance.... 499

Wear indicators 500

Rotational direction of tires 50

Tire rotation 501

Tire replacement 502

Wheel replacement.... 502

11-16. Alloy wheels....503

11-17. Windshield washer fluid....50

Adding the windshield washer fluid 504

Windshield washer fluid 504

11-18. Replacement of wiper blades ....504

Windshield wiper blade assembly.... 505

Window wiper blade rubber.... 506

Rear window wiper blade assembly 507

Rear window wiper blade rubber 507

Maintenance and service

11-19. Battery 509

11-20. Fuses 510

11-21. Installation of accessories 511

11-22. Replacing bulbs 511

Headlights 512

Front turn signal light 512

Rear combination lights.... 513

License plate light 515

Map light 515

Vanity mirror light 515

Door step light 515

Reading light 515

Cargo area light 516

Other bulbs.... 516

11-23. Replacing key battery ....516

Safety precautions 516

Replacing battery of access key fob 517

Replacing transmitter battery 518

11-1. Maintenance schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular intervals are shown in the "Warranty and Service Booklet". For details, read the separate "Warranty and Service Booklet".

Except for U.S. and Canada models Some items of your vehicle are required be serviced at scheduled intervals. For details about your maintenance schedule read the separate "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-2. Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all work done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service yourself, you should familiarize yourself with the information provided in this section on general maintenance and service for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage

WARNING

• Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on your vehicle.
  ● Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the vehicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery acid.

be

• Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully competent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not experienced in servicing vehicles.
  ● Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are well maintained.
• Never get under the vehicle supported only by a jack. Always use safety stands to support the vehicle.
• Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area, such as a garage or other closed areas.
• Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery. This will cause a fire.
• Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
• Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes, thoroughly wash them out with clean water.
• Do not tamper with the wiring of the SRS airbag system or seat-belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors apart, as that may activate the system or it can render it inoperative. NEVER use a circuit tester for these wiring. If your SRS airbag or seatbelt pretensioner needs service, consult your nearest SUBARU dealer.

- Check the inside of the engine compartment to see if there are any cloths and tools left. If they are left inside, they may be a cause of malfunction and fire.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of non-SUBARU approved flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU approved flushing systems use chemicals and/or solvents which have not been tested or approved by SUBARU. SUBARU warranties do not cover any part of the vehicle which is damaged adding or applying chemicals and/or solvents other than those approved or recommended by SUBARU.

■ Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment

WARNING

● Always stop the engine and apply the parking brake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving.
- Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time after the engine has stopped.
- Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
- When the ignition switch is in the "ON" position, the cooling fan may operate suddenly even when the engine is stopped. If your body or clothes come into contact with a rotating fan, that could result in serious injury. To avoid by risk of injury, perform the following precautions.

- Models with push-button start system:

Always turn the push-button ignition switch to the "OFF" position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the switch is turned off. Then take the access key fob out from the vehicle.

- Models without push-button start system: Always remove the key from the ignition switch.

- Before performing any servicing on a vehicle equipped with a remote engine start system (a dealer option), temporarily place the remote engine start system in service mode to prevent it from unexpectedly starting the engine.

■ When checking or servicing in the engine compartment

Technical line drawing of a car engine bay with no visible text or symbols

CAUTION

- Do not contact the drive belt cover while checking the components in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause your hand slip off the cover and result in unexpected injury.

- Do not touch the oil filter until engine has cooled down completely. Doing so may result in a or other injury. Note that the filter becomes very hot when engine is running and remains hot for some time after the e has stopped.

■ When checking or servicing in the engine compartment while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, drive belt and any other moving engine parts. Removing rings, to-watches and ties is advisable.

h41-3. Engine hood

burn

CAUTION

• Be extremely careful not to catch fingers or other objects when closing the engine hood.
• Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
• Be extremely careful opening the engine hood when the wind is strong. The engine hood could close suddenly, possibly causing injuries from slamming.
• Do not install accessories other than genuine SUBARU parts to the engine hood. If the engine hood becomes too heavy, the stay may not be able to support holding it open.
• Check that the end of the hood is inserted into the slot. If it not inserted properly, the hood may drop and cause injury.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the windshield, return them to their original position.

B02294

1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.

Line drawing of a car front view with a close-up inset showing the engine compartment (no text or symbols)

1. Release the secondary hood release by moving the lever between the fro grille and the hood toward the left.

B02249

1 Grip

1. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood. Hold the grip to handle the hood prop.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approximately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above its closed position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious bodily injury.

11-4. Engine compartment overview

1 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 B02258

1 Brake fluid reservoir (page 493)
2 Fuse box (page 510)
3 Windshield washer tank (page 503)
4 Battery (page 509)
5 Engine oil filler cap (page 486)
6 Radiator cap (page 489)
7 Engine coolant reservoir (page 489)
8 Engine oil filter (page 488)
9 Engine oil level gauge (page 486)
10 Air cleaner case (page 491)

11-5. Engine oil

CAUTION

• If the level gauge cannot be pulled out easily, twist the level gauge right and left, then gently pull it out. Otherwise, you may injured accidentally straining yourself.
• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine when adding it. If oil touches exhaust pipe, it may cause a smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

■ Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while driving. The rate of consumption can be affected by such factors as transmission type, driving style, terrain and temperature. Under the following conditions, oil consumption can be increased and may require refilling between maintenance intervals.

• When the engine is new and within the break-in period
• When the engine oil is of lower quality
• When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
• When engine braking is employed (repeatedly)
• When the engine is operated at high be engine speeds (for extended periods time)
• When the engine is operated under heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
• When towing a trailer
• When the engine idles for extended periods of time
  bad When the vehicle is operated in stop-and-go and/or heavy traffic situations
• When the vehicle is used under severe thermal conditions
• When the vehicle accelerates and decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you should check your oil at least every 2nd fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more frequently. Different drivers in the same car may experience different results. If your oil consumption rate is greater than expected, contact your authorized SUBARU dealer who may perform a test under controlled conditions.

■ Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and oil filter

1 2 3 B02259

1 Oil level gauge
2 Oil filler cap
3 Oil filter

■ Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position. If you check the oil level just after turning the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/"OFF" position, wait for at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulled out easily, twist the level gauge rig and left, then gently pull it out. Otherwise, you may be injured accidentally straining yourself.

1. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean and insert it again.

Interior view of a car showing engine bay and dashboard with a magnified inset of a tool (no text or symbols visible)

1. Be sure the level gauge is correctly inserted until it stops.

B01975

t

1 Full level
2 Low level
3 Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the level gauge. The engine oil level must be judged by the lowest of the two levels. If the oil level is below the low level mark, add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

- Be careful not to touch the eng oil filter when removing the oil filler cap. Doing so may result burn, a pinched finger, or may cause some other injury.

• Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
• Be careful not to spill engine oil when adding it. If oil touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine oil gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil filler cap and slowly pour engine oil through the filler neck. After pouring oil into the engine, you must use the level gauge to confirm that the oil level is correct.

NOTE

To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above the upper level when the engine is cold. The engine low oil level warning light may stay illuminated when the engine is started straight after topping up or changing the engine oil. In such cases, park the vehicle on a level surface and wait for more than a minute until the oil level settles, after which the warning light will turn off. Refer to "Engine low oil level warning light" P177.

- CONTINUED -

■ Changing the oil and oil filt ■ Recommended grade and viscosity Change the oil and oil filter according to viscosity

Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short trips are frequently made, or when driving in extremely cold weather.

NOTE

- Changing the engine oil and oil fil should be performed by a well-trained expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer for changing the engine oil and oil filter. Fully train mechanics are on standby at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the spec tools, spare parts and recommended oil for this work, and also used oils are properly disposed of

- If performing oil replacement yourself, observe the local regulations and dispose of waste oil properly

CAUTION Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.

Refer to "Engine oil" P523.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity or provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.

Synthetic oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that meets the same requirements given for conventional engine oil. When using synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same classification, viscosity and grade shown in this Owner's Manual. Refer to "Engine oil" P523. Also, you must follow the oil and filter changing intervals shown in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine performance. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-6. Cooling system

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

CAUTION

• Vehicles are filled at the factory with SUBARU SUPER COOLANT that does not require the first change for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 years/220,000 km). This coolant should not be mixed with any other brand or type of coolant during this period. Mixing with a different coolant will reduce the life of the coolant. When necessary add up the coolant for any reason, use only SUBARU SUPER COOLANT.
  If SUBARU SUPER COOLANT is diluted with another brand or

type, the maintenance interval shortened to that of the mixing coolant.

• Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

■ Cooling fan, hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific temperature.

H 1

306056

1 Normal operating range

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine coolant tempera-

ture gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the cooling fan circuit may be defective. Refer to "Engine coolant temperature gauge" P170.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary. Refer to "Fuses" P510.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant is necessary between vehicle service visit it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, damage, or looseness.

■ Engine coolant

▼ Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap until the engine has been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.

1 2 B02261

1 "FULL" level mark
2 "LOW" level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the "LOW" level mark, add coolant up to the "FULL" level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the radiator cap and refill coolant up to just below the filler neck as shown in the following illustration.

1 B02262

1 Fill up to this level.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with concentric layers and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

1. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the cap and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the proper position.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to spill engine coolant when adding it. If coolant touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If engine coolant gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
• Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alcohol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint surface.

▼ Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant. Have the coolant changed by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

11-7. Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed. The cleaner element not only filters in-take air but also stops flames if engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner element, use a genuine SUBARU air cleaner element. If it is not used, will cause a negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a screen. When the element is perforated removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the cleaner element.

■ Replacing the air cleaner element Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Under extremely dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

Technical diagram of an automotive engine compartment with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

1 Clips

filter of. Unsnap the two clips holding the air cleaner case (rear).

1. Open the air cleaner case and pull cover rearward while lifting it up.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing hands installing a component with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the air cleaner element.

2. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case (both front and rear) with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. To install the air cleaner case (rear), insert the three projections on the air

- CONTINUED -

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on air cleaner case (front).

1. Install in the reverse order of removal

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that the surface with "UPR" printed on it faces upward.

1-8. Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you have spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced the correct order.

■ Recommended spark plugs

For the recommended spark plugs, refer "Electrical system" P526.

11-9. Drive belt

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of the drive belt periodically because your engine is equipped with an automatic belt tension adjuster. However, replacement of the belt should be done according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, contact your SUBARU dealer.

in

to

11-10. Continuously variable transmission fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the fluid inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for details

11-11. Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet". Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

■ Recommended grade and viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different brands together. For details, refer to "Front differential and rear differential gear oil" P525.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other than the specified oil may cause decline in vehicle performance.

11-12. Brake fluid

■ Checking the fluid level

WARNING

• Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
• Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed moisture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
• If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your SUBAR dealer.

CAUTION

• When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into the reservoir.
• Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber parts.

- CONTINUED -

Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them. - Be careful not to spill brake fluid when adding it. If brake fluid touches the exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If brake fluid gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

Visually check the brake fluid level of the reservoir monthly on the even surface.

Technical diagram of an engine component with labeled parts and a zoomed-in inset showing internal components.

1 "MAX" level line
2 "MIN" level line

Be sure to check the brake fluid level from the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level is below "MIN", top up brake fluid to "MAX". Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.

■ Recommended brake fluid Refer to "Fluids" P525.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of bra fluid together. Also, avoid mixing DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids they are the same brand.

11-13. Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the maintenance schedule in the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

even if

11-14. Replacement of brake pad

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

The disc brakes have audible wear indicators on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indicator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal, have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audible brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly brake rotor repair or replacement.

■ Breaking-in of new brake pads

When replacing the brake pad, use only genuine SUBARU parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in. Contact your SUBARU dealer for details

11-15. Tires and wheels

■ Types of tires

You should be familiar with the type of tires present on your vehicle.

▼ All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking performance in year-round driving including snowy and icy road conditions. However, all season tires do not offer as much traction performance in winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by "ALL SEASON" and/or "M+S" (Mud & Snow) on the tire sidewall.

▼ Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited for highway driving under dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered or icy roads, we strongly recommend the use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

▼ Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving d snow-covered and icy roads. However, winter tires do not perform as well as summer tires and all season tires on ro other than snow-covered and icy roads.

■ Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning message sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel when tire pressure is severely low. The tire pressure monitoring system will activate only when the vehicle is driven. Also, this system may react immediately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a blow-out caused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a war garage and will then drive the vehicle in cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire pressures may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. To avoid this problem when adjusting the tire pressure in a warm garage, inflate the tires to pressures higher than those shown on the tire inflation pressure label. Specifically, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm²) for every difference of 10°F (5.6°C) between the temperature in the garage and the temperature outside. By way of example, the following table shows the required tire pressures that correspond to various outside temperatures when the temperature in the garage is 60°F (15.6°C).

Example:

Tire size: 245/50R20 102H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

Bear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kg/cm

Garage temperature: 60°F (15.6°C)

e r- Outside temperature	Adjusted pressure [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
	Front Rear
not re 30°F (-1°C)	36 (250, 2.5)
10°F (-12°C)	38 (265, 2.65)
-10°F (-23°C)	41 (280, 2.8)

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates when you drive the vehicle in cold outside air after adjusting the tire pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tire pressures using the method describe above. Then, increase the vehicle speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check see that the low tire pressure warning light turns off a few minutes later. If the low pressure warning light does not turn off, the tire pressure monitoring system may not be functioning normally. In this even go to a SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction between tires and the road surface causes the tires to warm up. After illumination of the low tire pressure warning light, any increase in the tire pressures caused by an increase in the outside air temperature or by an increase in the temperature in the tires can cause the low tire pressure warning light to turn off.

It may not be possible to install TPMS valves on certain wheels that are on the market. Therefore, if you change the wheels (for example, a switch to snow tires), use wheels that have the same part number as the standard-equipment wheels. Without four operational TPMS valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS will not fully function and the warning light on the combination meter will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light does not illuminate briefly after the ignition switch is turned on or the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, you should have your tire pressure mon-

itoring system checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving never brake suddenly and keep driving straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road to a safe place. Otherwise, an accident involving serious vehicle damage and serious personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may have significant damage and a fast leak that causes the tire to lose air rapidly. If you a flat tire, replace it with a spare as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel rim is replaced without the original pressure sensor/transmitter being transferred, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute. This indicates the TPMS is unable to monitor all four road wheels. Contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible for tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the light illuminates steadily after blinking for approximately 1 minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the system inspected.

g▼ TPMS valve self-registration

When the wheels are replaced (such as when installing snow tires) or when a new TPMS valve is mounted on a new installed wheel, you will need to perform TPMS valve self-registration. Refer to the following procedure to perform TPMS valve self-registration.

1. Install the wheels with TPMS valves on the vehicle.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified value. For information about the specified value of the tire pressure, refer to tire "Tires" P526.
3. Drive at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) for at least 4 miles (6 km) or un the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

NOTE

• When installing TPMS valves, use only genuine SUBARU parts.
• Registration of TPMS valves can also be done at a SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer.

■ Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear. Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately if you find any problems.

NOTE

- When the wheels and tires on strike curbs or are subjected to harsh treatment as when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface, they can suffer damage that cannot be seen with the naked eye. This type of damage does not become evident until time has passed. Try not to drive over curbs, potholes or on other rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoidable, keep the vehicle's speed down to a walking pace or less and approach the curbs as squarely as possible. Also, make sure the tires are not pressed against the curb when

you park the vehicle. - If you feel unusual vibration while driving or find it difficult to steer the vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive slowly to the nearest authorized SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

■ Tire pressures and wear Maintaining the correct tire pressures helps to maximize the tires' service lives and is essential for good running performance. Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire and the spare (equipped) at least once a month and before any long journey.

Technical line drawing of a car interior with visible wiring and a bracket (no text or symbols)

Tire inflation pressure label

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the tire pressures to the values shown on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire finflation pressure label is located on the door pillar on the driver's side.

Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mistakenly release air from a warm tire to reduce its pressure.

NOTE

• The air pressure in a tire increases by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm) when the tire becomes warm.
• The tires are considered cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so will result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from controllability and ride comfort, and they cause the tires to wear abnormally.

1

2

3

B01703

1 Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so fuel consumption is also lower.

2 Under inflated tire (tread worn on shoulders) Rolling resistance is high, so fuel consumption is also higher.
3 Over inflated (tread worn in the center) Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire magnifies the effects of road-surface bumps and dips, possibly resulting in vehicle damage.

If the tire inflation pressure label shows tire pressures for the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the tire pressures to the values that match the loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to deform severely and to rapidly heat up. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation and destruction of the tires. The resulting loss

vehicle control could lead to an accident.

■ Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when your vehicle was new, but the wheels will become unbalanced as the tires become worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at certain vehicle speeds and detracts from the vehicle's straight-line stability. It can also cause steering and suspension system problems and abnormal tire wear. If you suspect that the wheels are not correctly balanced, have them checked and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment causes the tires to wear on one side and reduces the vehicle's running stability.

- CONTINUED -

Contact your SUBARU dealer if you notice abnormal tire wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to hold each wheel at certain alignment (relative to the other wheels and to the road) optimum straight-line stability and cornering performance.

■ Wear indicators

1 a e for 3 2 B00327

1 New tread
2 Worn tread
3 Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear indicator, which becomes visible when the depth of the tread groo decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). Tire must be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at high speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators is become visible.

■ Rotational direction of tires

1 ROTATION B00550

Example of rotational direction marked on the sidewall

1 Front

If the tires have specific rotational direction, refer to the arrow marked on the side wall.

The arrow should be pointing forward direction when the wheels are fitted.

■ Tire rotation

graph TD
    A["Input Block 1"] --> B{X}
    C["Input Block 2"] --> B
    B --> D["Output Block"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires

1 Front

graph TD
    A["Process 1"] --> B["Process 2"]
    B --> C["Output"]
    C --> D["Feedback Loop"]
    D --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#bfb,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffb,stroke:#333

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1 Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to "wheel. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the "Warranty and Maintenance Booklet".

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn tires at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressures and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km), check the whee nuts again and retighten any nut that has become loose.

For handling alloy wheels, refer to "Alloy wheels" P503.

■ Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and integral parts of your vehicle's design; they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires fitted as standard equipment are optimally matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and were selected to give the best possible combination of running performance, ride comfort, and service life. It is essential for every tire to have a size and construction matching those shown on the tire inflation pressure label and to have a speed symbol and load index matching those shown on the tire inflation pressure label.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts from controllability, ride comfort, braking performance, speedometer accuracy and odometer accuracy. It also creates incorrect body-to-tire clearances and inappropriately changes the vehicle's ground clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), construction, and size. You are advised to replace the tires with new ones that are identical to those fitted as standard equipment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU recommends replacing all four tires at the same time.

WARNING

- When replacing or installing tire(s), all four tires must be the same for following items.

(a) Size
(b) Speed symbol
(c) Load index
(d) Circumference
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degree of wear

For items (a) to (c), you must obey the specification that is printed on the tire inflation pressure label. The tire inflation pressure label is located on the driver's door pillar.

If all the four tires are not the same for items (a) to (h), serious mechanical damage could be caused to the drivetrain of the car, and affect the followings.

• Ride
• Handling
• Braking
• Speedometer/Odometer calibration
  – Clearance between the body and tires
  It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control, and it can lead to an accident.

- Use only radial tires. Do not use radial tires together with belted bias tires and/or bias-ply tires. Doing so can dangerously reduce controllability, resulting in an accident.

■ Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example, to damage, make sure the replacement wheels match the specifications of the wheels that are fitted as standard equipment. Replacement wheels are available at your SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are specified for your vehicle. Wheels not meeting specifications could interfere with brake caliper operation and may cause the tires to against the wheel well housing during turns. The resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or for other reason, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). Any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

11-16. Alloy wheels

Alloy wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.

- When any of the wheels are removed and replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after drive approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). any nut is loose, tighten it to the specified torque.

Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the wheel.

• Never let the wheel rub against sharp if protrusions or curbs.
• When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap are replaced, be sure replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alloy wheels.
• When stacking and storing removed tires, place shock-absorbing material between the tires to protect the wheels from becoming scratched.

11-17. Windshield washer fluid

B01704

When there is only a small amount of washer fluid remaining, the windshield washer fluid warning light will illuminate. When this occurs, refill the washer fluid to

■ Adding the windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as wash fluid because it could cause paint damage.

Technical diagram showing engine components with a valve mechanism (no text or labels)

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then add windshield washer fluid.

■ Windshield washer fluid

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable, use clean water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, an anti-freeze type windshield washer fluid.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid a different concentration from the one used previously, purge the old fluid from the piping between the reservoir tank and washer nozzles by operating the washer for a certain period of time. Otherwise, it is the concentration of the fluid remaining in the piping is too low for the outside temperature, it may freeze and block the nozzles.

CAUTION

• Adjust the washer fluid concentration appropriately for the outside temperature. If the concentration is inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid may freeze on the windshield and obstruct your view, and the fluid may freeze the reservoir tank.
• State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging your vehicle's paint, wiper blade or washer system.

with-18. Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you cannot remove the streaks after operating the windshield washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield and rear window using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. Do not, however, use detergent to clean the blade rubbers. Use only a sponge or soft cloth (and no neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaner) when you clean the blade rubbers. If you wipe the rubber of the blade strongly, the black coating component will peel off, which will cause the wiper to judder. Also, after wiping it off, check that the rubber has not come loose. After cleaning the window glass and wiper blade rubbers, be sure to rinse them with clean water. Rinse the window until the water does not form beads on the glass. This indicates that the glass is clean.

CAUTION

- Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the wiper blades.

• While removing the wiper blades from the wiper arms, do not return the wiper arms to the original positions. Otherwise, the windshield surface may be scratched.
• When returning the raised wiper arms to the original positions, carefully return the wiper arms on the windshield by hand. You should not return the wiper arms to the windshield only by the return spring. Otherwise, the wiper arms may be deformed and/or the windshield surface may be scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking ever after following this method, replace the wiper blades using the following procedures.

■ Windshield wiper blade assembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

Line drawing of a car with a hand adjusting the hood, no text or symbols present

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing the wiper blade. Holding the wiper blade, may result in blade deformation.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows and labeled point (B01661), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

1 Lock knob
2. Hold the wiper blade connection by hand, push the lock knob to release the lock, and then pull out the wiper blade assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the lock knob. The lock knob may be scratched.

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with a downward arrow indicating a force or movement (no text or symbols present)

1. When installing the wiper blade assembly, align it with the wiper arm connection part and then slide it in the opposite direction of removal to install. After installing the wiper blade assembly, check that the connection part is locked completely.
2. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

■ Window wiper blade rubber

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit on the underside of the wiper blade is in the removal position, as shown in the

illustration, so that it can be removed.

1. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber through the slit to remove it.
2. To install a new wiper blade rubber, perform the removal procedure in the reverse order. After installation, check that the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper blade rubber replacement. We recommend that you contact your SUBARU dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement if necessary.

■ Rear window wiper blade sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear window.

B00061

1. Turn the wiper blade assembly counterclockwise.

as- B01889

1. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward you to remove it from the wiper arm
2. Install the wiper blade assembly to the _1 wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
3. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

■ Rear window wiper blade rubber

Diagram showing a curved object with an arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present

Pull out the end of the blade rubber assembly to unlock it from the plastic support.

Diagram of a cable or wire structure with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of the plastic support.
   

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with labeled dimension (1) and reference number B00505 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1 Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove the metal spines from the old blade rubber

and install them in the new blade rubber.

Diagram showing a curved pipe or cable with a black arrow indicating direction, labeled B00066 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

1. Align the claws of the plastic support with the grooves in the blade rubber assembly, then slide the blade rubber assembly into place.

Line drawing of a mechanical component or tool with no visible text or symbols

Securely retain both ends of the rubber with the stoppers on the plastic support ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, the wiper may scratch the rear window glass.

1. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
2. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly lower it in position.

11-19. Battery

WARNING

• Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extinguish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a battery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas which is highly flammable and explosive.
• For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protection or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never lean over a battery.
• Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint because battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thoroughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a large amount of milk or water, and seek medical attention immediately.

• To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands, and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
• Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
• Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery because it will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodically refill with distilled water.

11-20. Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with material other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could result.

NOTE

Fuse rating and using circuit are described on each behind the fuse box cover.

The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

B02265

One is located under the instrument panel behind the fuse box cover on the driver's seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating rotation or movement

1 Spare fuses 2 Fuse puller

The other one (main fuse box) is housed the engine compartment. Also, the spare fuses and fuse puller are stored in the box cover.

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller when removing it from the main fuse bo

1 2 B01008

1 Good 2 Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, inspect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

1. Turn the ignition switch to the "LOCK"/fuse "OFF" position and turn off all electrical accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown. Look at the back side of each fuse box cover.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating movement, alongside a separate view of a connector housing (no text or symbols present)

1. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
2. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the same rating.
3. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

11-21. Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if they are not suited to the vehicle.

11-22. Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire. For the specified wattage of each bulb, refer to "Bulb chart" P528.

■ Headlights

B01697

The LED headlight warning light illuminates if the LED headlights malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBA dealer as soon as possible.

■ Front turn signal light

Technical line drawing of an engine compartment with two black arrows pointing to structural components (no text or symbols present)

Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips RU the air intake duct, then remove it.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the secured clip of the washer tank. To make it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

1. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Replace the bulb with a new one. At this time, use care not to touch the surface.
3. To install the bulb to the headlight assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
4. Install the air intake duct with clips (right-hand side).
5. Set the washer tank to the original place and secure it with a clip (left-hand side).

■ Rear combination lights

Diagram of a car door and side panel showing a curved door and seat, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Remove the covers.
   

bulb B01820

1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the upper and lower screws that secure the rear combination light as-

sembly.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vehicle's seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the rear combination light assembly rearward and remove it from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

B01822

1 Backup light
2 Rear side marker light
3 Rear turn signal light

1. Remove the bulb socket from the rea combination light assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket replace it with a new one.
3. Set the bulb socket into the rear combination light assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks.
4. Reconnect the electrical connector.

1 2 3 B01831

1 Guide pins
2 Catches
3 Clips

1. Put the rear combination light assembly into place while aligning the guide pins and catches with the guide holes and clips on the vehicle.

B01820

1. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
2. Reinstall the covers.

■ License plate light

Diagram showing two identical car interior compartments with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present.

1. The license plate lights must be pushed inside, and then pulled out be removed.

Diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

1. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Install a new bulb.
3. Reinstall the bulb socket and the license plate light cover.

■ Map light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by yo SUBARU dealer.

■ Vanity mirror light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause burns since the bulb may be very hot. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Door step light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Reading light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause a short circuit. Have the bulb replaced by your SUBARU dealer.

■ Cargo area light

Diagram of a device with a grid pattern and a small rectangular component, being pointed by a tool (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.

■ Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the b Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU dealer if necessary.

11-23. Replacing key battery

The access key fob/transmitter battery may be discharged under the following conditions.

• The operation of the keyless access function is unstable.
• The operating distance of the remote keyless entry system is unstable.
• The transmitter does not operate properly when used within the standard distance.

Replace the battery with a new one. of

■ Safety precautions

CAUTION

• Do not let dust, oil or water get or in the access key fob/transmit ter when replacing the battery.
  Before replacing the battery, remove any static electricity.
• Be careful not to touch or dam the printed circuit board in the access key fob/transmitter when replacing the battery.
• Be careful not to allow children touch the battery and any removed parts; children could

swallow them.

• There is a danger of an explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type of the battery.
• Batteries should not be exposed to excessive heat such as bright sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

• Replace only with the same or equivalent type of battery recommended by the manufacturer.
• Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
• Mount the battery in the correct orientation to prevent fluid leakage. On Be careful not to bend the terminals. It may result in a malfunction.
• It is recommended that the battery be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
• Use a new battery.
• After replacing the battery, confirm that the transmitter functions properly.

■ Replacing battery of access key fob

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the access key fob cover, make sure the plastic part does not come o become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 or equivalent

1 2 202500

1 Release button
2 Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

that f or

Line drawing of a car door handle with a diagonal tab (no text or symbols)

B01977

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vir tape or a cloth, and insert it in the to remove the cover.

B01568

1. Take out the battery using a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

Line drawing of a handheld electronic device with a hand holding the screen (no text or symbols visible)

yl4. Insert a new battery with its positive gain (+) gap side facing upward as shown in the figure.

Technical line drawing of a device casing with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. Attach the cover to the access key fob by fitting the projections and recesses together.

■ Replacing transmitter battery Battery: Button battery CR1620 or equivalent

Diagram of a car intake manifold with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a flat-head screwdriver.

Line drawing of a hand holding a key inserted into a car key (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the transmitter case from the key head.
   

Mechanical component diagram showing directional arrows and circular features (no text or symbols)

1. Open the transmitter case by releasing the hooks.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 201640), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

1 Negative (−) side facing up

1. Replace the old battery with a new battery making sure to install the new battery with the negative (-) side facing up.
2. Put together the transmitter case by fitting the hooks on the case.
3. Reinstall the transmitter case in the key head.
4. Refit the removed half of the key head.

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Specifications

12-1. Specifications 522

Dimensions 522

Engine.... 522

Fuel 523

Engine oil 523

Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....

Fluids 525

Engine coolant 526

Electrical system 526

Tires 526

Temporary spare tires 527

Brake pedal 527

Brake disc 527

Brake pad 527

52512-2. Bulb chart 528

Safety precautions 528

Bulb chart.... 529

12-3. Vehicle identification....531

12-1. Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

■ Dimensions
in (mm)

Item
Overall length 196.8 (4,998)
Overall width 76.0 (1,930)
Overall height 71.6 (1,819)
Wheel base 113.8 (2,890)
Tread	Front 64.4 (1,635)
	Rear 64.2 (1,630)
Ground clearance*		8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

Engine

Engine model FA24 (2.4 L, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled	4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 146 (2,387)
Bore × Stroke in (mm)	3.70 × 3.39 (94.0 × 86.0)
Compression ratio	10.6 : 1
Firing order	1 - 3 - 2 - 4

Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher	19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

For more details, refer tōuèl" P337.

■ Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to "Engine oil" P486.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

▼ Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer. If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

▼ Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.

Oil grade			SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature	Engine oil capacity
	or		0W-20 synthetic oil is the required for optimum engine performance and protection. Conventional oil may be used if synthetic oil is unavailable.*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available, 5W-30 conventional oil may be used if replenishment is needed but should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the next oil change.	- Adding the oil from low level to oil full level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liters, 0.9 Imp qt)- Changing the oil and oil filter:4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)
API (American Petroleum Institute) classification SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”		ILSAC (International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee) GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)	ZOM0294

Front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear	differential gear oil
Oil grade	SUBARU Extra MT*3API classification GL-5 (75W-90)
Oil capacity*1	1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*2	“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” P493

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.

Fluids

Fluid Fluid type*	1	Fluid capacity*2	Remarks*3
Continuously variable transmission fluid	Consult your SUBARU dealer	Models with air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters, 10.6 Imp qt)*Models without air-cooled continuously variable transmission fluid cooler: 12.3 US qt (11.6 liters, 10.2 Imp qt)*	“Continuously variable transmission fluid” P493
Brake fluid	FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid	—	“Brake fluid” P493

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*4: Continuously variable transmission type TR690SXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P531.)
*5: Continuously variable transmission type TR690GXXXX (To check the model number label for the continuously variable transmission type, refer to "Vehicle identification" P531.)

■ Engine coolant

Coolant capacity Coolant type
11.7 US qt (11.1 liters, 9.8 Imp qt)	SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refacing system" P489.

■ Electrical system

Battery type LN2
Alternator 12 V - 190 A
Spark plugs	SILKFR8A6 (NGK)

Tires

Tire size 245/60R18 105H 245/50R20 102H
Wheel size 18 × 7 1/2J 20 × 7 1/2J
Pressure	Front 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm)	2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm)	2)
	Rear	35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/m33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm)	2)
Wheel nut tightening torque		89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to Changing a flat tire" P452.

■ Temporary spare tires

Temporary spare tire size T165/90 D18
Temporary spare tire inflation pressure(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf m

■ Brake pedal
in (mm)

Pedal clearance 2.68 (68)*	1
Pedal free play	0.016 - 0.07 (0.4 - 1.8)

*1: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your SUBARU dealer.

■ Brake pad
in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit	Front 0.063 (1.6)
	Rear	0.059 (1.5)

12-2. Bulb chart

■ Safety precautions

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, turn off the lights and wait until the bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new bulb of the specified wattage. Using a bulb of different wattage could result in a fire.

Bulb chart

1 A 2 3 4 2 4 B G F E 7

C 5 D 6 10 9 8 7

C00535
Specifications

NOTE

Lights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Wattage Bulb No.

1 Front turn signal light 12 V-28 W 7444NA
2 Vanity mirror light 14 V-1.4 W —
3 Map lights 12 V-8 W —
4 Reading light (if equipped) 12 V-8 W —
5 Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W
6 Rear side marker light 12 V-5 W W5W
7 Door step light (if equipped)		12 V-5 W W5W
8 Backup light		12 V-16 W W16W
9 License plate light		12 V-5 W W5W
10 Cargo area light		12 V-5 W W5W
A Low/High beam headlightDaytime running light		— —
B Side turn signal light (if equipped)		— —
C High-mounted stop light		— —
D Stop light/Tail light		— —
E Front side marker light		— —
F Front position light		— —
G Front fog light (if equipped)		— —

12-3. Vehicle identification

7 1 4 3 2 6 5 C00536

1 Emission control label
2 Tire inflation pressure label (Vehicle placard)
3 Certification label
4 Vehicle identification number plate
5 Model number label
6 Fuel label
7 Air conditioner label

Pure horizontal dashed lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

Consumer information and reporting safety defec

13-1. For U.S.A. 534
13-2. Tire information 534

Tire labeling 534

Recommended tire inflation pressure.... 536

Glossary of tire terminology 538

Tire care - maintenance and safety practices..... 542

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities 542

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires....542

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 543

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .....54 Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations..... 544
13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .....546 TREADWEAR ..... 547 TRACTION AA, A, B, C ..... 547 TEMPERATURE A, B, C ..... 547
13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)....548
13-6. How to contact Transport Canada in order to report a safety concern relating to the vehicle (Canada)....548

13-1. For U.S.A.

The following information has been compiled according to Code of Federal Regulations "Title 49, Part 575".

13-2. Tire information

■ Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire Identification Number or TIN) are placed on the sidewall of a tire by tire manufacturers. These markings can provide you with useful information on the tire.

▼ Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with P-Metric tire size. It is important to understand the sizing system in selecting the proper tire for your vehicles. Here is a brief review of the tire sizing system with a breakdown of its individual elements.

▽ P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section Width is measured in millimeters. To convert millimeters into inches, divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio (Section Height divided by Section Width) helps provide more dimensional information about the tire size.

Example:

P(1)

205/ (2)

55/ (3)

R(4)

16/ (5)

(1) P = Certain tire type used on light duty vehicles such as passenger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height ÷ section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches

▽ Load and Speed Rating Descriptions

The load and speed rating descriptions will appear following the size designation.

They provide two important facts about the tire. First, the number designation is its load index. Second, the letter designation indicates the tire's speed rating.

Example:

P	205 / 55	R	16	89	V
	Size designation			(6)	(7)

(6) Load Index: A numerical code which specifies the maximum load a tire can carry at the speed indicated by its speed symbol, at maximum inflation pressure.

For example, "90" means 1,323 lbs (600 kg), "89" means 1,278 lbs (580 kg).

Load indices apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical system describing a tire's capability to travel at established and predetermined speeds.

For example, "V" means 149 mph (240 km/h)

- Speed ratings apply only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a speed rated tire any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be operated at the tire's rated speed.

- The speed rating is void if the tires are worn out, damaged, repaired, retreaded, or otherwise altered from their original condition. If tires are repaired, re-treaded, or otherwise altered, they may not be suitable for original equipment tire designed loads and speeds.

▼ Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is marked on the intended outboard sidewall. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its individual elements.

Type A

DOT(1)

XX(2)

XX(3)

XXX(4)

XXXX(5)

o(n) DOT symbol*

(2) Manufacturer's Identification Mark

(3) Tire Size Code

(4) Tire Type Code

(5) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represent the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Type B

DOT(1)

XXX(2)

XXXXXXXX(3)

XXXX(4)

(1) DOT symbol*
(2) Plant Code
(3) Manufacturer's Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represe the first full week of the calendar year; the second two figures represent the year. For example, 0101 means the 1st week of 2001.

*: The DOT symbol certifies that tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

▼ Other markings

The following makings are also placed on the sidewall.

▽ Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which this tire may be inflated. For example, "300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS"

▽ Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum permissible weight load for this tir For example, "MAX. LOAD 580 kg (1,279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS."

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies only to the tire, not to the vehicle. Putting a load rated tire on any vehicle does not mean the vehicle can be loaded up to the tire's rated load.

▽ Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire For example, "TUBELESS STEEL BELTED RADIAL"

∇ Construction

The generic name of each cord material used in the plies (both sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For example, "PLIES: TREAD 2 STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-WALL 2 POLYESTER"

▽ Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

For details, refer to "Uniform tire quality grading standards" P546.

■ Recommended tire inflation pressure

▼ Recommended cold tire inflation pressure

For recommended cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires, refer to Tires" P526.

▼ Vehicle placard

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

The vehicle placard is attached to the driver's side door pillar.

Example:

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL X FRONT X REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT AVANT ARRÈRE X The combined weight of coupants and cargo should never exceed XXXXg or XXXlbs. Le poids total des coupants et du chargement ne doit jamais depasser XXXXg ou XXXXb. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FRONT AVANT PX0000RXX XX00PA, XXPSI VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS REAR ARRIERE PX0000RXX XX00PA, XXPSI SPARE DE SECOURS TXXX00CXX XX00PA, XXPSI D00155

The vehicle placard shows original tire size, recommended cold tire inflation pressure on each tire at maximum loaded vehicle weight, seating capacity and loading information.

▼ Adverse safety consequences of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with excessively low tire pressures can cause the tires to flex severely and to rapidly become hot. A sharp increase in temperature could cause tread separation, and failure of the tire(s). Possible resulting loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

▼ Measuring and adjusting air pressure to achieve proper inflation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pressure of each tire (including the spare) at least once a month and before any long journey. Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the specific values. Driving even a short distance warms up the tires and increases the tire pressures. Also, the tire pressures are affected by the outside temperature. It is best to check tire pressure outdoors before driving the vehicle. When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it expands, causing the tire pressure to increase. Be careful not to mis takenly release air from a warm or to reduce its pressure.

■ Glossary of tire terminology

- Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess those standard items which may replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brak

power windows, power seats, radi and heater, to the extent that the items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

- Bead

The part of the tire that is made steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped the rim.

- Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead.

- Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantial less than 90 degrees to the center line of the tread.

- Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load.

of• Chunking

beThe breaking away of pieces of tread or sidewall.

s, Cold tire pressure

o,The pressure in a tire that has be driven less than 1 mile or has be

standing for three hours or more.

- Cord

The strands forming the plies in tire.

ofCord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent to fiber compounds.

- Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire extending to cord material.

- Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine.

- Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and higher inflation pressure than the corresponding standard tire.

- Groove

The space between two adjacent dread ribs.

- Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire.

• Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass.

- Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that

must always face outward

when mounting on a vehicle

• Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

- Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

• Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflat

• Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

• Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight

• Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be infla

- Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted physical dimension requirements.

• Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 that is append to the end of this section.

• Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that is appended to the end of this section.

- Open splice

Any parting at any junction of trea sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material.

- Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire.

- Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs.

edPassenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

• Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

- Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies.

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel; provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

• Production options weight

The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special tr

- Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads at laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

- Recommended inflation pressure

The cold inflation pressure recommended by a vehicle manufacture

- Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at high loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire.

- Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

- Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead sea

- Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

- Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer's de

ignation for a rim by style or cod

- Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges.

- Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands.

- Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead.

erSidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compou-from the cord material in the side wall.

- Snow tire

reA tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136-93 Sta

dard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straig

s-Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered

eSurfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol “⚠” on at least one sidewall.

- Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and it may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire.

- Tread

-That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

- Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire.

- Tread separation

nRolling away of the tread from the tire carcass.

• Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

• Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity.

• Vehicle maximum load on the Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two.
• Vehicle normal load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 that is append to the end of this section) and dividing by 2.
• Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing.

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2	2 in front.
5 through 10	3	2 in front, 1 in second seat.
11 through 15	5	2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 i fourth seat.
led 16 through 22	7	2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 i fourth seat.

■ Tire care – maintenance and safety practices

• Check on a daily basis that the tires are free from serious damage, nails, and stones. At the same time, check the tires for abnormal wear.
• Inspect the tire tread regularly and replace the tires before their tread wear indicators become visible. When a tire's tread wear indicator becomes visible, the tire is worn beyond the acceptable limit and must be replaced immediately. With a tire in this condition, driving at even low speeds in wet weather can cause the vehicle to hydroplane. Possible resulting loss of vehicle control can lead to an accident.
• To maximize the life of each tire and ensure that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to rotate the tires every 6,000 miles (10,000 km). For information about the tire rotation order, refer to Tire rotation" & P501. Replace any

damaged or unevenly worn tires at the time of rotation. After tire rotation, adjust the tire pressure and make sure the wheel nuts are correctly tightened. For information about the tightening torque and tightening sequence for the wheel nuts, refer to Flat tires" P452.

■ Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle load capacities

The sum of four tires' maximum load ratings must exceed the maximum loaded vehicle weight (“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the maximum load ratings of two front tires and of two rear tires must exceed each axle's maximum loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original equipment tires are designed to fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle weight is referred to Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). And each axle's maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and each Saxle's GAWR are shown on the vehicle certification label located at the bottom of driver's side door pillar.

The GVWR and front and rear GAWRs are determined by not only the maximum load rating of tires but also loaded capacities of the vehicle's suspension, axles and other parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the vehicle cannot necessarily be loaded up to the tire's maximum load rating on the tire sidewall.

■ Adverse safety consequences of overloading on handling and stopping and on tires

Overloading could affect vehicle handling, stopping distance, and vehicle and tire performance in the following ways. This could lead to an accident and possibly result in severe personal injury.

• Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
• Heavy and/or high-mounted loads could increase the risk of rollover.
• Stopping distance will increase.
• Brakes could overheat and fail.
• Suspension, bearings, axles and other body parts could break or experience accelerated wear that will shorten vehicle life.
• Tires could fail.
• Tread separation could occur.
• Tire could separate from its rim.

■ Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in y vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacit is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

13-3. Vehicle load limit - how to determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by available cargo space. The load limit of your vehicle is shown on the vehicle placard attached to the driver's side door pillar. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.

The vehicle placard also shows seating capacity of your vehicle. The total load capacity includes the total weight of driver and all passengers and their belongings, any cargo, any optional equipment such as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bicycle carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity can be calculated by the following methods.

Cargo capacity = Load limit - (total weight of occupants + total weight

of optional equipment + tongue of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle loading, refer to Loading your vehicle" P426.

■ Calculating total and load capacities varying seating configurations

Calculate the available load capacity as shown in the following examples:

Example 1A

Line drawing of a car interior view showing driver and passenger (no text or symbols)

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

aindicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 900 lbs or 408 kg".

For example, if the vehicle has one occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300 kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} + \frac {6 6 2 \text { lbs (300 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} \ = 8 1 6 \text { lbs (370 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity by subtracting the total weight from the vehicle capacity weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

Available Load Capacity

$$ = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {8 1 6 \text { lbs (370 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} $$

$$ = 8 4 \text { lbs (38 kg) } $$

1. The result of step 2 shows that a further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 1B

Line drawing of a car interior view showing driver, passenger, and seat area (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to two), the calculations are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ = \frac {1 5 4 \text { lbs (70 kg) } + 1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} $$

$$ + \frac {6 6 2 \text { lbs (300 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} $$

$$ = 9 9 2 \text { lbs (450 kg) } $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

Available Load Capacity

$$ = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {9 9 2 \text { lbs (450 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} $$

$$ = - 9 2 \text { lbs } (- 4 2 \text { kg }) $$

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 92 lbs kg), so the cargo weight must reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Line drawing of a car connected to a small vehicle via cable, no text or symbols present

Vehicle capacity weight of the vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which indicated on the vehicle placard with the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 408 kg or 900 lbs".

For example, the vehicle has one occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg) plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170 kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs (10 kg), to which is attached a trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {1 6 5 \text { lbs (75 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} + \frac {3 7 5 \text { lbs (170 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} \ + \frac {2 2 \text { lbs (10 kg) }}{(\text { Trailer hitch })} + \frac {1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{(\text { Tongue load })} \ = 7 3 8 \text { lbs (335 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

1. Calculate the available load capacity.

s Available Load Capacity

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text {(Vehicle capacity weight)}} - \frac {7 3 8 \text { lbs (335 kg) }}{\text {(Total weight)}} \ = 1 6 2 \text { lbs (73 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

1. The result of step 2 shows that a further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can be carried.

Example 2B

Line drawing of a car connected to a vehicle via cable, showing internal components and a small vehicle (no text or symbols)

For example, if a person weighing 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weigh 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same vehicle (bringing the number of occupants to three), and a child restraint system weighing 11 lbs (kg) is installed in the vehicle for child to use, the calculations are follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Total weight

$$ \begin{array}{l} = \frac {1 6 5 \text { lbs (75 kg) } + 1 4 3 \text { lbs (65 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} \ + \frac {4 0 \text { lbs (18 kg) }}{(\text { Occupant })} \ + \frac {1 1 \text { lbs (5 kg) }}{(\text { Child restraint })} + \frac {3 7 5 \text { lbs (170 kg) }}{(\text { Cargo })} \ + \frac {2 2 \text { lbs (10 kg) }}{\text {(Trailer hitch)}} + \frac {1 7 6 \text { lbs (80 kg) }}{\text {(Tongue load)}} \ = 9 3 2 \text { lbs (423 kg) } \ \end{array} $$

ing Calculate the available load came pacity.

Available Load Capacity

$$ 5 = \frac {9 0 0 \text { lbs (408 kg) }}{\text { (Vehicle }} - \frac {9 3 2 \text { lbs (423 kg) }}{\text { (Total weight) }} $$

$$ \begin{array}{l} \text {the capacity weight)} \ \text {as} \end{array} $$

$$ = - 3 2 \text { lbs } (- 1 5 \text { kg }) $$

1. The total weight now exceeds the capacity weight by 32 lbs kg), so the cargo weight must reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards

This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type 1 snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ TRACTION AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measure under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

of ⚠️ WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

■ TEMPERATURE A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the entire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

-excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards No. 109.

- Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for the tire is established for a tire is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

13-6. How to contact Transport Canada in order to report a safety concern relating to the vehicle (Canada)

Transport Canada - ASFAD

330 Sparks Street

Ottawa, ON K1A 0N5

Telephone: [phone]

(Ottawa-Gatineau area or internationally)

Toll free: 1-800-333-0510 (in Canada)

Online:

http://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls

Transports Canada - ASFAD

330, rue Sparks

Ottawa (Ontario) K1A 0N5

Téléphone: 819-994-3328

Accessory power outlet P310

Activation of valet mode P230

Air cleaner element P491

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control P284

Automatic climate control system.... P285

Manual climate control.... P286

Air filtration system P294

Airflow mode P286

Airflow selection

Automatic climate control system.... P285

Alarm system P142

All-Wheel Drive warning light.... P183

Antenna.... P298

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P365

Arming the system P142

Ashtray.... P314

Assist grip.... P315

AT OIL TEMP warning light P178

Audio set P298

Auto dimmer cancel function P172

Auto on/off headlights.... P231

Sensor P233

Auto Vehicle Hold function P376

ON indicator light P183

Auto-dimming mirror/compass.... P247

Automatic climate control system P285

Automatic headlight beam leveler Warning light P191

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) P54

Automatic rain sensing windshield wipers..... P243

B

Battery P509

Drainage prevention function P140

Jump starting..... P457

Replacement (access key fob).... P517

Replacement (remote keyless entry system) ...... P136

Replacement (transmitter) P518

Vehicle battery P509

Bench seat P39

Booster cushion P75

Booster seat P75

Brake

Assist P364

Disc.... P527

Fluid P493, P525

Parking P374

Pedal.... P494

System P364

Brake system.... P364

Warning light P181

Braking P363

Tips P363

Breaking-in of new brake pads.... P495

BSD/RCTA..... P382

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer..... P386

OFF indicator P192, P388

Warning indicator..... P192, P388

Warning volume.... P387

Bulb Chart..... P528 Replacement..... P51

C

Cabin connect P207, P302

Captain seat.... P39

Cargo area Cover P317 Light P303, P516

Tie-down hooks P319

Catalytic converter P417

Center console P308

Changing Coolant..... P490 Flat tire..... P452 Oil and oil filter ..... P488

Charge warning light P177

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light.... P176

Checking Coolant level ..... P489 Fluid level (brake fluid) ..... P493 Fluid level (washer fluid)..... P503 Oil level (engine oil) ..... P486

Child restraint systems.... P65

Installation of a booster cushion.... P75

Installation of a booster seat.... P75

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt..... P70

Lower and top tether anchorages..... P76

Top tether anchorages P81

Child safety Locks..... P145

Chime Key ...... P165 Light ...... P231 Seatbelt ...... P55, P173

Cigarette lighter P311

Cleaning Alloy wheels ..... P474 Interior ..... P475 Ventilation grille..... P293

Climate control system.... P279, P285 Automatic.... P284, P285 Manual.... P286

Clock P228 Coat hook P316

Combination meter display (color LCD) P194

Compass.... P247 Console.... P308

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...... P357 Fluid ...... P493 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ...... P17

Cooling system P489 Corrosion protection P474

D

Daytime running light system P237

Deactivation of valet mode.... P230

Defogger P273

Defrosting P292

Deicer P273

Differential gear oil

Front P493, P525

Rear P493, P525

Dimensions P522

Disarming the alarm system.... P143

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators P365

Door

Locks P137

Open warning light.... P183

Step light P515

Double trip meter P169

Drive belts P492

DriverFocus P402

Driver Monitoring System.... P402

OFF indicator light P193

Operation indicator light P193

Temporary stop indicator light.... P193

Warning light P193

Driving

AWD vehicles.... P418

Foreign countries P418

Off road P420

Snowy and icy roads.... P424

Tips.... P362, P416, P418

Winter P422

E

ECO gauge P171

Electrical system P526

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system P181, P366

Warning P181

Electronic parking brake.... P374

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P376

Indicator light..... P181

Warning P379

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).... P54

Engine

Compartment overview P485

Coolant P489, P526

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).... P416

Hood P483

Low oil level warning light P177

Oil P486, P523

Overheating..... P459

Starting & stopping.... P344, P346

Exterior care P472

F

Flat tires.... P452

Floor mat.... P315

Fluid level

Brake..... P493

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...... P493

Fog light P239

Indicator light P192

Switch..... P239

Folding mirror switch P271

Front

Differential gear oil.... P493, P525

Seatbelt pretensioners.... P61

Turn signal light P512

Front seat

Forward and backward adjustment P33

Manual seat P33

Memory function P35

Power seat.... P34

Reclining the seatback P33

Seat heater P51

Seat height adjustment.... P34

Front seat heater P291

Fuel P337, P523

Consumption indicator P198

Economy hints..... P416

Filler lid and cap P338

Gauge P170

Requirements.... P337, P523

Fuses P510

G

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) P428

Glove box P307

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)..... P428

H

Hazard warning flasher.... P168, P446

Headlight P231, P512

Beam leveler P239

Bulb replacing.... P512

Bulb wattage P528

Control switch P231

Flasher P234

Indicator light P192

Welcome lighting function.... P232

Heater

Front seat P291

High beam assist.... P234

Indicator light P191

High beam assist function P234

High beam indicator light..... P191

High/low beam change (dimmer) P234

Hill descent control P369, P372

Indicator P192

Hill start assist P380

HomeLink P247

Hook

Cargo tie-down P319

Coat P316

Shopping bag P317

Towing and tie-down P460

Horn P276

Hose and connections.... P489

|

Icy road surface warning indicator P193

Ignition switch P164

Light P165

Illumination brightness control P171

Immobilizer P132

Indicator light (security indicator light)..... P132, P190

Indicator light

Auto Vehicle Hold P183

BSD/RCTA OFF P192, P388

BSD/RCTA warning.... P192, P388

Driver Monitoring System operation P193

Electronic parking brake P181

Front fog light P192

Headlight P192

High beam P191

High beam assist P191

Hill descent control P192

Immobilizer P132

Security P132, P190

Select lever/Gear position P191

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF P191

Turn signal.... P191

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF.... P185

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ...... P184, P185

X-MODE P192

Inside mirror..... P246

Interior lights P302

J

Jack-up point..... P452

Jump starting P457

K

Key P116

Number plate P116

Reminder chime P165

Replacement P132

Keyless access with push-button start system ...... P117

Disabling keyless access functions.... P127

Warning chimes and warning light..... P130, P186

When access key does not operate properly P130, P168, P348, P464

Keyless entry system P133

Keyless entry system (models without push-button start system) P133

L

Lap belt pretensioner P62

Leather seat materials..... P476

License plate light P515

Light

Backup P513

Cargo area.... P303, P516

Control switch P231

Daytime running.... P237

Door step P515

Front fog P239

Front side marker P231

Front turn signal light P512

Ignition switch P165

License plate P515

Map.... P302, P515

Reading P303, P515

Rear combination P513

Rear side marker light P513

Stop P513

Tail P513

Turn signal..... P240, P512, P513

Vanity mirror..... P306, P515

Loading your vehicle P426

Low fuel warning light.... P183

Low tire pressure warning light P179

Lower and top tether anchorage P76

M

Maintenance

Precautions.... P481

Schedule P481

Seatbelt P61

Tools P446

Manual mode P359

Map light P302, P515

Maximum load limits..... P435

Meters and gauges P168

Mirror defogger.... P273

Mirrors..... P246

Moonroof P157, P468

N

New vehicle break-in driving P416

0

Odometer P169

Off road driving.... P420

Oil filter P488

Oil level

Engine..... P486

Front differential gear P493

Rear differential gear P493

Warning light P177

Oil pressure warning light P177

One-touch Interior Illumination function P304

One-touch lane changer P240

Outside

Mirror defogger P273

Mirrors P269, P273

Overheating engine P459

P

Parking P374

Brake.... P374

Tips P379

Passenger seatbelt reminder P173

Periodic inspections.... P418

Petrol fuel.... P337

PIN code Access P124

Power

Outlets..... P310

Outside mirrors P269, P273

Rear gate.... P149

Seat P34

Steering P362

Steering warning light P184

Windows P145

Power rear gate P149

Precautions against vehicle modification ..... P64, P112

Preparing to drive.... P343

Push-button

Ignition switch.... P164, P166

Starting and stopping engine..... P344, P346

R

RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

OFF indicator P193

Warning indicator.... P193, P401

RCTA P384

Rear

Combination lights P513

Differential gear oil P493, P525

Gate P148, P466

Turn signal light P513

Rear door window sunshade P159

Rear Seat Reminder P65

Rear view camera.... P328

Rear window

Defogger P273

Wiper and washer switch.... P245

Wiper blades.... P507

Recommended

Brake fluid P494, P525

Continuously variable transmission fluid P525

Engine oil P488, P523

Front differential gear oil.... P525

Rear differential gear oil P525

Spark plugs.... P492, P526

Refueling P338

Remote engine start system.... P349

Remote keyless entry system.... P133

Remote keyless entry system (models without push-button start system) P133

Replacement

Access key fob battery.... P517

Air cleaner element P491

Brake pad P495

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ...... P518

Wiper blades P504

Replacing

Battery (remote keyless entry system)..... P136

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)..... P136

Replacing bulbs P511

Backup light P513

Cargo area light P516

Door step light P515

Front position light P512

Front turn signal light P512

License plate light P515

Map light P515

Reading light P515

Rear combination light P513

Rear side marker light P513

Rear turn signal light P513

Stop light P513

Tail light P513

Vanity mirror light P515

Reverse Automatic Braking system P391

Rocking the vehicle P426

Roof rails.... P428

Roof tent P429

s

Seat

Fabric..... P475

Heater P50

Seatbelt P52

Fastening..... P55

Maintenance P61

Pretensioners P61

Safety tips.... P52

Warning light and chime P55, P173

Second-row seat P39

Armrest P42

Folding down the seatback P41

Forward and backward adjustment P40

Reclining the seatback P40

Seat heater P51

Security

Alarm system P142

Immobilizer P132

Indicator light P132, P190

Select lever

Position indicator P191

Shift lock function P361

Shopping bag hook P317

Shoulder pretensioners.... P63

Smart Rearview Mirror P254

Snow tires.... P425, P496

Snowy and icy roads.... P424

Sounding a panic alarm.... P135

Spare tire.... P447

Spark plugs.... P492, P526

Specifications.... P522

Speedometer P168

SRS

Curtain airbag.... P103

Frontal airbag P92

Side airbag.... P103

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) P83

SRS airbag system

Monitors.... P110

Servicing P111

Warning light P175

Starting & stopping engine.... P344, P346

State emission testing (U.S. only).... P342

Steering lock.... P345, P349

Steering Responsive Headlight P238

Steering wheel

Heater P275

Lock P345, P349

Power P362

Tilt/telescopic.... P274

Stop light P513, P529

Storage compartment..... P307

Sun visors P305

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).... P83

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) P83

Surround View Monitor.... P320

Synthetic leather upholstery.... P476

T

Tachometer P168

Temperature gauge.... P170

Temperature warning light AT OIL TEMP P178 Rear differential oil P178

Temporary spare tire .... P451, P527 Tether (child restraint system) .... P76, P81

Third-row seat P43

Tie-down hooks/holes.... P460

Tire P495, P526 Chains P425

Inspection P497

Pressures and wear P498

Replacement P502

Rotation..... P501

Size and pressure.... P526

Types P495

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).... P179, P373, P455, P496

Warning light P179

Tires and wheels P495

Tools P446

Top tether anchorages.... P76, P81

Towing.... P460 All wheels on the ground .... P463

Flat-bed truck P462

Hooks.... P460

Weight..... P435

Trailer Connecting P432

Hitch P431, P438

Towing tips.... P440

Trailer towing P434

Trip meter..... P169

Turn signal Indicator lights P191 Lever P240

U

Under-floor storage compartment P320

USB power supply..... P312

v

Valet mode P144, P230

Vanity mirror P306 Light P515

Vehicle Capacity weight ..... P427 Identification ..... P531

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light.... P185 Operation indicator light .... P184, P185 System .... P367 Warning light .... P184

Ventilator P278

W

Warning and indicator lights.... P172

Warning chimes Keyless access with push-button start system ..... P186 Seatbelt ..... P55, P173

Warning indicator BSD/RCTA P192

Icy road surface..... P193

RAB P193, P401

Warning light

ABS P180, P366

Access key fob P186

All-Wheel Drive P183

AT OIL TEMP P178

Automatic headlight beam leveler P191

Brake system P181

Charge P177

CHECK ENGINE P176

Door open.... P183

Driver Monitoring System.... P193

Engine low oil level P177

Keyless access with push-button start system..... P186

LED headlight P191

Low fuel.... P183

Low tire pressure P179

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... P176

Oil pressure P177

Power steering P184

Rear differential oil temperature.... P178

Seatbelt P55, P173

SRS airbag system P175

Steering Responsive Headlight..... P191

Vehicle Dynamics Control P184, P185

Windshield washer fluid P178

Warranties and maintenance..... P435

Washing P472

Waxing and polishing P473

Wear indicators P500

Welcome lighting function.... P232

Wheel

Alloy P503

Balance P499

Nut tightening torque P452, P527

Replacement P502

Windows P145

Windshield

Washer fluid P503

Wiper and washer switches.... P243

Wiper blades P505

Wiper deicer P273

Winter

Driving P422

Tires P425, P496

Wiper and washer P241

Wiper deicer P273

X

X-MODE..... P369

Indicator..... P192

-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-
-	-	-	-	-	-	-

Pure grid lines without any text, numbers, or symbols

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI RON) or higher.

■ Fuel octane rating

▼ RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

▼ AKI

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the An Knock Index (AKI).

■ Fuel tank capacity

19.3 US gal (73 liters, 16.1 Imp gal)

■ Limit of ethanol content

No more than 15%

■ Engine oil

490 only the following oils.

• API classification SP with the words "RESOURCE CONSERVING"
• or ILSAC GF-6A, which can be identified with the ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to "Engine oil" P523.

■ Engine oil capacity

4.8 US qt (4.5 liters, 4.0 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to "Engine oil" P486.

■ Cold tire pressure

Refer to "Tires" P526.